Skip to main content

Full text of "Great Work: The Constructive Principle of Nature in Individual Life (1928) [Harmonic Series, 1928 Editions]"

See other formats


p^ 


^    Work 


%e  Phibsopkj  of  Iridii/idual  Lije 


Addressed  to 
The  Progressive  Intelligence  of  the  Age 


Harmonics  of  Evolution 

By  FLORENCE  HUNTLEY 
Revised  by  TK. 

Vol.    I 

HARMONIC  SERIES 


The  Chicago  Tribune  says  of  this  book:  "A 
woman  has  entered  the  lists  against  the  most  pro- 
found thinkers  of  the  age.  She  has  written  a  book 
which  treats  of  things  which  have  puzzled  the 
greatest  minds  since  the  days  of  Pythagoras  to 
Herbert  Spencer.  That  it  should  be  done  by  a 
woman  is  remarkable;  that  it  should  be  done  80 
well  is  extraordinary." 

This  book  should  be  read  by  every  man  and 
woman  who  is  married,  or  ever  hopes  to  be,  as  it 
explains  Nature's  Selective  Principle. 

Love,  Marriage  and  Happiness  —  Unhappiness 
and  Divorce  are  all  discussed  from  highest  view- 
points. Love  and  Happiness  depend  upon  fixed  Laws 
of  Nature. 

It  covers  that  universal  principle  in  Nature  of 
Individual  Evolution  which  operates  throughout 
the  mineral,  vegetable,  animal  and  human  kingdoms. 

It  is  a  complete  exposition  of  Nature's  Evolu- 
tion, through  the  Principle  of  Polarity,  and  Man's 
Struggle  for  Happiness. 


$3i6' 


T«^ 


^ET 


yORK 


7/ie  Phibsophpffridv/di/dlLife 


The  Great  Work 

The  Constructive  Principle 

of  Nature 

in  Individual  Life 


Volume  III 

HARMONIC  SERIES 

Revised  Edition 


By 
J.  E.  RICHARDSON 


Author  of 
Vols.  II,  IV,  V 

and 

Editor  of  Vol.  I 

HARMONIC  SERIES 


THE  GREAT  SCHOOL 
OF  NATURAL  SCIENCE 


Copyright,  1928,  by 
J.  E.  RICHARDSON 


Published   Augmt,   1928 


ADDRESSED  TO 
THE  PROGRESSIVE  INTELLIGENCE  OF  THE  AGE 


The  Great  Work 

Chapter  Pace 

Nature's  Constructive  Principle I  9 

Mastership II  11 

Construction  in  Operation Ill  15 

Scientific  Demonstration IV  23 

Science  and  Religion V  33 

Spirituality VI  41 

Morality VII  55 

Classification  of  Data VIII  67 

Intellectual  Poverty  and  Indolence IX  77 

Ethical  Section X  89 

Soul XI  101 

Consciousness XII  109 

Will XIII  125 

Desire  and  Choice XIV  131 

Knowledge XV  143 

Possessions XVI  155 

Law  of  Compensation XVII  173 

Receiving  and  Giving XVIII  187 

First  Great  Milepost XIX  193 

Self-Control XX  201 

Temperance XXI  213 

Inalienable  Rights XXII  227 

Duties  and  Obligations XXIII  235 

Spirit  of  the  Work XXIV  239 

Second  Great  Milepost XXV  249 

"Atonement" XXVI  265 

Attitude  of  Soul XXVII  271 

Livingof  a  Life.. XXVIII  279 

Truth  and  Light XXIX  285 

Lions  on  the  Way XXX  297 

Technical  Section XXXI  303 

Vibrations XXXII  309 

Technical  Work XXXIII  321 

Forfeiture XXXIV  343 

Meat  and  Morals XXXV  351 

Mark  of  the  Master XXXVI  359 

The  Transition  Called  "Death".. XXXVII  369 

Passing  of  a  Master XXXVIII  379 


THE  GREAT  WORK 


'Fools  Deride,  Philosophers  Investigaii 


CHAPTER  I 


nature's  constructive  principle 


1.  Nature  evolves  a  Man. 

2.  Man,  co-operating  with  Nature, 
evolves  a  "Master." 

3.  The  Master-Man,  co-operating  with 
and  controlling  the  forces,  activities  and 
processes  of  Nature,  evolves  a ? 

9 


CHAPTER  II 


MASTERSHIP 


Nature  evolves  a  Man.  Nature  alone, 
hovs^ever,  can  never  evolve  a  Master.  Mas- 
tership involves  a  process  wherein  the  intelli- 
gence and  volition  of  man  himself  are  vital 
and  essential  factors.  While  Nature  working 
alone  can  never  evolve  a  Master,  man  co-op- 
erating with  and  supplementing  Nature  may 
accomplish  that  transcendent  result.  Neither 
can  man  working  alone  ever  evolve  a  Master. 
He  can  do  so  only  by  co-operating  with  and 
supplementing  Nature  in  such  manner  as  to 
conform  his  life  to  her  Constructive  Prin- 
ciple and  Process,  and  thus  add  the  potency 
of  his  Individual  Will  to  Nature's  effort  in 
one  common  evolutionary  impulse. 

Nature,  unaided  by  Individual  Intelli- 
gence, carries  the  evolutionary  impulse  and 
process  upward  until  Man  is  an  accomplished 
fact.  At  this  point  Nature  stops.  Beyond 
this  point,  it  would  seem,  she  cannot  go  with- 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

out  Man's  voluntary  consent  and  intelligent 
co-operation.  This  fact  is  proven  beyond  all 
question.  It  is  accepted,  consciously  or  other- 
wise, by  all  mankind. 

Nature  has  invested  man  with  the  Soul  At- 
tributes of  Consciousness  and  Will,  which  en- 
able him  to  know  things  and  do  things  on  his 
own  initiative;  or  know  things  and  not  do 
them,  as  he  wills. 

By  thus  equipping  man  with  such  faculties, 
capacities  and  powers  as  enable  him  to  act 
voluntarily  and  independently  Nature  has 
made  it  possible  for  him  to  add  his  own  in- 
telligent effort  to  the  evolutionary  impulse 
of  Nature  and  by  so  doing  he  is  able  to  carry 
forward  the  evolutionary  process  far  beyond 
the  point  where  Nature  would  be  compelled 
to  stop  if  man  refused  his  cooperation. 

By  thus  investing  man  with  the  Soul  At- 
tributes of  Consciousness,  Independent 
Choice  and  Rational  Volition,  Nature  has 
made  it  possible  for  us  to  pursue  a  neu- 
tral course.  In  this  event  we  neither  actively 
help  nor  hinder  Nature  in  her  evolutionary 
eflfort.  By  thus  electing  to  withhold  our  co- 
operative  aid   we   throw   the   entire   burden 

12 


MASTERSHIP 

upon  Nature.  In  this  event  we  inevitably 
stop  at  the  "estate  of  man"  to  which  point 
Nature  unaided  has  carried  us,  and  we  pro- 
ceed no  further.  Beyond  this  point  man  can- 
not be  forced.  Further  progress  is  impossible 
except  by  his  consent  and  with  his  active  and 
intelligent  co-operation. 

By  investing  man  with  those  attributes  of 
the  Soul  which  enable  him  to  act  indepen- 
dently and  voluntarily,  Nature  has  also  made 
it  possible  for  us  to  set  our  own  independent 
and  intelligent  effort  in  direct  opposition  to 
her  evolutionary  process.  In  this  case  we  not 
only  fail  to  add  anything  to  Nature's  upward 
impulse,  but  we  go  still  further  than  the  neu- 
tral point  and  actually  subtract  from  that  im- 
pulse the  full  measure  of  all  the  efifort  we 
exert  in  opposition  thereto.  The  inevitable 
result  is  that  we  thereby  set  in  motion  a 
process  which  is  the  exact  reverse  of  evolu- 
tionary. We  not  only  stop  the  wheels  of  evo- 
lutionary unfoldment,  but  we  reverse  them. 
The  result  is  that  we  thereby  set  in  motion 
the  devolutionary  process  and  at  once  invoke 
the  Destructive  Principle  instead  of  the  Con- 
structive Principle  of  Nature. 

13 


1  HK  (JRLAT  WORK 

Through  the  intelligent  exercise  of  our  in- 
dividual Powers  we  may  place  ourselves  in 
perfect  alignment  with  the  Constructive 
Principle  of  Nature  in  Individual  Life,  and 
thereby  add  to  Nature's  evolutionary  im- 
pulse our  own  intelligent  effort.  The  inev- 
itable result  of  this  intelligent  coopera- 
tion with  Nature  is  the  attainment  of  in- 
dividual Mastership,  in  due  course  of  time. 
Thus  we  demonstrate  the  interesting  fact  that 
while  Nature,  of  her  own  accord  and  by  her 
unaided  effort,  evolves  a  Man,  it  requires  the 
added  impulse  of  man's  own  individual  in- 
telligent effort,  acting  in  harmony  with  Na- 
ture, to  evolve  a  Master. 


14 


CHAPTER  III 


CONSTRUCTION   IN  OPERATION 


There  is  in  Nature  that  which  integrates 
physical  matter  and  builds  it  up  into  individ- 
ualized forms.  Its  purpose  seems  to  be  to 
construct  individualities  from  the  great  un- 
organized mass  of  material  substance. 

It  manifests  itself  to  the  objective  senses  in 
the  integration  and  crystallization  of  stone. 
It  is  evidenced  by  that  subtle  force  w^hich  in- 
tegrates and  binds  together  in  solid  mass  the 
particles  of  iron,  steel,  copper,  brass,  silver, 
gold  and  other  metals.  It  is  observed  in  the 
condensation  of  vapors  into  liquids  and  of 
liquids  into  solids.  It  is  demonstrated  by  that 
subtle  affinity  between  the  atoms  of  physical 
matter  upon  which  the  chemist  in  his  labor- 
atory bases  all  his  chemical  compounds.  It  is : 

That    principle    in    nature    which 

IMPELS  every  entity  TO  SEEK  VIBRATORY 
correspondence  with  another  like  EN- 
TITY OF  OPPOSITE  POLARITY. 

15 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

In  the  vegetable  kingdom  it  reveals  itself 
in  the  results  of  that  mysterious  process 
which  integrates  matter  into  cells,  cells  into 
aggregates  and  aggregates  into  bodies  which 
we  call  trees,  plants,  flowers,  fruits  and  vege- 
tables. It  is  discernible  in  the  activity  with 
which  particles  of  earth  and  air  and  water 
are  made  to  combine  and  flow  in  continuous 
streams  into  the  body  of  the  growing  tree  or 
plant.  It  is  indeed  that  which  manifests  it- 
self in  the  outward  or  objective  expression  of 
life,  health,  development  and  growth  in  all 
the  varied  forms  of  vegetation. 

In  the  animal  kingdom  its  manifestations 
cover  yet  a  wider  range.  We  observe  it  in 
that  which  impels  a  single  nucleated  cell  to 
grow,  expand,  multiply  and  combine  with 
others  of  its  kind  into  definite  organs.  We 
note  its  evidences  in  the  development  of  these 
simple  organs  into  living,  individual,  organic 
entities.  We  watch  its  manifestation  with  in- 
terest in  the  development  of  the  animal  life 
germ  into  the  living  infant  animal,  and  in  the 
growth  of  the  infant  animal  to  its  full  matur- 
ity. We  add  to  our  interest  a  tender  solici- 
tude and  personal  affection  as  we  study  its 
u 


CONSTRUCTION  IN  OPERATION 

manifestation  in  the  growth  and  development 
of  the  infant  human  being  from  its  first  ap- 
pearance in  this  physical  life  through  all  the 
stages  of  its  infancy,  childhood,  youth  and 
maturity;  and  we  seem  to  miss  it  in  the  de- 
clining years  of  old  age. 

To  this  point  in  the  ascending  scale  of  in- 
dividual development  we  have  been  observing 
what  would  appear  to  be  the  outward  objec- 
tive expressions  of  a  purely  automatic  proc- 
ess of  physical  nature.  Mineral  aggregate 
bodies,  vegetables  and  animals  come  into  ex- 
istence, integrate,  grow,  unfold  and  mature, 
so  far  as  we  can  determine,  by  the  operation 
of  a  law  or  principle  of  development  in  Na- 
ture, over  which  they  have  no  control.  They 
seem  to  be  involuntary  subjects  of  it.  They 
would  appear  to  follow  their  course  of  in- 
tegration and  growth  because  they  respond 
automatically  to  the  Constructive  Principle 
of  Nature  in  its  manipulation  of  physical 
conditions  and  its  impelling  power  over 
physical  things. 

In  our  consideration  of  Nature's  Construc- 
tive Principle  it  must  be  understood  that  the 

17 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

term  "Constructive"  is  not  synonymous  with 
"Creative." 

When  it  is  stated  that  man's  physical  body 
is  built  up,  integrated,  renewed  and  sustained 
by  the  operation  of  Nature's  Constructive 
Principle  and  Process,  it  is  not  meant  that 
the  material  substance  thus  employed  is 
thereby  "created"  and  "brought  into  exist- 
ence." So  far  as  we  know  not  a  single  mole- 
cule, atom  or  corpuscle  of  matter  is  created 
by  the  Principle  and  Process  of  Construc- 
tion. 

All  that  is  here  claimed  for  the  Construc- 
tive Principle  of  Nature  in  Individual  Life 
is  that  upon  the  plane  of  physical  nature  it 
takes  hold,  as  it  were,  of  the  physical  matter 
already  in  existence  and  integrates  it,  builds 
it  up  into  individualities  of  form  and  sus- 
tains those  individualities  just  so  long  as  its 
activity  predominates  over  that  of  the  De- 
structive Principle  of  Nature  which  tends  to 
disintegrate  them  and  tear  them  down. 

On  the  plane  of  spiritual  nature  the  Con- 
structive Principle  integrates  spiritual  mat- 
ter, builds  it  up  into  individualities  of  form, 
and  in  like  or  analogous  manner  renews  and 
It 


CONSTRUCTION  IN  OPERATION 

sustains  those  individualities  so  long  as  its 
activity  predominates  over  that  of  the  oppo- 
site principle  of  Nature. 

On  the  intellectual  plane  the  Constructive 
Principle  of  Nature  builds  up  or  constructs 
individualities  of  Intelligence  which  we  are 
able  to  recognize  as  distinctly  and  identify  as 
unmistakably  as  we  do  the  individualities  of 
physical  form.  In  like  or  analogous  manner 
it  renews  and  sustains  these  individualities  of 
Intelligence  so  long  as  its  activities  predomi- 
nate over  those  of  the  Destructive  Principle. 

On  the  ethical  plane  of  being  the  Con- 
structive Principle  builds  up  a  beautiful  in- 
dividuality of  Moral  Character.  This  moral 
individuality  of  man  makes  its  impress  upon 
our  consciousness  as  vividly,  distinctly  and 
unmistakably  as  does  the  individuality  of 
physical  form.  It  is  sustained  only  so  long  as 
the  Constructive  Principle  of  Nature  in  In- 
dividual Life  predominates  over  that  phase 
of  the  Destructive  Principle  which  disinte- 
grates, tears  down,  or  destroys  moral 
strength,  vitality  and  character. 

When  we  come  to  the  consideration  of  the 
kingdom  of  Man,  the  Constructive  Principle 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

of  Nature  takes  on  a  new  aspect.  Here  it  is 
that  the  Intelligent  Soul  or  Man  himself 
takes  the  initiative  and  becomes  the  integrat- 
ing force  in  what  we  designate  as  the  intel- 
lectual and  moral  character  of  human  society. 

In  all  the  kingdoms  below  him  the  con- 
structive forces  and  processes  of  Nature  ap- 
pear to  work  automatically,  as  if  in  response 
to  some  outside  controlling  intelligence;  but 
when  the  estate  of  Man  is  reached,  Nature 
appears  to  shift  the  burden  of  responsibility 
to  Man  himself  and  leaves  him  to  work  out 
his  own  development  and  possibilities.  Na- 
ture at  this  point  "rests  from  her  initiatory 
labors,"  as  it  were,  and  leaves  her  "finished 
product,"  Man,  to  become  the  independent 
demonstrator  of  this  Universal  Principle 
that  makes  for  Integration,  Unity  and  Per- 
manency. 

What  we  know  as  the  Social  Organism  is 
the  result  of  Individual  Intelligence  volun- 
tarily seeking  its  "affinities"  under  such  con- 
ditions as  to  impel  co-operation,  harmony 
and  organization. 

The  nearer  man  approaches  to  barbarism 
the  less  cohesion  there  is  in  his  social  life. 


CONSTRUCTION  IN  OPERATION 

The  higher  the  intelligence  and  moral  de- 
velopment the  closer  and  the  more  enduring 
is  the  Social  Organism. 

The  integrating  force  in  highly  developed 
Society  is  the  Constructive  Principle  of  Na- 
ture working  under  the  voluntary  and  intel- 
ligent guidance  of  Soul  itself. 

There  are  yet  higher  manifestations  of  the 
same  law  or  principle  in  operation.  These 
rise  to  the  more  exalted  plane  of  psychic 
phenomena.  They  constitute  the  indices  by 
which  we  mark  the  constructive  unfoldment 
and  evolutionary  development  of  a  Soul. 
They  measure  the  increasing  power  of 
human  intelligence.  They  signalize  the 
growing  refinement  of  moral  sentiment  and 
aesthetic  taste.  They  evidence  the  increasing 
sensibility  of  human  conscience.  They  mark 
the  growth  of  human  sympathy  with  and 
care  for  those  who  need.  They  measure  the 
increasing  stature  of  human  character.  They 
indicate  the  evolutionary  construction  of 
psychic  individuality. 

This  carries  the  effects  of  the  principle  far 
above  and  beyond  the  plane  of  purely  phys- 

21 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

ical  material,  into  the  realms  of  the  spiritual, 
mental,  moral  and  psychical  in  Nature. 

This  great  fundamental  Law  or  Principle 
of  Nature  back  of  the  process  which  inte- 
grates inorganic  matter,  organizes  vegetable 
and  animal  matter  into  living,  organic  bodies, 
renews  and  sustains  individual  life,  and  con- 
stitutes the  essential  foundation  of  all  devel- 
opment and  growth  —  physical,  spiritual, 
mental,  moral  and  psychical  —  is  Nature's 
Constructive  Principle  in  Individual  Life. 


22 


CHAPTER  IV 


SCIENTIFIC  DEMONSTRATION 


There  is  only  one  process,  or  one  method, 
whereby  the  physical  scientist  will  ever  come 
to  know  with  "scientific"  certainty  that  there 
is  a  spiritual  world  and  a  life  beyond  phys- 
ical death.  There  is  but  one  way  by  which 
he  will  ever  make  the  "scientific  demonstra- 
tion." That  is  by  "the  development  within 
himself  of  Spiritual  perception."  He  must 
admit  this  new  element  into  the  prob- 
lem. By  this  method  and  this  alone  he 
may  be  able  to  reduce  the  "demonstration" 
to  the  basis  of  a  "personal  experience."  Then 
and  then  only  will  he  know.  Even  then  he 
will  not  be  able  to  "demonstrate"  his  knowl- 
edge to  any  other  member  of  his  profession 
by  physical  means  nor  on  the  plane  of  phys- 
ical nature.  The  most  that  he  could  do  would 
be  to  point  out  the  way  whereby  he  pro- 
ceeded to  "develop  within  himself  Spiritual 
perception"  which  brought  the  spiritual  uni- 

23 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

verse  of  matter  and  material  things  within 
the  limitations  of  his  own  sensibilities.  This 
is  as  far  as  he  could  go.  His  fellow  scientists 
would  have  the  rest  to  do  if  they  would  verify 
the  "demonstration"  and  make  it  their  own. 

So  far  as  known  to  the  Great  School  of  the 
Masters  no  physical  eye  has  ever  seen  a 
spiritual  body,  nor  looked  into  the  spiritual 
realms  of  Nature,  nor  sensed  spiritual  mate- 
rial in  any  manner  or  form  whatsoever.  In 
the  very  nature  of  things  it  probably  never 
will.  Nature,  or  God,  or  Universal  Intelli- 
gence, without  consulting  man,  so  far  as  we 
know,  seems  to  have  limited  the  operation  of 
the  physical  senses  of  man  definitely  and  ar- 
bitrarily to  the  plane  of  physical  matter  only. 
In  the  same  arbitrary  and  definite  manner  it 
seems  to  have  been  provided  by  the  Great 
Intelligence  that  the  spiritual  organs  of  sense 
only  can  respond  to  and  receive  sense  impres- 
sions from  spiritual  material  in  any  manner 
or  form  whatsoever. 

With  these  provisions  of  Nature  clearly  in 
mind,  it  is  not  difficult  to  understand  that  the 
only  manner  possible  in  which  man  in  the 
physical  body  ever  can  determine  with  abso- 

24 


SCIENTIFIC  DEMONSTRATION 

lute  certainty  the  existence  of  the  world  of 
spiritual  matter  and  spiritually  embodied  in- 
telligences is  through  the  channels  of  the 
spiritual  senses.  This  means  that  if  he  would 
reduce  the  problem  of  another  life  to  the 
basis  of  "scientific  demonstration,"  he  must 
develop  within  himself  the  power  to  exercise 
his  spiritual  sensory  organism  independently, 
self-consciously  and  voluntarily.  He  must 
turn  his  attention  from  the  plane  of  physical 
nature  and  physical  phenomena  to  the  plane 
of  spiritual  nature  and  spiritual  phenomena. 
He  must  learn  how  to  make  a  spiritual  dem- 
onstration instead  of  attempting  to  reduce 
the  problem  to  the  basis  of  physical  experi- 
mentation. He  must  find  a  way  to  open  his 
consciousness  to  impressions  from  the  plane 
of  materiality  upon  which  alone  a  "scientific 
demonstration"  can  ever  be  made. 

Let  us  assume  that  a  learned  physician  has 
a  newly  discovered  drug.  He  does  not  yet 
know  its  nature,  its  potency,  its  physiological 
action  nor  its  therapeutic  value.  He  does  not 
so  much  as  suspect  for  an  instant  that  it  also 
has  a  positive  and  definite  psychological  po- 
tency.   This  is  because  he  knows  nothing,  as 

25 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

yet,  of  the  psychology  of  medicine.  The 
problem  which  confronts  him  is  this:  How 
shall  he  proceed  to  test  his  new  drug  in  such 
manner  that  when  he  is  through  he  may  be 
able  to  say  to  the  world  and  to  the  other 
members  of  his  profession,  in  good  faith,  that 
he  has  made  a  "scientific  demonstration," 
and  thus  brought  the  subject  matter  clearly 
within  the  scope  of  his  own  absolute,  per- 
sonal knowledge? 

Suppose  he  should  follow  the  method  so 
often  and  so  cruelly  practiced,  of  trying  it 
on  some  innocent  and  helpless  dog.  By 
doing  this  and  then  watching  the  object- 
ive symptoms  through  a  study  of  the  dog's 
actions,  he  might,  in  time,  and  after  oft- 
repeated  experiments,  arrive  at  a  general 
conclusion  which,  from  the  standpoint  of 
legitimate  science,  would  be  deemed  a  rea- 
sonably good  guess.  But  the  dog  cannot  tell 
him  its  own  story,  nor  can  it  convey  to  him  a 
definite  and  adequate  understanding  and  ap- 
preciation of  its  own  experiences.  It  is  these 
that  constitute  the  very  essence  of  the  "dem- 
onstration" from  the  viewpoint  of  "exact  sci- 
ence."     He    dare    not    accept    this    experi- 

26 


SCIENTIFIC  DEMONSTRATION 

ment  as  sufficient,  because  it  clearly  fails 
to  bring  the  results  within  the  exacting 
limitations  of  "scientific  demonstration."  The 
drug  may  not,  after  all,  act  upon  a  human 
being  in  all  respects  precisely  as  it  seems  to 
act  upon  the  dog.  He  must  make  the 
experiment  on  some  of  his  human  patients. 
He  must  measure  its  action  in  terms  of 
human  experience.  He  does  so,  and  to  the 
best  of  his  ability  notes  the  objective  mani- 
festations as  before.  In  addition  to  these,  he 
questions  his  patients  with  all  his  intelligence 
and  skill,  to  learn  from  them  whatsoever  he 
may  concerning  their  internal  feelings  and 
experiences.  From  these  he  obtains  some 
added  information. 

He  now  assumes  that  he  is  in  position 
to  draw  a  more  legitimate  conclusion  and 
formulate  a  somewhat  more  logical  and 
likely  guess  than  before.  Still  he  is  not 
absolutely  certain  of  his  ground,  because 
outward  symptoms  are  not  always  reliable 
indices  of  internal  conditions;  and  "Speech 
is  but  broken  light  upon  the  depths  of 
the  unspoken"  experiences  of  a  Soul;  and 
because   up   to   this   point   of    experimenta- 

27 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

tion  all  the  information  he  has  obtained  is  of 
a  purely  secondary  nature.  He  does  not  yet 
know  by  a  definite  personal  experience  the 
exact,  or  "scientific''  action  of  his  new  drug. 
How  shall  he  finally  round  this  difficult  but 
indispensable  point?  How  shall  he  proceed 
to  reduce  his  experiment  to  the  required 
basis  of  absolute  personal  knowledge? 

There  is  one  way,  and  one  only.  He  must 
administer  the  drug  to  himself.  He  must 
make  the  final  experiment  upon  himself.  He 
must  study  the  results  upon  and  within  his 
own  organism.  He  must  analyze  the  exact  im- 
pressions it  produces  upon  his  own  con- 
sciousness. Finally  he  must  co-ordinate  all 
these  into  a  definite  "personal  experience." 
Then  only  is  he  in  position  to  say  to  the  world 
that  he  knows.  Then,  and  then  only,  is  he,  of 
right,  entitled  to  say  to  his  professional  broth- 
ers that  he  has,  in  truth,  reduced  the  problem 
to  the  basis  of  "exact  science,"  and  made  a 
"scientific  demonstration." 

Let  us  suppose  that  he  should  take  excep- 
tion to  this  illustration  on  the  ground  that  it 
is  too  rigidly  exacting. 

Suppose  he  should  hold,  as  he  surely  will 

28 


SCIENTIFIC  DEMONSTRATION 

if  he  is  at  all  honest,  that  the  "science"  for 
which  he  is  contending  does  not  demand  the 
"personal  experience"  as  a  final  test  of  suf- 
ficiency. What  then? 

If  that  be  true,  then  out  of  his  own  mouth 
he  stands  convicted  of  admitting  as  "scien- 
tifically demonstrated"  that  which  The  Great 
School  of  the  Masters  would  exclude  from 
its  own  data  for  lack  of  "demonstration." 
In  this  event,  he  shows  conclusively  that 
the  school  of  "science"  to  which  he  assumes 
to  belong  is  much  less  "exact"  and  far  less 
exacting  in  its  method  of  determining  re- 
sults and  accumulating  data  than  the  Great 
School  whose  methods  he  would  seem  to 
condemn  and  whose  "demonstrations"  he 
would  seem  to  reject  as  insufficient  and  there- 
fore unscientific.  For  The  Great  School  of 
the  Masters  holds  that  wherever  a  "per- 
sonal experience"  is  possible  nothing  short 
of  this  will  be  accepted  by  it  as  a  "scien- 
tific demonstration."  All  data  which  can- 
not be  reduced  in  their  final  analysis  to  a 
basis  of  "personal  experience"  are  held  by  it 
as  qualified,  and  subject  to  further  and  more 
complete  verification. 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

"How  would  you  proceed  to  demonstrate 
the  continuity  of  life  beyond  the  event  we 
physical  scientists  call  death,  to  one  who  pos- 
sesses only  his  five  physical  senses,  and  with 
no  possibility  of  the  development  within  him- 
self of  any  spiritual  sense  of  perception  to 
appeal  to?" 

No  attempt  would  be  made  by  The  Great 
School  of  Natural  Science  to  "demonstrate 
the  continuity  of  life"  to  any  such  individual. 
Why?  Because  it  would  be  extravagant 
and  fruitless  waste  of  time  and  energy.  No 
such  "demonstration"  is  possible,  so  far  as 
the  knowledge  and  abilities  of  this  School  go. 
There  is  no  process  known  to  it  whereby  the 
physical  scientist  may  reach  out  into  the  spir- 
itual realm  with  his  physical  tweezers,  how- 
ever fine,  and  thence  pluck  forth  the  spirit  of 
a  departed  friend,  however  coarse,  and  by 
placing  it  under  a  physical  microscope, 
however  powerful,  thus  bring  it  within  the 
limitations  of  physical  vision,  however  keen. 
There  is  no  process  known  to  the  Great 
School  whereby  such  an  individual  might 
bring  the  spiritual  body  of  a  departed  Soul 
within  the  operation  of  physical  chemistry  or 

30 


SCIENTIFIC  DEMONSTRATION 

the  physical  retort  or  the  facilities  of  the 
physical  laboratory  and  thereby  reduce  it  to 
either  a  condition  or  a  form  which  would 
bring  it  within  the  limitations  of  the  five 
physical  sense  channels. 

If,  as  the  questioner  assumes,  the  individ- 
ual possesses  "no  possibility  of  the  develop- 
ment within  himself  of  any  spiritual  sense 
of  perception  to  appeal  to"  than  the  phys- 
ical, then  he  might  far  better,  for  both  him- 
self and  the  cause  of  science,  turn  his  atten- 
tion and  his  efforts  to  the  field  of  purely 
physical  nature  and  physical  things,  for 
therein  only  is  he  equipped  to  labor  with  any 
assurance  or  possibility  of  success. 

The  skilled  physician  would  laugh  to  scorn 
the  most  learned  of  mathematicians  who 
should  attempt  to  locate  and  prove  the  exist- 
ence of  a  blood  clot  on  the  brain  of  his  patient 
by  the  rules  of  geometry  or  surveying  and 
navigation.  The  trained  physical  scientist 
would  grow  fat  with  laughter  if  he  should 
discover  an  eminent  metaphysician  or  psy- 
chologist trying  to  identify  an  emotion  of  a 
Soul  through  the  use  of  a  microscope.  The 
learned  astronomer  would  feel  a  sense  of  pro- 
si 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

found  pity  for  the  devout  minister  of  the 
Gospel  who  should  seriously  ask  him  so  to  ad- 
just his  big  telescope  that  through  it  he  might 
see  and  identify  the  personality  of  God. 

And  yet,  these  performances  are  compara- 
tively no  more  absurd,  from  the  standpoint  of 
legitimate  "science,"  than  the  attempt  to 
''demonstrate"  the  existence  and  identity  of 
liberated  spiritual  intelligences  through  a 
study  of  physics  and  physical  phenomena. 

If  they  would  but  shift  the  plane  of  their 
attention  from  the  field  of  physical  phenom- 
ena without,  to  that  of  spiritual  and  psychical 
activities  within,  they  would  not  be  long  in 
striking  the  trail  that  would  lead  them  into 
the  light  of  a  "scientific  demonstration" 
through  a  definite  "personal  experience." 

How  does  the  writer  know  that  what  he 
says  is  true?  Because  he  has  made  the  "dem- 
onstration" and  had  the  "personal  experi- 
ence." 


CHAPTER  V 


SCIENCE  AND  RELIGION 

The  Great  School  of  the  Masters  has  dis- 
covered and  wrought  out  a  definite  and 
scientific  system  of  Moral  Principles.  It  has 
proven  its  accuracy  and  sufficiency  in  every 
conceivable  way.  It  makes  this  system  the 
basis  of  all  its  "Works."  It  presents  this 
system  to  Its  students  in  such  manner  and 
under  such  conditions  that  each  student  must 
make  the  discovery  anew,  and  must  verify  its 
accuracy  and  sufficiency  for  himself,  one  step 
at  a  time.  The  "Works"  which  he  must  per- 
form are  not  laid  out  for  him  in  the  form  of 
mere  generalities.  They  are  definite  and  spe- 
cific works  in  conformity  with  a  scientific 
plan  of  procedure.  Their  purpose  is  clear 
and  exact.  When  these  "Works"  have  been 
accomplished  the  student  knows  that  he  has 
made  a  scientific  demonstration.  For  his  spir- 
itual eyes,  ears  and  other  senses  are  opened. 
He  sees,  hears  and  otherwise  senses  the  world 
of  spiritual  material  and  spiritual  nature  at 

3S 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Will.  It  is  not  a  single  nor  sporadic  experi- 
ence. It  does  not  come  to  him  in  the  midst 
of  great  Soul  cataclysms,  only  to  depart  when 
the  psychic  convulsions  are  over.  It  is  not  a 
mystical  nor  indefinite  experience  subject  to 
interpretations.  It  is  an  Attainment  which 
comes  only  as  a  result  of  intelligent  effort  in 
definite  lines.  It  is  a  work  of  science.  When 
once  accomplished  it  is  a  definite  possession 
of  the  Soul.  It  is  under  the  power  of  the 
independent  Volition  and  may  be  called  into 
service  at  any  moment  thereafter  by  a  simple 
act  of  the  intelligent  Will,  and  the  process 
may  be  repeated  by  as  many  as  may  be  able 
to  fulfill  the  conditions. 

Every  scientific  formula,  in  order  to  be 
such,  must  be  so  exact  and  so  entirely  free 
from  the  possibility  of  interpretations,  that 
every  individual  who  uses  it  will  be  able  to 
follow  its  directions  step  by  step  from  begin- 
ning to  end  and  thus  prove  its  accuracy. 
Otherwise  it  is  not  scientific. 

A  scientific  formula,  in  order  to  be  entitled 
to  be  so  called,  will  produce  the  same  results 
regardless  of  the  individual  who  uses  it,  or 
the  number  of  times  it  may  be  repeated.     If 

34 


SCIENCE  AND  RELIGION 

it  does  not,  then  it  is  not  scientific.  It  has 
not  been  reduced  to  a  basis  of  scientific  exact- 
ness.  It  contains  some  element  of  uncertainty. 

The  formulary  of  science  for  the  manufac- 
ture of  any  given  salt  calls  for  the  union  of  a 
certain  acid  with  a  certain  other  substance 
called  a  base.  The  union  of  the  same  acid 
with  the  same  base  under  the  same  conditions 
will  produce  the  same  salt,  regardless  of  the 
individual  who  does  the  mixing,  or  the  num- 
ber of  times  the  process  may  be  repeated,  or 
the  number  of  successive  individuals  who 
make  the  same  test,  or  the  theories  they  may 
hold  concerning  the  process.  Thus,  any  indi- 
vidual who  has  the  ability  to  test  the  formula, 
also  has  the  power  to  prove  its  scientific  accu- 
racy and  sufficiency. 

The  formulary  of  The  Great  School  of 
Natural  Science  for  the  demonstration  of  the 
fact  of  a  life  after  physical  death,  is  definite 
and  specific.  Any  individual  who  can  un- 
derstand it  and  who  is  able  to  comply  with  its 
terms  can  prove  its  scientific  value.  All  those 
who  are  able  to  follow  its  conditions  and  pro- 
visions reach  the  same  results.  What  it  does 
for  one  intelligent  Soul  it  will  do  for  another 

35 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

under  the  same  conditions.  What  it  does  for 
these  two  it  will  do  for  as  many  others  as  are 
able  and  choose  to  make  the  test  in  strict  con- 
formity with  its  terms  and  conditions.  Thus 
far  it  has  opened  the  channels  of  spiritual 
sense  for  all  those  who  have  made  the  test 
under  all  the  terms  and  conditions  pre- 
scribed. It  will  do  the  same  for  as  many 
more  as  are  able  to  repeat  the  process  in  the 
same  way  and  under  the  same  conditions. 
These  are  the  facts  which  stamp  the  formu- 
lary with  the  seal  of  "science." 

All  these  facts,  and  many  more  directly 
related  to  the  subject,  will  suggest  to  the  in- 
telligent student  the  extent  to  which  the  ele- 
ments of  exact  science  are  wanting  in  the 
theological  formulary  or  method  of  proce- 
dure responsible  for  such  results.  The 
"works"  of  those  who  follow  the  formulary 
of  theology  produce  results  which  are  not 
consistent  with  any  known  system  of  science. 
In  many  respects  these  results  do  not  seem  to 
be  consistent  with  each  other,  nor  with  any 
established  sequence. 

The  purpose  of  this  analysis  and  compari- 
son is  not  to  discourage  the  religious  idea  nor 

M 


SCIENCE  AND  RELIGION 

antagonize  those  to  whom  it  has  a  real  value, 
but  rather  to  suggest  that  there  is  an  exact 
and  scientific  basis  for  their  religion  within 
their  powers  of  demonstration.  Once  this 
profound  fact  is  understood  and  its  impor- 
tance is  appreciated,  the  seeming  gulf  be- 
tween religion  and  science  no  longer  exists. 
They  become  one  and  inseparable  in  the 
minds  of  both  religionists  and  scientists,  as 
they  are  in  fact  and  in  essence.  There  is  no 
antagonism  in  their  essential  nature.  There 
can  be  none.  Whatever  antagonisms  there 
have  been,  or  may  be,  exist  only  in  the  minds 
of  men  who  do  not  understand  their  true 
meaning  and  ofKce  nor  the  essential  relation 
they  sustain  to  each  other  and  to  Nature. 

Here  we  are  dealing  with  facts  and  prin- 
ciples of  Nature.  We  are  dealing  with  them 
on  the  basis  of  their  relation  to  the  subject  of 
Independent  Spiritual  Unfoldment. 

The  purpose  of  Natural  Science  has  ever 
been  to  uncover  and  analyze  the  Ethical 
Principles  of  human  life  and  impress  them 
in  their  simplicity  and  grandeur  upon  intel- 
ligent Consciousness,  as  to  make  them  ac- 
knowledged facts  of  Nature  and  transmute 

37 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

them  into  actual,  vital,  constructive  energies  I 

and  forces  for  the  upbuilding  of  the  Temple  , 

of  Human  Character. 

It  seeks  to  enable  an  individual  to  discover 
these  principles,  not  that  he  may  invent 
clever  fictions  and  ingenious  sophistries 
whereby  to  disguise  ihem  and  avoid  them; 
but  that  he  may  make  them  "The  Rule  and 
Guide  of  his  Conduct"  and  thereby  conform 
his  life  to  the  Constructive  Principle  of  Na- 
ture upon  which  alone  he  must  depend  for 
the  achievement  of  Mastership. 

Science  is  exact  knowledge  of  the  facts  of 
Nature,  classified  and  systematized. 

Truth  is  the  established  relation  which  the 
facts  of  Nature  sustain  to  each  other  and  to 
an  Individual  Intelligence  or  Soul. 

Philosophy  is  the  conclusions  which  men, 
in  their  search  for  a  knowledge  of  Truth, 
have  drawn  from  the  facts  of  Science. 

Religion  is  the  application  of  the  facts  of 
Science  and  the  conclusions  of  Philosophy  to 
individual  life  and  conduct. 

From  this  viewpoint  it  will  be  observed 
that  Science  has  reference  alone  to  the  phe- 

n 


SCIENCE  AND  RELIGION 

nomena  of  Nature — the  term  ^'facts''  and 
"phenomena"  meaning  the  same  thing. 

Truth  has  reference  to  the  relations  which 
the  phenomena  of  Nature  sustain  to  each 
other  and  to  an  Individual  Intelligence. 

Philosophy  has  reference  to  the  deductions 
which  men  have  drawn  from  the  phenomena 
of  Nature,  in  their  search  for  Truth. 

Religion  is  merely  the  application  of  such 
knowledge  as  we  possess,  to  the  problem  of 
individual  life  and  conduct. 

From  the  viewpoint  of  the  Great  School  of 
the  Masters,  science  and  philosophy  and  re- 
ligion are  in  no  sense  conflicting  schools. 
They  do  not  antagonize  each  other  in  their 
essential  nature.  They  are  concomitant  fac- 
tors in  the  same  great  problem  of  individual 
life  and  unfoldment.  Truth  is  the  vital  ele- 
ment which  relates  them  all. 

Religion  is  the  application  of  such  knowl- 
edge as  we  possess,  to  the  problem  of  indi- 
vidual life  and  conduct,  in  such  manner  as  to 
maintain  a  harmonic  relation,  the  inevitable 
result  of  which  is  conformance  with  the  Con- 
structive Principle  of  Nature. 

The  process  involved  in  such  a  life  is  one 

S9 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

which  also,  and  at  the  same  time,  develops 
within  the  individual  the  state  or  condition  of 
Constructive  Spirituality  on  which  alone 
Spiritual  Independence  and  Mastership 
depend. 

Natural  Science  and  True  Religion,  after 
all,  are  one  and  the  same  thing.  An  under- 
standing of  this  great  truth  makes  of  Science 
a  Religion  and  lifts  Religion  to  a  basis  of 
exact  Science. 

The  Great  School  of  the  Masters  has  dis- 
covered and  formulated  a  definite  System.  It 
is  based  upon  experiment  and  demonstration 
through  personal  experience.  It  constitutes 
a  Scientific  Formulary.  Its  foundation  is 
Morality.  Its  application  is  Religion.  It  is 
Constructive  in  its  essential  nature.  It  is 
Evolutionary  in  its  essential  character.  Its 
purpose  is  the  development  of  Constructive 
Spirituality.  Its  result  is  Spiritual  Inde- 
pendence and  Mastership. 


CHAPTER  VI 


SPIRITUALITY 


Spirituality:  A  state  or  condition  of  an 
Intelligent  Soul  wherein  it  is  brought  into 
conscious  and  immediate  contact  with  the 
world  of  spiritual  material  and  spiritual 
things,  through  the  channels  of  the  five  spir- 
itual senses. 

Man  in  his  normal  condition  upon  the 
physical  plane  inhabits  two  bodies,  the  one 
composed  of  physical  material  and  the  other 
of  spiritual  material. 

Each  of  these  two  bodies  has  its  own  set  of 
sensory  organs,  the  one  corresponding  to  the 
plane  of  physical  matter  and  the  other  cor- 
responding to  the  plane  of  spiritual  matter. 

Most  men  in  the  physical  body  employ 
only  the  physical  sense  channels.  As  a  nat- 
ural result,  the  organs  of  spiritual  sense  fall 
into  disuse  and  in  time  become  atrophied.  In 
that  event  they  do  not  convey  conscious  im- 
pressions from  the  world  of  spiritual  things  to 

41 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

the  intelligent  Soul.  Just  so  long  as  this  con- 
dition obtains  the  spiritual  sensory  organs,  as 
spiritual  conductors,  are  practically  useless 
to  their  owner.  Whilst  it  is  true  that  the  spir- 
itual organs  of  sense  are  all  there,  neverthe- 
less they  have  become  non-conductors  to  such 
a  degree  that  they  no  longer  perform  their 
function,  as  channels  of  communication,  with 
sufficient  force  or  facility  or  independence 
to  impress  their  work  upon  the  consciousness. 
For  all  practical  purposes  the  intelligent  Soul 
in  this  condition  is  limited  in  its  activities 
and  its  powers  to  the  exercise  of  its  physical 
senses  only.  It  therefore  senses  only  physical 
things.  It  uses  only  its  physical  instrument 
consciously.  Its  knowledge  is  virtually  lim- 
ited to  the  world  of  physical  nature.  In  this 
state  or  condition  the  Soul  is  not  in  conscious 
immediate  contact  with  the  spiritual  world 
through  the  five  spiritual  senses. 

There  are  processes  in  Nature  whereby  the 
spiritual  channels  of  sense  may  be  opened 
again.  Through  these  processes  the  non- 
conductors may  be  converted  into  conductors, 
and  the  embodied  Soul  put  into  communica- 
tion with  the  world  of  spiritual  nature.  These 

42 


SPIRITUALITY 

processes  produce  in  the  embodied  Soul  the 
condition  of  "spirituality"  wherein  it  is 
brought  into  "conscious  and  immediate  con- 
tact with  the  world  of  spiritual  material 
and  spiritual  things,  through  the  channels  of 
the  five  spiritual  senses." 

Itwill  be  observed  that  the  word  "processes" 
is  plural  in  number.  This  is  not  by  accident, 
nor  is  it  a  mistake.  It  means  that  there  are 
more  processes  than  one  by  which  the  spirit- 
ual channels  of  sense  may  be  opened  and  the 
embodied  Soul  brought  into  immediate  con- 
tact with  the  world  of  spiritual  nature  and 
spiritual  things. 

There  are  t^vo  distinct  processes  known  to 
science,  and  they  are  direct  opposites.  They 
proceed  from  opposite  points.  They  move  in 
opposite  directions.  They  produce  opposite 
results  upon  the  individual  who  is  affected  by 
them.  They  represent  opposite  principles  of 
Nature.  They  stand  in  every  particular  and 
at  every  point  in  direct  antithesis.  And  yet, 
their  effects  upon  the  individual  intelligence 
fall  clearly  within  the  meaning  of  the  defini- 
tion of  "spirituality."  This  means  there  are 
two  distinct  and  diametrically  opposite  kinds 

43 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

of  "spirituality.''  There  are  two  distinct  and 
radically  different  states  or  conditions  of  the 
physically  embodied  Soul  wherein  it  may  be 
brought  into  "immediate  contact  with  the 
world  of  spiritual  material  and  spiritual 
things,  through  the  channels  of  the  five  spirit- 
ual senses." 

One  is  the  result  of  the  Constructive  Prin- 
ciple of  Nature  in  its  relation  to  the  individ- 
ual concerned,  while  the  other  is  the  result 
of  the  Destructive  Principle  of  Nature.  One 
represents  "Constructive  Spirituality"  and 
the  other  "Destructive  Spirituality." 

Perhaps  there  is  no  subject  involving  the 
profound  mystery  of  individual  life  and 
death  with  which  mankind  in  general  is  more 
familiar  than  with  the  seemingly  simple 
process  by  which  an  egg  produces  a  chicken. 
Simple  as  the  mere  mechanics  of  the  process 
may  appear  to  be,  nevertheless  back  of  that 
process  is  concealed  the  great  mystery  of 
mysteries,  the  problem  of  individual  life 
which  has  confounded  the  wisest  of  all  times, 
and  which  still  remains  a  mystery. 

The  unhatched  chick  is  shut  securely  with- 
in the  narrow  confines  of  the  parturient  egg. 


SPIRITUALITY 

The  egg  is,  for  the  time  being,  its  entire 
world  of  activity  and  being.  The  shell  marks 
its  limitations  in  space,  and  a  very  narrow 
world  indeed  it  would  seem  to  be.  Measured 
by  the  intelligent  development  of  its  occu- 
pant, it  is,  comparatively,  no  more  limited  or 
narrow  than  is  the  great  physical  world  to 
the  man  whose  consciousness  is  limited  by  his 
physical  senses  to  the  plane  of  physical  mat- 
ter and  physical  things  only. 

We  who  are  on  the  outside  of  the  egg  know 
that  there  is  a  world  for  the  chick  outside  the 
narrow  limitations  of  the  restraining  shell. 
Some  of  us  also  know  that  there  is  a  world 
for  man  outside  the  narrow  and  restraining 
limitations  of  his  temporary  physical  body. 
Judging  from  its  objective  manifestations,  it 
would  seem  that  Nature  has  implanted  with- 
in the  very  essence  of  the  chick  a  dim  or  in- 
stinctive consciousness  of  the  fact  that  there  is 
a  larger  world  for  it  outside  the  narrow  con- 
fines of  its  tiny  shell  world.  So  there  is  in 
man  an  intuitive  sense  or  consciousness  of  a 
larger  world  for  him  than  that  alone  of 
which  his  physical  senses  bear  witness.  In 
its  own  way  the  infant  chick  is  seeking  con- 

45 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

tact  with  and  knowledge  of  its,  as  yet,  unseen 
world.    So  is  man. 

We  who  are  on  the  outside  know  that 
there  are  two  distinct  processes  by  which 
the  channels  of  immediate  contact  may  be 
opened  between  the  undeveloped  chick  and 
the  world  outside  the  limitations  of  its  ma- 
terial shell.  Some  of  us  also  know  with  equal 
certainty  that  the  same  is  literally  true  in  the 
case  of  man.  We  all  know  that  in  the  case  of 
the  chick  one  of  these  two  processes  is  applied 
from  without  and  the  other  from  within  its 
present  limited  shell  world.  Some  of  us  also 
know  that  this  is  equally  true  in  the  case  of 
man  in  the  physical  body. 

We  all  know  that  Nature  has  so  provided 
in  the  case  of  the  chick  that  only  one  of  these 
two  processes  is  constructive  in  its  relation  to 
and  its  effects  upon  the  individuality  and  life 
of  the  undeveloped  inhabitant.  Some  of  us 
also  know  that  Nature  has  made  the  same 
analogous  condition  in  the  case  of  man  him- 
self in  his  relation  to  the  larger  world  of  spir- 
itual nature. 

Those  of  us  who  are  on  the  outside  know 
that  in  the  case  of  the  chick  the  constructive 

A6 


SPIRITUALITY 

process  proceeds  from  within.  So  it  does  in 
the  case  of  man  himself.  It  is  the  process 
of  unfoldment,  development,  and  natural 
growth.  It  is  the  process  of  evolution  in 
operation. 

Under  this  constructive  or  evolutionary 
process  Nature  on  the  one  hand,  and  the  indi- 
vidual on  the  other,  both  have  an  important 
part  to  perform.  Under  this  process  Nature 
performs  her  part  and  fulfils  her  purpose 
when  she  has  supplied  the  chick  with  all  the 
materials  and  made  all  the  conditions  neces- 
sary to  its  evolutionary  unfoldment  and 
growth.  When  this  has  been  done  the  burden 
of  responsibility  is  thrown  upon  the  chick 
and  it  must  do  the  rest  if  it  would  complete 
the  process  along  constructive  lines.  The 
analogy  still  holds  good  in  the  case  of  man 
himself. 

If  the  chick  would  accomplish  its  part  of 
this  constructive  process  of  establishing  im- 
mediate contact  with  the  outside  world,  it 
must  put  forth  its  individual  effort  to  that 
end  in  exact  conformity  with  Nature's  con- 
structive plan  of  action.  So  must  man.  The 
chick  must  break  the  shell  from  within,  and 

47 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

it  must  do  this  by  its  own  unaided  effort.  So 
must  man  by  his  own  individual  effort,  work- 
ing from  within,  break  through  the  shell  of 
physical  materiality  which  separates  him 
from  "conscious  and  immediate  contact  with 
the  world  of  spiritual  nature"  which  lies  out 
beyond,  if  he  would  ever  demonstrate  the 
existence  of  that  world  by  the  constructive 
process. 

The  analogies  of  the  destructive  process 
are  in  every  way  equally  complete.  We  know 
that  by  the  application  of  sufficient  force 
from  without  we  may  break  the  shell  of  the 
unhatched  chick  and  thereby  establish  im- 
mediate contact  between  it  and  the  outside 
world.  We  also  know  that  this  is  not 
Nature's  process,  and  that  it  is  destructive. 
It  is  destructive  of  the  very  life  and  individ- 
uality of  the  undeveloped  inhabitant.  This 
is  literally  and  tragically  true  of  any  process 
whereby  the  spiritual  sense  channels  of  man 
in  the  physical  body  are  forced  open  by  other 
intelligences  from  without.  As  in  the  case  of 
the  chick,  the  results  are  destructive  to  the 
life  and  individuality  of  the  undeveloped  in- 
habitant 


SPIRITUALITY 

Those  of  us  who  have  studied  the  problem 
in  the  light  of  science  know  that  any  force 
applied  from  without,  which  breaks  the  shell 
of  an  unhatched  egg  before  the  hour  when 
the  evolving  chick  would  naturally  and  of  its 
own  free  will  and  accord  break  it  from  with- 
in, is  destructive  of  the  individual  life  and 
development  of  the  inhabitant. 

Nature  has  provided  just  one  method  or 
process,  and  one  only,  whereby  the  unhatched 
chicken  may  establish  conscious  and  immedi- 
ate contact  with  the  larger  outside  world 
without  violating  the  constructive  principle 
of  its  own  individual  life  and  being  and  in- 
viting self-destruction.  That  is  the  method 
or  process  of  evolution,  the  constructive 
process  of  Nature  in  individual  life,  which  is 
the  process  of  natural  development  whereby 
through  the  principle  of  growth  and  the 
process  of  internal  unfoldment  it  arrives  nat- 
urally at  a  state  or  condition  wherein  its  own 
individual  volition  becomes  the  motive 
power  and  its  own  self-directed  intelligent 
efforts  constitute  the  method  of  procedure. 
In  this  constructive  process  Nature  has  pro- 
vided that  at  a  certain  point — let  us  name  it 

49 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

the  "psychological  moment" — the  intelligent, 
voluntary  and  purposeful  effort  of  the  indi- 
vidual chick  within  becomes  a  vital  necessity. 
That  is  the  one  and  only  remaining  factor 
which  will  complete  the  constructive  process 
and  bring  it  to  its  natural  fruition.  Suppose 
at  this  particular  point,  this  psychological 
moment,  when  Nature  demands  its  voluntary 
co-operation,  the  chick  should  fail  to  per- 
form its  individual  part  of  the  constructive 
process  and  should  refuse  to  strike  out  with 
its  tiny  beak  and  break  the  shell  from  within; 
what  then? 

Nature  has  provided  no  other  means  or 
method  by  which  the  shell  may  be  broken  at 
the  right  moment,  or  in  exactly  the  right 
place.  Neither  has  it  provided  any  other 
method  or  means  whereby  it  may  be  broken 
in  the  right  way,  from  within.  This  final, 
crowning  and  vital  act  of  puncturing  the 
shell  must  be  done  from  within;  it  must 
be  done  at  just  one  point,  and  it  must  also  be 
performed  by  the  individual  chick  concerned 
in  the  process  of  liberation.  There  can  be  no 
proxy.  Nature  has  made  no  such  provision, 
because  there  is  no  other  individual  on  the 


i 


SPIRITUALITY 

inside  of  the  shell  on  whom  to  shift  the  bur- 
den of  such  responsibility.  If  the  chick 
should  fail  or  refuse  to  respond  to  Nature's 
demand  upon  it  to  put  forth  its  individual 
effort  in  direct  harmony  and  co-operation 
with  the  Constructive  Principle  and  Process 
of  Nature,  there  could  follow  but  one  result, 
physical  self-destruction  and  failure  to  real- 
ize its  legitimate  possibilities. 

Here  also  the  analogy  still  holds  good  in  its 
application  to  the  principle  and  process 
whereby  man  may  break  the  shell  of  his  own 
material  environment  and  conditions  which 
binds  him  within  the  narrow  sphere  of  his 
physical  sense  perceptions.  Like  the  chick, 
he  is  the  only  inhabitant  of  his  own  physical 
tenement,  the  physical  body.  He  is  the 
only  individual  who  is  in  position  to  co- 
operate with  Nature  from  within.  As  in 
the  case  of  the  chick.  Nature  clearly  contem- 
plates his  evolutionary  unfoldment  to  a  point 
where  and  when  he  shall,  of  his  own  free 
Will  and  accord,  and  of  his  own  individual 
effort,  break  the  shell  of  physical  conditions 
which  binds  him  solely  to  the  plane  of  phys- 
ical consciousness.     This  is  an  evolutionary 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

process.  It  must  proceed  outward  from 
within.  It  cannot  proceed  inward  from 
without  It  would  not  be  an  evolution  if  it 
did.  Neither  could  it  proceed  from  without 
and  at  the  same  time  be  an  unfoldment  or  a 
development,  for  in  their  very  essential  na- 
ture unfoldment  and  development  are  proc- 
esses which  proceed  from  within. 

Nature  performs  her  full  part  in  the  con- 
structive process  of  man's  spiritual  illumina- 
tion when  she  furnishes  him  all  the  materials, 
the  means,  the  conditions  and  the  plan  in  con- 
formity with  which  he  may  apply  to  the 
problem  his  own  intelligence  in  the  exercise 
of  his  own  faculties,  capacities  and  powers. 

Man's  part  in  the  process  is  analogous  to 
that  of  the  chick.  He  must  put  forth  his  own 
individual  effort  in  conformity  with  Nature's 
plan  of  evolutionary  unfoldment.  He  and  he 
alone  can  complete  the  process.  He  can  ac- 
complish his  task  in  but  one  way.  He  must 
make  the  personal  effort.  He  must  do  it  vol- 
untarily. He  must  exercise  his  own  individ- 
ual faculties,  capacities  and  powers  from 
within.  He  must  co-operate  with  Nature's 
Constructive  Principle  of  unfoldment  until 

52 


SPIRITUALITY 

by  his  own  individual  effort  he  removes  the 
obstructions  which  close  the  channels  of  spir- 
itual sense.  When  he  has  done  this  "of  his 
own  free  will  and  accord,"  and  not  until 
then,  ^ill  he  open  the  door  of  the  spiritual 
world  by  the  constructive  process  and  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  constructive  principle  of 
his  own  being.  Then  only  will  he  be  able  to 
control  the  process  himself.  Then  only  will 
his  development  be  an  "unfoldment."  Then 
only  will  he  achieve  Spiritual  Independence. 

One  of  the  states  or  conditions  is  reached 
by  the  process  of  negation,  by  the  surrender 
of  individual  consciousness,  and  by  subjection 
to  and  control  by  other  intelligences.  The 
other  is  attained  by  positive  assertion  of  the 
individuality,  by  marvelous  extension  of  in- 
dividual consciousness,  by  complete  libera- 
tion from  all  possibility  of  psychical  subjec- 
tion to  or  control  by  any  other  intelligence. 

Destructive  Spirituality  is  reached  by  sur- 
render and  subjection  to  the  Will  of  another 
Intelligence  either  in  or  out  of  the  physical 
body.  The  motives  which  impel  the  control- 
ling Intelligence  may  be  either  good,  bad  or 
indifferent.     The  result  is  the  same,  in  that 

53 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

the  responsibility  is  transferred  from  the  one 
who  should  retain  it  to  another  who  has  no 
right  to  exercise  it.  The  process  is  called 
"destructive"  to  an  individual  subject  to  it, 
because  it  injures  the  Essential  Being  or  Soul 
and  its  tendency  is  to  destroy  its  most  valuable 
capacities  and  powers. 

"Constructive  Spirituality"  is  attained  by 
intelligent  assertion  of  one's  own  rights  and 
privileges  and  the  discharge  of  one's  own 
duties  and  responsibilities.  It  involves  the 
gradual  but  inevitable  assumption  of  greater 
and  higher  responsibilities  under  and  in  ac- 
cordance with  Nature's  evolutionary  process 
and  purpose.  It  results  in  the  preparation  of 
the  Individual  Intelligence  for  life  on  higher 
planes  of  evolution.  It  is  called  "construc- 
tive" because  it  builds  up  character  and  in- 
creases the  capacities  and  powers  of  an  Essen- 
tial Being  or  Soul. 


$4 


CHAPTER  VII 


MORALITY 


The  great  and  profound  theorem  of  Mor- 
ality is  the  first  grim  "Terror  at  the  Thres- 
hold" which  confronts  every  student  who 
would  enter  upon  the  pathway  of  scientific 
demonstration  through  a  personal  experience 
along  Constructive  lines.  He  cannot  evade  it 
if  he  would.  It  stands  squarely  in  his  path, 
and  the  path  is  too  narrow  for  him  to  slip 
past.  He  must  grapple  with  it  and  actually 
dispose  of  it  before  it  is  possible  for  him  to 
proceed  further. 

Constructive  Spirituality  and  the  Inde- 
pendent Method  of  Spiritual  Self-Develop- 
ment begin  with  Morality,  not  because  of  any 
arbitrary  provisions  or  dogmatic  rulings  of 
men,  but  simply  and  solely  because  that  is  the 
scientific  basis  and  natural  beginning-point 
of  all  true  Spiritual  Unfoldment  and  the  nat- 
ural point  from  which  to  proceed  in  the 
development  of  all  Psychic  Powers.     With 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

an  ethical  foundation  once  established  in  sci- 
ence, the  problem  is  resolved  into  a  mere 
question  of  how  far  the  individual  student 
shall  conform  his  or  her  life  to  its  principles. 
That  is  the  inexorable  standard  by  which  Na- 
ture measures  and  determines  individual  un- 
foldment,  development  and  progress  beyond 
that  point.  Here  we  have  the  Law  of  Evolu- 
tion in  operation.  It  is  absolute  and  immut- 
able.   There  is  no  evading  or  avoiding  it. 

The  definite  work  of  Constructive  Unfold- 
ment  is  not  merely  an  intellectual  diversion 
or  employment.  While  it  is  all  that,  it  is  also 
vastly  more  than  that.  It  is  the  application 
of  Moral  Principles  to  human  conduct.  It 
involves  the  LIVING  OF  A  Life  in  conformity 
with  the  Constructive  Principle  of  Nature, 
as  this  has  been  demonstrated  by  the  Great 
Masters  throughout  the  ages,  and  by  them  un- 
folded to  their  successive  students. 

It  is  a  fact  which  must  sooner  or  later  come 
to  the  knowledge  of  every  student,  that  with- 
out this  application  of  moral  principles  to  in- 
dividual conduct,  and  without  the  living  of  a 
life  in  conformity  with  Nature's  Construc- 
tive Principle,  there  is  no  amount  of  *'tech- 

H 


MORALITY 

nical  work"  or  study  that  is  sufficient  to  un- 
lock the  spiritual  senses  and  place  them  un- 
der the  independent  control  of  the  intelligent 
Will  of  the  individual. 

This  exposition  of  the  subject  will  make 
clear  the  meaning  of  the  Great  School  when 
it  declares  in  the  most  unmistakable  terms 
possible  that  Morality  is  as  truly  and  as  defi- 
nitely a  matter  of  science  as  is  chemistry,  or 
any  other  of  the  so-called  "exact  sciences." 
It  might  be  added  with  equal  emphasis,  that 
in  its  application  to  the  great  problem  of 
Independent  Spiritual  Unfoldment  and  Psy- 
chic Development  it  is  just  as  exact  and  even 
more  exacting  than  Mathematics.  It  has 
been  scientifically  demonstrated  by  the  Great 
School  of  the  Masters  throughout  all  the 
past  ages  of  its  existence,  that  Spiritual  and 
Psychical  Development  in  conformity  with 
the  Constructive  Principle  of  Nature  is  ab- 
solutely impossible,  except  to  those  who  pro- 
ceed from  the  basis  of  Moral  Principle. 

When  this  simple  fact  of  science  once  be- 
comes indelibly  impressed  upon  the  individ- 
ual consciousness,  it  throws  a  great  flood  of 

57 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

new  light  upon  the  problem  of  individual  life 
and  its  possibilities. 

Constructive  Spirituality  rests  upon  a  sci- 
entific basis.  The  scientific  basis  is  Morality. 
The  process  of  development  begins  with  a 
study  of  Moral  Principles. 

The  definite  practice  of  those  principles  in 
the  individual's  daily  life  and  conduct,  in 
good  faith,  and  without  equivocation,  mental 
reservation,  or  evasion  of  any  kind  whatso- 
ever, is  the  natural  beginning-point. 

He  is  obligated  to  make  of  his  life  a  living 
exemplification  of  the  moral  principles 
which  his  reason  and  his  conscience  accept. 

The  fundamental  principle  upon  which 
the  Independent  Method  of  Spiritual  Self- 
Development  depends  is  Morality. 

The  essential  key  is  the  exemplification  of 
moral  principles  in  the  daily  life  and  conduct 
of  the  individual  concerned — the  practice  of 
Morality. 

The  scientific  basis  of  "Spiritual  Evolu- 
tion,'' which  alone  leads  onward  and  upward 
to  individual  "Mastership,"  is  Morality. 

Morality  is  a  fundamental  problem  which 
must  be  reckoned  with  by  those  who  elect  to 

St 


MORALITY 

travel  the  pathway  of  the  "Independent 
Method  of  Spiritual  Self-Unfoldment," 
which  alone,  through  the  development  of 
Constructive  Spirituality,  leads  to  the  goal  of 
"Mastership."  Unless  the  individual  is  pre- 
pared to  face  this  problem  squarely  and  deal 
with  it  honestly  in  its  scientific  aspect,  he  is 
but  wasting  his  time  and  energy  in  any  fur- 
ther attempt  to  solve  the  great  problem  of 
another  life  by  the  Constructive  Process. 

MORALITY:  Is  the  established  har- 
monic RELATION  WHICH  MAN,  AS  AN  INDI- 
VIDUAL Intelligence,  sustains  to  the 
Constructive  Principle  of  Nature. 

The  same  meaning  may  be  expressed  yet 
more  briefly: 

MORALITY  is  man's  established  har- 
monic    RELATION     TO     THE     CONSTRUCTIVE 

Principle  of  his  own  being. 

There  is  a  Constructive  Principle  in  Na- 
ture. Man,  as  an  Individual  Intelligence, 
sustains  a  certain  fixed  and  definite  relation 
to  that  Principle.  It  is,  in  fact,  an  established 
relation.  Not  only  this,  it  is  a  relation  that  is 
established  on  the  scientific  basis  of  a  true 
harmonic.     Involved  in  that  harmonic  rela- 

59 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

tion  are  many  things.  It  involves  man's  indi- 
vidual knowledge  of  and  his  conscious  de- 
pendence upon  the  Constructive  Principle  of 
Nature  for  all  the  evolutionary  possibilities 
of  his  being.  There  is  also  involved  in  it  the 
conscious  obligation  of  the  individual  to  rec- 
ognize the  established  principle,  and  con- 
form his  life  to  its  harmonic  demands.  It  is 
man's  business  to  preserve  the  harmonics  of 
the  relation.  In  the  accomplishment  of  this 
task  is  also  involved  the  whole  broad  and 
seemingly  complex  problem  of  man's  con- 
scious relation  to  his  fellow  man  and  to  all 
Nature. 

All  these  subsidiary  problems  are  mere 
developments  from  and  outgrowths  of  that 
"established  harmonic  relation"  which  man 
as  an  individual  sustains  to  the  Construc- 
tive Principle  of  Nature.  By  devoting  his 
attention  and  his  efforts  to  the  one  simple  and 
central  problem  of  maintaining  the  harmon- 
ics of  that  "established  relation,"  all  these  in- 
cidental relations  and  subsidiary  questions 
which  grow  out  of  that  central  problem  are 
cared  for  as  so  many  mere  matters  of  detail. 


MORALITY 

They  do  not  demand  the  special  attention  so 
generally  given  them. 

The  member  of  a  great  orchestra,  in  his 
musical  capacity,  sustains  an  established  har- 
monic relation  to  the  Constructive  Principle 
of  Nature  on  v^hich  the  orchestra  is  inte- 
grated and  on  v^hich  its  success  as  a  v^hole 
depends.  The  central  problem  of  his  indi- 
vidual life  in  that  connection  is  to  keep  his 
instrument  and  his  work  with  it  in  perfect 
harmony  with  all  the  other  instruments  and 
work  of  the  entire  orchestra. 

Out  of  this  established  harmonic  relation 
as  a  musician  naturally  grow  his  incidental 
relations  to  his  leader,  to  his  fellow  musicians 
both  collectively  and  individually,  and  to  the 
public  on  whose  approval  and  patronage  his 
position  and  place  inevitably  depend. 

All  these  relations  are  important  and  must 
be  maintained.  But  if  he  will  give  his 
thought,  attention  and  efifort  to  the  one  simple 
and  central  problem  of  keeping  his  instru- 
ment in  perfect  tune  and  playing  his  score  in 
perfect  harmony  with  the  rest,  he  need  not 
give  either  time,  thought  or  efifort  to  cultivat- 

61 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

ing  the  musical  approval  of  his  leader,  his 
fellow  musicians,  nor  that  of  the  public. 

If  he  is  but  successful  in  solving  the  one 
simple  and  central  problem,  all  these  others 
which  seem  so  important  are  thereby  solved 
as  a  matter  of  course,  and  without  other  or 
further  effort  on  his  part.  They  are  all 
merely  incidental  outgrowths  of  the  one  cen- 
tral problem,  and  if  he  is  successful  in  main- 
taining the  harmonics  of  his  established  rela- 
tion as  a  member  of  the  orchestra,  all  things 
else  fall  naturally  into  line  and  all  subsidiary 
problems  solve  themselves  as  a  result  thereof. 

There  is  a  Constructive  Principle  of  Na- 
ture. It  is  an  established  Principle.  It  is 
fixed  and  immutable.  If  man  would  grow, 
evolve  and  unfold  spiritually  and  psychically 
he  must  live  and  conduct  himself  in  such 
manner  as  to  keep  himself  in  perfect  har- 
mony with  that  Principle.  He  must  main- 
tain the  Harmonics  of  the  relation.  If  he 
does  this  Nature  will  do  the  rest  and  will  un- 
fold his  psychical  powers. 

If  he  should  fail  to  maintain  the  harmony 
of  the  relation  between  himself  and  the  Con- 
structive Principle  he  at  once  falls  into  align- 

62 


MORALITY 

ment  with  the  opposite  Principle,  the  De- 
structive Principle. 

So  long  as  he  maintains  the  Harmonic  of 
his  relation  to  the  Constructive  Principle  of 
Nature  it  is  impossible  for  the  Destructive 
Principle  to  afifect  him.  He  is  above  and  be- 
yond its  operation. 

If  he  devotes  himself  to  the  simple  prob- 
lem of  maintaining  that  harmonic  relation 
every  other  problem  of  his  life  will  fall  into 
line  without  any  attention  whatsoever  on  his 
part.  By  taking  care  of  the  central  proposi- 
tion, the  "harmonic  relation,"  all  the  details 
of  his  life  and  relationships  care  for  them- 
selves as  a  perfectly  natural  and  inevitable 
result. 

The  man  who  devotes  himself  faithfully  to 
the  central  problem  of  maintaining  the  har- 
mony of  his  relation  to  the  Constructive 
Principle  of  Nature  may  make  some  "mis- 
takes" and  some  possible  "errors,"  but  he  will 
never  commit  a  "sin."  So  long  as  he  is  in 
harmony  with  the  Great  Central  Principle 
it  is  impossible  for  him  to  commit  an  inten- 
tional wrong  or  injure  his  fellow  man. 

MORALS,  as  a  distinct  term,  has  reference 

63 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

to  those  definite  and  specific  principles  and 
Rules  of  individual  action,  procedure  and 
conduct  by  the  conscious  and  intelligent  ob- 
servance of  which  man  may  conform  his  life 
to  the  Constructive  Principle  of  his  being, 
and  by  maintaining  the  harmony  of  that  rela- 
tion thereby  incidentally  solve  all  those  more 
detailed  and  seemingly  complex  problems  of 
his  relations  and  obligations  to  his  fellow 
man  and  to  Nature. 

THE  PRACTICE  OF  MORAL  PRIN- 
CIPLES is  the  Living  of  a  Life  in  strict  con- 
formity with  the  terms,  conditions  and  re- 
quirements of  those  Principles  and  Rules  of 
Conduct  whereby  man  satisfies  the  require- 
ments of  the  Constructive  Principle  of  Na- 
ture and  maintains  that  established  harmonic 
relation  in  his  Soul. 

It  is  only  by  the  living  of  such  a  life  that 
man  may  ever  develop  within  himself  the 
state  or  condition  of  "Constructive  Spiritual- 
ity." It  is  only  by  the  development  of  this 
Constructive  Spirituality  within  himself  that 
he  may  ever  consciously  and  voluntarily  un- 
lock his  spiritual  senses,  and  thereafter 
exercise   them   Independently  and    at  Will. 


MORALITY 

This  is  ''The  Right  Way."  Only  by  travel- 
ing this  Right  Way  is  it  possible  ever  to  reach 
his  desired  goal,  which  is  Spiritual  Inde- 
pendence, or  "Mastership." 

Has  it  now  been  made  entirely  clear  to 
the  reader  that  Morality  and  Constructive 
Spirituality  are  inseparable?  Constructive 
Spirituality  cannot  exist  in  individual  life 
except  it  is  built  upon  and  sustained  by 
Morality?  Does  he  yet  understand  that 
Independent  Spiritual  Development  is  im- 
possible without  a  Moral  foundation?  Does 
he  yet  appreciate  the  fact  that  Morality 
is  an  essential  part  of  the  only  basis  upon 
which  Mastership  ever  has  been  or  ever 
can  be  attained?  Has  it  been  burned  indel- 
ibly into  his  consciousness  that  all  Construc- 
tive Spiritual  Unfoldment  begins  with  and 
proceeds  from  the  practice  of  Moral  Princi- 
ples? Does  he  yet  grasp  firmly  the  stupen- 
dous fact  of  Nature,  that  Morality  is  one  of 
the  basic  and  essential  conditions  of  Nature 
upon  which  alone  the  Constructive  Unfold- 
ment of  Spiritual  Consciousness  is  possible? 
Does  he  recognize  the  final  and  consummate 
fact  that  this  is  all  a  matter  of  science?    Does 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

he  yet  appreciate  the  fact  that  it  is  all  true 
because  Nature  so  established  it,  and  not  be- 
cause men  have  discovered  it  and  so  declared 
it?  Does  he  yet  understand  that  it  is  true, 
not  because  of  men's  desires,  wishes,  or  predi- 
lections, but  in  spite  of  them? 

If  these  essential  truths  have  been  so  deeply 
impressed  upon  his  consciousness  that  he  can 
neither  forget  them  nor  lose  sight  of  their  ap- 
plication and  importance  during  the  remain- 
der of  our  journey  together,  then  the  central 
purpose  has  been  accomplished. 


u 


CHAPTER  VIII 


CLASSIFICATION   OF  DATA 


Some  things  we  know,  and  we  know  that 
we  know  them. 

Some  things  we  assume  to  know,  but  we 
know  that  we  do  not  know  them. 

Some  things  we  believe,  but  we  do  not 
know  them,  nor  do  we  even  assume  to  know 
them. 

All  other  things  we  neither  know,  nor  as- 
sume to  know,  nor  do  we  even  believe  them. 

THINGS  WE   KNOW 

We  know  that  we  exist. 

We  know  that  other  people  exist. 

We  know  that  other  things  besides  our- 
selves also  exist. 

We  know  that  fire  burns  and  that  water 
quenches  thirst. 

We  know  that  snow  is  soft  and  white  and 
that  ice  is  hard  and  cold  to  our  senses. 

67 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

We  know  that  flowers  bloom  and  that  birds 
sing. 

We  know  that  as  individual  Intelligences 
we  possess  certain  faculties,  capacities  and 
powers. 

We  know  that  certain  things  we  call  food, 
water  and  air  are  necessary  to  sustain  what 
we  name  the  life  of  our  physical  bodies. 

We  know  when  we  are  happy  and  we  know 
what  sorrow  is. 

We  know  that  we  can  think  and  that  we 
can  convey  our  thoughts  to  others. 

We  know  that  life  has  a  present  existence 
and  that  what  we  call  death  dissolves  the 
physical  manifestation  of  this  earthly  life. 

These  are  things  we  know  and  we  know 
that  we  know  them.  Why?  Because  they 
fall  within  the  radius  of  our  own  individual 
experiences.  By  the  aid  of  our  own  senses 
we  have  personally  demonstrated  them.  And 
these  are  the  only  reasons  that  warrant  us  in 
asserting  that  we  know  them.  Except  as  per- 
sonal experiences  we  could  never  know  them. 
That  which  is  outside  the  range  of  our  own 
personal  experience  is  not  definitely  and  posi- 
tively known  to  us. 

68 


CLASSIFICATION  OF  DATA 

Every  man  who  speaks  for  the  world  to 
hear  should  never  allow  himself  to  forget  that 
personal  experience  is  the  only  absolute  basis 
and  infallible  test  of  what  we  know.  What- 
ever fails  to  reach  the  demands  of  this  simple 
and  exact  test  does  not  rise  to  the  dignity  of 
actual  and  personal  knowledge. 

THINGS  WE  ASSUME  TO  KNOW 

We  assume  to  know  that  the  earth  is  round. 
We  not  only  assume  this  to  be  a  fact  of 
Nature,  but  we  are  ready  to  act  upon  that 
assumption,  and  we  do  so  act  without  the 
slightest  hesitation  whenever  occasion  there- 
for may  require.  But  on  a  basis  of  actual  test 
it  is  doubtful  if  one  in  a  thousand  of  the  hu- 
man race,  as  it  exists  today,  has  ever  person- 
ally demonstrated  the  truth  of  that  assump- 
tion. We  have  read  in  books  that  it  is  true. 
We  have  been  taught  in  our  school  studies 
that  it  is  a  fact.  We  have  been  assured,  on 
what  we  have  considered  good  authority,  that 
others  have  actually  proven  it  beyond  all 
question;  and  we  have  had  pointed  out  to  us 
methods  by  which  we  are  led  to  believe  we 
might  prove  its  truth  for  ourselves  if  we  had 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

the  time,  money,  opportunity  and  inclination 
necessary  to  make  the  demonstration.  But 
that  is  all.  The  very  large  majority  of  us  do 
not,  in  literal  truth,  personally  know  whether 
the  earth  is  round  or  square  or  cubical  or  pyr- 
amidal or  any  other  specifically  definable 
shape.    We  only  assume  to  know. 

We  assume  to  know  how  old  we  are,  and  in 
our  relations  and  dealings  with  others  we 
treat  the  subject  of  our  own  age  with  all  the 
seeming  assurance  of  exact  and  definite 
knowledge.  We  do  not  hesitate  to  go  into 
court,  when  called  upon  to  do  so,  and  sol- 
emnly make  oath  as  to  our  respective  ages. 
Many  there  are  who  do  this  without  so  much 
as  a  qualm  of  conscience  or  a  suggestion  of 
doubt  or  uncertainty.  And  yet,  in  all  human 
probability,  not  one  of  those  who  read  tiiis 
page  knows  to  a  definite  certainty  his  or  her 
own  age.  Furthermore,  there  is,  perhaps,  no 
person  living  in  all  the  world,  who  remem- 
bers the  exact  year,  month,  day  and  hour  of 
his  own  birth.  Why?  Because  under  and  by 
virtue  of  the  arbitrary  and  mysterious  provi- 
sions of  Nature,  that  somewhat  important 
event  in  our  respective  histories  lies  all  the 

70 


CLASSIFICATION  OF  DATA 

|way  from  two  to  four  years  backward  beyond 
the  limits  of  individual  memory.  All  we 
know  of  it  is  that  our  reputed  fathers  and 
mothers  and  those  who  are  older  than  our- 
selves have  told  us  that  we  were  born  on  a 
given  day  of  a  given  month  in  a  given  year. 
We  take  their  word  as  literal  truth  and  gov- 
ern ourselves  accordingly.  And  so,  we  do  not 
know  how  old  we  are.  We  only  assume  to 
know. 

We  assume  to  know  that  a  certain  man, 
whom  history  names  Columbus,  discovered 
the  continent  of  America;  that  a  certain  other 
man,  named  Washington,  was  the  first  presi- 
dent of  the  United  States  of  America. 

We  assume  to  know  that  a  certain  other 
man,  named  Moses,  led  the  Children  of  Is- 
rael out  of  captivity  in  the  land  of  Egypt. 

We  assume  to  know  that  one  Benjamin 
Franklin,  by  means  of  a  kite,  made  an  impor- 
tant discovery  concerning  the  action  of  elec- 
tricity; that  another  wise  man,  named  New- 
ton, made  an  important  scientific  discovery 
concerning  the  action  of  that  force  we  name 
Gravity. 

It   would    be    quite    possible    to    mention 

71 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

hundreds  or  even  thousands  of  other  things 
we  assume  to  know,  all  of  which  are  wholly 
outside  the  limits  of  our  definite  and 
personal  knowledge.  If  we  but  held  our- 
selves to  a  rigid  and  strictly  truthful  differen- 
tiation of  the  data  we  employ,  there  is  per- 
haps not  one  of  us  but  would  be  greatly  sur- 
prised, if  not  genuinely  humiliated,  to  find 
how  many  things  we  assume  to  know  which 
are,  in  truth,  altogether  outside  the  limits  of 
our  personal  knowledge.  We  do  not  know 
them.  \Vc  merely  assume  to  know  them,  and 
our  assumption  passes  current  for  actual 
personal  knowledge. 

THINGS  WE   BELIEVE 

Many  there  are  who  believe  in  a  God,  in 
the  sense  that  the  Great  Creative  Intelligence 
is  a  distinct  and  definite  personality.  There 
are  also  many  others  who  believe  just  as 
firmly  that  the  Great  Creative  Intelligence  is 
not  a  God  in  the  sense  of  a  definite  person- 
ality. It  would  seem  that  among  all  these 
there  are  few,  if  any,  who  could  truthfully 
assert  that  the  subject  is  one  which  falls  with- 
in the  limits  of  their  personal  knowledge. 

72 


CLASSIFICATION  OF  DATA 

Some  men  believe  there  is  not  only  a  per- 
sonal God  who  created  the  universe,  but  that 
he  is  a  triune  Being,  composed  of  three  per- 
sons in  one,  namely,  "Father,  Son  and  Holy 
Ghost."  Others  believe  He  is  but  one  person. 
They  hold  that  he  is  "One  and  Indivisible." 
There  are  others  still  v^ho  believe  that  the 
Creative  Intelligence  is  but  an  all-pervading 
essence  or  power,  wholly  without  the  element 
of  personality.  It  would  doubtless  be  con- 
ceded that  not  one  among  all  these  is  in  posi- 
tion to  know  anything  about  it. 

Some  there  are  who  believe  in  the  doctrine 
of  literal  transubstantiation,  in  accordance 
with  which  the  bread  and  wine  used  in  the 
sacramental  service  of  "The  Lord's  Supper" 
are  said  to  be  transmuted  into  the  body  and 
blood  of  Christ.  Others  believe  with  equal 
sincerity  that  such  a  doctrine  is  not  only  false, 
but  utterly  absurd  and  too  ridiculous  for  a 
moment's  serious  consideration.  If  the  ques- 
tion could  be  removed  from  the  field  of  theo- 
logical discussion,  and  then  submitted  to  the 
several  disputants  on  the  basis  of  their  defi- 
nite and  personal  knowledge,  it  is  not*  at  all 
likely  that  a  single  one  among  them  could  be 

73 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

found  who  would  seriously  claim  to  know 
anything  about  it. 

There  are  also  those  who  believe  in  the  ab- 
solute, inherent  immortality  of  all  mankind. 
Others  believe  in  conditional  immortality, 
only  as  a  reward  of  individual  effort.  And 
there  are  others  who  believe  with  equal  earn- 
estness that  immortality  is  only  a  pleasant 
dream,  a  comforting  delusion,  a  fascinating 
fiction,  and  that  physical  death  means  total 
extinction. 

Human  intelligence  has  formulated  con- 
cepts which  have  become  the  bases  of  many 
other  beliefs.  All  such  beliefs  may  be  distin- 
guished without  difficulty  from  definite  per- 
sonal knowledge, or  even  assumed  knowledge. 

THINGS  UNKNOWN 

We  neither  know,  nor  assume  to  know,  nor 
can  we  formulate  a  well  defined  belief  as  to 
when  time  began  or  when,  if  ever,  it  will  end ; 
where  space  begins,  how  far  it  extends,  or 
where,  if  at  all,  it  ends. 

We  neither  know,  nor  assume  to  know,  nor 
do  we  have  even  a  definite  belief  as  to  where, 
when  or  how  matter  first  came  into  existence, 

74 


CLASSIFICATION  OF  DATA 

how  long  it  will  continue  to  exist  or  what  will 
ultimately  become  of  it. 

We  neither  know,  nor  assume  to  know,  nor 
do  we  have  a  clearly  defined  belief  as  to  how 
many  suns,  moons  and  stars  there  are  through- 
out all  the  universe  of  space;  how  many  of 
them  are  inhabited;  or  what  may  be  the  num- 
ber and  character  of  their  inhabitants. 

We  neither  know,  nor  assume  to  know,  nor 
can  we  formulate  so  much  as  a  definite  belief 
as  to  the  number  of  fishes  or  other  living 
things  in  all  the  waters  of  the  earth,  the  in- 
sects which  pervade  the  atmosphere  that  en- 
circles and  incloses  the  earth,  or  the  living 
creatures  that  move  upon  the  dry  land. 

As  to  all  such  problems  as  these,  and  many 
others,  we  do  not  hesitate  to  acknowledge  our 
total  ignorance. 

We  find  that  the  data  of  the  whole  uni- 
verse, so  far  as  we  are  individually  con- 
cerned, naturally  divide  themselves  into  these 
four  distinct  and  separate  classes: 

Things  we  know. 

Things  we  assume  to  know. 

Things  we  believe. 

Things  of  which  we  are  wholly  ignorant. 

75 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Of  these  four  classes  of  data,  there  can  be 
but  little  doubt,  in  the  mind  of  any  honest 
student  of  Nature,  that  the  first  is  by  far  the 
most  limited.  For,  the  things  we  know  com- 
prise only  those  things  which  are  a  conscious 
part  of  us,  and  those  with  which  we  come  into 
conscious  personal  contact  or  relation  in 
Nature. 


CHAPTER  IX 


INTELLECTUAL  POVERTY  AND  INDOLENCE 


No  man  is  in  position  to  understand  or  ap- 
preciate how  almost  infinitesimally  small  and 
seemingly  insignificant,  by  comparison,  is  the 
volume  of  his  own  definite,  personal  knowl- 
edge, until  he  undertakes  to  write  out  in  defi- 
nite form  a  crystallized  statement  of  those 
things  he  can  say  truly  he  knows.  Then  it  is, 
for  the  first  time,  he  becomes  clearly  con- 
scious how  meager  is  his  store  of  actual 
knowledge  and  how  conspicuous  is  his  Intel- 
lectual Poverty. 

To  be  brought  thus  suddenly  face  to  face 
with  his  own  destitution  is  one  of  the  most 
efifectual  lessons  of  humility  that  could  be  ad- 
ministered to  a  human  being.  It  would  also 
seem  that  of  all  the  many  important  lessons  of 
life  it  is  one  among  those  we  need  most  to 
learn.  Whilst  it  humbles  our  pride  of  intel- 
ligence into  the  very  dust,  at  the  same  time  it 
teaches  us  the  exact  measure   and  intrinsic 

77 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

value  of  our  own  actual  attainments  and 
points  the  way  to  a  much  broader  under- 
standing and  a  more  just  appreciation  oi  all 
mankind.  It  teaches  a  deeper  respect  for  the 
lives  and  experiences  of  our  fellow  men,  ad- 
monishes us  to  a  more  generous  sympathy 
with  them  in  all  their  honest  efforts,  and  stim- 
ulates in  us  a  more  healthful  desire  to  in- 
crease our  own  store  of  exact  and  definite 
knowledge. 

The  things  we  assume  to  know  constitute  a 
volume  much  greater  in  magnitude  than  the 
things  we  know,  and  much  more  pretentious 
as  to  the  character  and  scope  of  its  contents. 
Under  the  head  of  "Things  we  assume  to 
know,"  are,  in  general,  the  discoveries  and 
demonstrations  of  science,  the  data  of  history, 
the  deductions  of  philosophy,  and  the  great 
body  of  "Spiritual  Revelations." 

No  truly  progressive  intelligence  of  the 
present  age  will  attempt  to  deny  or  even  mini- 
mize the  value  of  all  these  data  to  both  the 
individual  and  society.  Most  of  such  data 
comes  to  us  from  out  the  ages.  It  bears  upon 
its  face  the  seeming  stamp  of  truth.  Since  it 
comes  to  us  at  second  hand,  it  does  not  rise  to 

71 


INTELLECTUAL  POVERTY:  INDOLENCE 

the  dignity  of  absolute  knowledge.  Never- 
theless, it  is  of  great  value  because  it  is  the 
nearest  possible  approach  to  that  which  we 
designate  as  absolute,  personal  knowledge. 

The  "Things  we  believe"  would  constitute 
an  immense  library  of  itself.  Here,  in  the 
realm  of  mere  speculations,  opinions  and  be- 
liefs, we  come  face  to  face  with  all  those 
unsatisfactory  and  disquieting  elements  of  un- 
certainty, unreliability,  insecurity,  fallibility 
and  change. 

No  man's  mere  belief,  however  honest  or 
earnest  it  may  be,  carries  with  it  a  positive 
guaranty  of  its  truth.  He  may  believe,  with 
absolute  sincerity,  the  most  impossible  things. 

The  things  he  merely  believes  today  he 
may  be  able  to  demonstrate  tomorrow.  When 
so  demonstrated  they  at  once  become  things 
he  knows  and  are  no  longer  mere  matters  of 
belief.  By  the  process  of  demonstration  they 
immediately  pass  from  the  third  class  of  data 
to  the  first.  By  this  transition  alone,  they  at- 
tain to  the  highest  possible  degree  of  value 
and  importance  in  his  life. 

Or,  the  things  he  believes  today  he  may 
demonstrate  tomorrow  to  be  false.     In  that 

79 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

event  their  non-existence  is  established  and 
they  no  longer  have  a  place  in  the  data  of  the 
universe. 

Some  of  the  things  he  believes  today  may 
be  proven  tomorrow  by  somebody  else  to  be 
true.  In  that  event,  as  facts  demonstrated, 
they  come  to  him  at  second  hand.  Thence- 
forth, in  their  relation  to  him,  they  pass  into 
the  category  of  reported  facts,  history  or  sci- 
ence, as  the  case  may  be,  and  fall  under  the 
second  class.  Though  he  may  not  know  them 
of  his  own  personal  knowledge,  yet  he  may 
thereafter  reasonably  assume  to  know  them 
upon  the  strength  of  their  reported  demon- 
stration. Thus  they  are  advanced  one  step  in 
their  relation  to  him,  and  by  this  transition 
they  become  of  secondary  importance  in  his 
essential  life.  They  are  now  second  in  value 
only  to  the  things  he  knows. 

The  "Things  we  neither  know  nor  assume 
to  know  nor  even  believe,"  constitute  the,  at 
present,  unknown  field  of  Nature.  Whatever 
that  field  may  contain  is,  as  yet,  a  closed 
book  to  us.  Whatever  influence  its  con- 
tents may  exert  upon  our  lives  or  destinies 
is   not   yet   within   our   powers   of   analysis. 

80 


INTELLECTUAL  POVERTY;  LNDOLENCE 

The  unexplored  field  of  Nature  may,  per- 
haps, contain  countless  treasures  of  infinite 
value  to  each  one  of  us,  and  doubtless  does. 
But  until  we  see,  know,  or  in  some  other 
manner  become  possessed  of  them,  their  in- 
trinsic value  is  not,  for  us  at  least,  a  conscious 
factor. 

Of  all  the  data  of  the  entire  universe,  that 
which  most  intimately  and  vitally  concerns 
each  one  of  us  falls  under  the  first  class. 

The  things  we  know  are  those  of  which  we 
are  in  position  to  make  the  best  and  most  in- 
telligent use,  both  in  our  own  behalf  and  in 
behalf  of  those  who  need  our  help.  This  fact 
alone  gives  to  them  a  value  and  an  impor- 
tance which  is  to  us  paramount. 

The  things  we  assume  to  know,  and  upon 
the  truth  of  which  we  implicitly  rely  and  un- 
hesitatingly act,  are  the  things  which  ap- 
proach most  nearly  absolute,  personal  knowl- 
edge. These  are  second  in  value  only  to  the 
things  we  know. 

Of  all  the  data  of  the  universe,  that  which 
falls  within  the  radius  of  absolute,  personal 
knowledge  is  of  paramount  value  and  im- 
portance to  each  individual.   Conversely,  that 

81 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

which  lies  farthest  from  such  knowledge  is, 
for  analogous  reasons,  of  least  personal  value 
and  importance  to  him. 

Actual  knowledge  is  of  greater  value  and 
importance  to  the  individual  who  possesses  it 
than  assumed  knowledge.  It  is  vastly  multi- 
plied in  value  and  importance  when  it  is 
compared  with  mere  speculations,  opinions 
and  beliefs,  any  or  all  of  which  may  prove  to 
be  erroneous  or  entirely  without  foundation 
in  fact.  It  follows  with  equal  certainty  that 
it  stands  at  the  highest  point  of  relative  value 
and  importance  when  it  is  compared  with 
total  ignorance. 

It  follows  with  irresistible  logic  that  one 
of  the  most  important  duties  every  individual 
owes  to  himself  and  to  his  fellow  man  is,  at 
all  times  and  as  rapidly  as  possible,  to  in- 
crease the  number  and  volume  of  the  things 
he  knows,  and  in  so  doing  select  those  facts 
and  truths  of  which  he  can  make  the  most 
valuable  use.  By  this  process  alone  he  be- 
comes the  better  equipped  to  discharge  his 
personal  responsibility  to  himself  and  his 
fellow  man. 

To  one  who  sees  life  from   this  point  of 

S3 


INTELLECTUAL  POVERTY;  INDOLExNCE 

vision  it  matters  very  little  what  others  may 
believe  (except  for  their  own  good),  so  long 
as  they  do  not  trespass  upon  the  perfect  lib- 
erty of  his  own  intelligence.  That  which  is 
of  paramount  importance  to  him  is  what  they 
know  and  what  they  can  help  him  to  know. 

Exact  and  definite  knowledge  is  always  of 
the  greatest  possible  value  and  importance  to 
every  individual  who  has  the  moral  courage 
to  use  it  rightly.  To  such  it  is  more  to  be 
desired  than  all  other  classes  of  data  com- 
bined. Nevertheless,  it  is  only  the  excep- 
tional man  or  woman  who  is  ready  or  even 
willing  to  pursue  it  with  a  degree  of  intelli- 
gence, courage  and  perseverance,  necessary 
to  obtain  the  desired  results. 

The  average  intelligence  is  satisfied  to  act 
upon  the  basis  of  assumed  knowledge.  This 
is  true,  even  though  such  data  are'  admitted 
to  be  wanting  in  reliability  and  therefore  of 
only  secondary  value  or  consideration.  Why? 
Because  assumed  knowledge  involves  far  less 
personal  effort  on  his  part  than  actual  knowl- 
edge. With  most  of  us  it  is  so  much  more 
pleasant  and  agreeable  to  accept  as  true  the 
declarations  and  findings  of  others  than  it  is 

83 


THE  GRKAT  WORK 

to  make  a  personal  demonstration  of  them  for 
ourselves. 

If  an  exact  numerical  balance  could  be 
struck,  it  would,  without  question,  be  found 
that  a  very  large  majority  of  the  men  and 
women  of  even  the  most  truly  civilized  na- 
tions of  earth  are  more  deeply  interested  in 
the  consideration  of  mere  speculations,  opin- 
ions, dogmas  and  beliefs  than  they  are  in  the 
acquisition  of  actual,  personal  knowledge. 

The  acquisition  of  exact  and  definite 
knowledge  involves  a  labor.  It  calls  for  the 
unremitting  exercise  of  honest,  earnest,  intel- 
ligent, courageous  and  persistent  personal 
effort  on  the  part  of  the  individual  concerned. 

Indolence,  in  this  department  of  human 
endeavor,  would  seem  to  be  an  almost 
universal  characteristic  of  human  nature. 
However  much  we  may  desire  a  thing  whose 
value  we  know  and  appreciate,  we  possess 
only  a  limited  amount  of  intelligence,  cour- 
age and  perseverance  which  we  are  ready 
and  willing  to  exercise  in  the  task  of  acquir- 
ing it.  In  the  largest  number  of  instances — 
more  especially  where  the  thing  to  be  ac- 
quired is  knowledge — the  amount  of  personal 


INTELLECTUAL  POVERTY;  INDOLENCE 

effort  we  are  willing  to  exert  is  very  small. 
When  we  have  reached  its  limit  we  are  in- 
clined to  accept  almost  any  recognized  sub- 
stitute that  may  be  offered. 

This  characteristic  of  human  intelligence 
is  so  general  and  so  strongly  marked  that  it 
constitutes  one  of  the  chief  reasons  why  so 
few  of  our  brightest  and  otherwise  most  cap- 
able men  and  women  become  personal  dem- 
onstrators of  the  law.  It  also  explains  why  so 
many  become  mere  readers  of  books.  And 
yet,  we  are  forced  by  evidence  which  cannot 
be  refuted,  to  recognize  as  a  fundamental 
principle  of  individual  human  development, 
that  exact  and  definite  knowledge  comes  to 
all  of  us  in  exact  ratio  with  the  amount  of 
intelligence,  moral  courage  and  perseverance 
we  put  into  the  active  search  for  it. 

One  person  may  possess  the  necessary  in- 
telligence but  lack  the  courage  and  persever- 
ance. Another  may  have  the  requisite  cour- 
age but  fall  below  the  necessary  standard  of 
intelligence  and  perseverance.  A  third  may 
possess  the  full  measure  of  necessary  perse- 
verance but  fail  in  point  of  both  intelligence 
and  courage.    A  fourth  may  be  able  to  dem- 

85 


THK  GREAT  WORK 

onstrate  an  abundance  of  both  intelligence 
and  courage  but  find  himself  deficient  in  the 
element  of  perseverance.  And  yet  another 
may  meet  the  required  standard  of  intelli- 
gence and  perseverance,  and  at  the  same  time 
be  wholly  deficient  in  courage;  and  so  on. 
But  the  men  and  women  are  few  indeed,  who 
possess  all  three  of  these  elements  of  charac- 
ter in  such  measure  and  quality  as  to  lead 
them  into  the  field  of  personal  demonstra- 
tion. This  is  more  especially  true  within  the 
field  of  what,  by  common  consent,  we  have 
come  to  designate  as  the  Universal  Laws, 
principles,  forces,  activities  and  processes  of 
Nature. 

As  a  perfectly  natural  result,  most  of  us 
find  it  so  much  easier  and  more  convenient  to 
assume  knowledge  than  to  demonstrate  its 
truth,  that  we  fall  into  the  habit  of  relying 
more  upon  others  than  upon  ourselves  to  dis- 
cover the  facts  of  Nature  and  reduce  them  to 
definite  and  personal  knowledge. 

Even  more  strongly  still  are  we  tempted 
to  content  ourselves  with  reveling  in  the  neb- 
ulous and  fascinating  field  of  mere  specula- 
tions, opinions  and  beliefs.    Why?    Because 

86 


INTELLECTUAL  POVERTY;  INDOLENCE 

this  calls  for  the  minimum  of  personal  ef- 
fort on  our  part. 

To  this  intellectual  inertia  and  inherent  in- 
dolence of  human  nature  are  due  most  of  the 
prejudices,  superstitions  and  dogmas  of  both 
science  and  religion  throughout  the  ages. 

It  is  easier  to  entertain  a  prejudice  than  it 
is  to  acquire  the  knowledge  necessary  to 
rise  above  it.  Most  of  us  are  the  wit- 
less slaves  of  prejudice.  It  is  more  con- 
venient to  cherish  a  superstition  than  it  is  to 
acquire  the  wisdom  necessary  to  demonstrate 
its  fallacy.  For  this  reason  most  of  us  are 
bound  by  superstition.  It  is  more  agreeable 
(to  ourselves)  to  dogmatize  than  to  demon- 
strate. Hence  it  is  that  most  of  us  are  dog- 
matic and  intolerant  without  knowing  it.  It 
is  more  pleasant  to  preach  than  it  is  to  prac- 
tice. Therefore  the  majority  preach  and  the 
minority  practice. 

These  are  among  the  frailties  and  fallacies 
of  human  nature  with  which  we  have  to  con- 
tend in  our  search  for  Truth.  We  all  know 
them.  We  all  recognize  them — in  others. 
We  all  admit  them — for  those  who  decline 
to  do  so.     Much  as  we  may  appear  to  be,  we 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

are  neither  entirely  ignorant  nor  wholly  in- 
nocent of  the  part  they  play  in  our  own  lives. 
More  than  this,  we  know  the  remedy.  We 
cannot  hope  to  evade  nor  even  minimize  our 
personal  responsibility  for  the  evil  results 
which  flow  from  their  daily  presence  and  in- 
fluence in  our  lives. 

Let  us  not  deceive  ourselves  longer.  Let 
us  not  even  try  to  do  so.  Let  us  declare  our 
emancipation  from  the  tyranny  of  such  a 
slavery.     Let  us  do  it  now. 

Hereafter  let  us  intelligently,  courage- 
ously and  persistently  apply  ourselves  to 
the  honest  and  earnest  search  for  definite, 
personal  knowledge.  Let  us  do  this  in  what- 
soever fields  are  open  and  accessible  to  us. 
Let  us  do  it,  if  necessary,  in  defiance  of  our 
own  present  opinions  and  beliefs,  prejudices 
and  superstitions,  inclinations  and  desires,  as 
well  as  those  of  our  fellow  men  who  would 
seek  to  hold  us  in  bondage.  Let  us  do  this, 
secure  in  the  consciousness  that  Truth  is  al- 
ways a  friend  to  him  who  honestly  seeks  it 
and  a  benefactor  to  him  who  lives  it. 


88 


CHAPTER  X 


ETHICAL  SECTION 


The  Ethical  Section  covers  a  series  of  defi- 
nitely formulated  problems.  Each  of  these 
problems  has  a  distinct  threefold  value  to  the 
student  in  relation  to  the  subject  of  his  Spir- 
itual Development. 

Its  solution  calls  for  his  most  intense  in- 
tellectual effort.  His  labor  upon  it  necessar- 
ily results  in  his  mental  and  intellectual 
unfoldment.   It  is  an  intellectual  education. 

Each  problem  is  of  such  a  nature  as  to  de- 
mand of  the  student  a  most  searching  self- 
examination.  The  direct  and  inevitable  re- 
sults of  this  are  a  better  acquaintance  with 
and  a  more  accurate  knowledge  of  self. 

The  most  important  value  of  each  prob- 
lem is  that  it  constitutes  a  definitely  formu- 
lated Ethical  Principle  which  he  is  com- 
pelled to  adopt  as  a  part  of  a  complete 
Ethical  Code  by  which  to  Live  a  Life. 

It  is  only  by  the  living  of  a  life  in  exact 

89 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

conformity  with  these  principles  that  he  is 
enabled  perfectly  to  align  himself  with  the 
Constructive  Principle  of  Nature  at  the  foun- 
dation of  Independent  Spiritual  Unfold- 
ment. 

Herein  is  one  of  the  unique  and  at  the  same 
time  interesting  phases  of  the  Great  Work. 
It  is  an  "individual"  work.  It  is  a  work  of 
individual  development,  individual  unfold- 
ment,  individual  attainment.  It  cannot  be 
delegated.  The  individual  who  is  to  receive 
the  benefits  must  do  the  work.  He  cannot 
furnish  a  "substitute,"  as  men  are  sometimes 
permitted  to  do  in  times  of  war  when  they 
are  drafted  into  service.  Nature  steps  in  with 
her  limitations  and  says: 

"There  shall  be  no  individual  development 
save  that  which  results  from  individual  ef- 
fort." We  cannot  overrule  Nature  nor  go 
back  of  her  decrees. 

It  is  only  when  the  "Ethical  Section"  of 
the  Great  Work  has  been  fully  accomplished 
that  the  student  is  in  position  to  know  how  to 
proceed  beyond  that  point.  Then  only  is  it 
possible  for  him  to  know  definitely  and  un- 
mistakably the  character  of  life  he  must  live 

90 


ETHICAL  SECTION 

in  order  that  he  may  thereby  conform  him- 
self to  the  immutable  demands  of  the  Con- 
structive Principle  of  Nature  upon  which 
alone  true  spiritual  and  psychical  unfold- 
ment  depends. 

As  you  go  forward  in  the  work  of  individ- 
ual unfoldment  under  and  in  accordance 
with  the  terms  of  the  Scientific  Formulary, 
you  will  note  the  fact  that  at  every  step  and 
with  every  new  phase  of  the  subject  the 
character  of  simplicity  prevails.  Every  prob- 
lem of  the  Ethical  Section  of  the  General 
Formulary  is  reduced  to  its  primary  and  es- 
sential elements,  with  as  much  certainty  and 
precision  as  are  the  problems  of  Euclid. 

As  this  fact  grows  upon  the  intelligent  stu- 
dent it  enables  him  the  better  to  understand 
and  appreciate  the  vast  antiquity  of  the 
Work,  as  well  as  the  unbroken  lineage  of  the 
Great  School  through  which  it  comes  down 
to  us. 

The  remarkable  fact  that  in  this  simple 
Formulary,  for  the  first  time  within  our 
knowledge  of  history,  we  find  "Ethics"  re- 
duced to  an  "Exact  Science,"  is  sufficient  of 
itself  to  suggest  to  those  who  think  intelli- 

91 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

gently,  the  fact  that  all  this  is  not  the  result 
of  any  one  mind.  It  should  be  sufficient  to 
establish  beyond  question  that  it  is  the  fruit- 
age of  the  best  intelligence  of  all  ages,  from 
the  cradle  of  humanity  to  the  immediate 
present. 

The  Great  School  of  the  Masters,  as  it  ex- 
ists upon  the  earth  at  this  time,  is  but  the 
present  and  last  link  of  a  great  unfinished 
chain,  by  means  of  which  the  crystallized  re- 
sults of  the  ages  past  are  brought  down  to  us 
of  this  day  and  generation.  You  who  shall 
receive  these  results  in  good  faith,  and  who 
of  your  own  free  will  and  accord  enlist  your 
services  in  the  Great  Work  of  Emancipation, 
will  constitute  the  next  regular  link  in  the 
same  great  chain. 

Thus  the  cumulative  results  of  the  ages 
may  be  passed  on  to  others  who  are  ready, 
willing  and  able  to  receive  them  and  rightly 
use  them. 

The  purpose  of  the  Ethical  Section  of  the 
General  Formulary  is  to  indicate,  as  far  as 
may  be  possible,  the  lines  within  which 
knowledge  may  be  obtained  in  such  manner 
as  to  keep  within  the  radius  of  the  Construe- 


ETHICAL  SECTION 

tive  Principle  and  Process  of  Nature.  Its  in- 
tent is  to  save  you  as  many  mistakes  as  pos- 
sible, and  thus  to  conserve  your  energies  for 
Constructive  Work,  as  far  as  may  be  possible. 
In  the  Ethical  Section  of  the  General  Formu- 
lary you  have  the  crystallized  experiences  of 
the  Masters  of  Natural  Science  throughout 
all  the  past  ages  of  their  scientific  labors.  If 
you  are  wise  enough  and  strong  enough  to 
avail  yourself  of  the  scientific  results  therein 
placed  before  you,  it  is  possible  for  you  to 
achieve  the  same  results. 

The  importance  of  the  great  Moral  Law 
in  its  relation  to  Ethics,  and  the  fact  that  it  is 
vitally  related  to  the  process  of  Independent 
Spiritual  Unfoldment,  are  propositions  that 
have  been  tried,  tested  and  demonstrated 
times  almost  without  number.  It  has  been 
discovered,  in  this  connection,  that  a  recog- 
nition of  that  Law  as  a  fact  of  Nature,  and  a 
willing  compliance  with  its  requirements  are 
necessary  factors  in  the  process  of  Indepen- 
dent Spiritual  Unfoldment. 

In  all  this  work  of  Construction  you  must 
build  in  such  a  manner  that  you  shall  in  no 
wise  trespass  upon  the  rights,  privileges,  pre- 

93 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

rogatives,  possessions,  duties  or  obligations  of 
your  fellow  man.  (And  during  all  your 
building  you  must  hold  yourself  bound  at  all 
times  to  render  to  others  a  just  equivalent  for 
all  the  benefits  you  shall  receive  from  them.) 

You  must  so  build  that  you  shall  at  all 
times  hold  yourself  bound  to  balance  the  ac- 
count of  all  your  benefits. 

Did  you  ever  before  think  of  life  from  ex- 
actly this  point  of  view?  If  not,  then  you 
have  something  yet  to  accomplish  in  this  life, 
and  something  that  will  richly  reward  you 
for  the  honest  effort  you  put  into  it.  If  you 
will  but  make  this  a  special  theme  for  your 
future  study  and  contemplation  it  will  open 
to  you  a  world  of  new  possibilities,  enlarged 
significance  and  ever  increasing  beauty.  It 
will  do  much  to  divest  life  of  its  seeming 
complexity  and  will  bring  many  of  its  most 
intricate  problems  within  the  radius  of  your 
own  intelligent  understanding.  In  the  end 
it  will  help  you  to  reduce  the  great  Theorem 
of  Individual  Life  to  its  final  analysis  and 
correct  expression. 

The  student  of  Medicine,  in  the  course  of 
his  education,  is  compelled  to  acquaint  him- 

H 


ETHICAL  SECTION 

self  with  the  nature  and  physiological  action 
of  drugs  and  medicines  of  all  kinds.  He 
must  know  which  are  Constructive  in  their 
physiological  action  and  he  must  also  know 
which  are  Destructive.  He  must  know  which 
are  poisons  and  which  are  panaceas.  He 
must  know  as  much  about  poisons  as  he  does 
about  elixirs. 

His  knowledge  of  the  one  is  as  necessary 
to  his  skill  and  success  as  a  physician  as  his 
knowledge  of  the  other.  He  must  know 
which  are  poisons  in  order  that  he  may  not, 
through  ignorance,  kill  his  patients  instead 
of  curing  them.  The  student  of  pharmacy 
must  also  have  a  definite  and  exact  knowl- 
edge of  all  kinds  of  drugs,  both  destructive 
and  constructive,  poisonous  and  curative,  in 
order  that  he  may  be  able  correctly  to  fill  the 
physician's  prescriptions.  Without  such 
knowledge  he  would  be  as  likely  to  com- 
pound a  deadly  poison  as  a  beneficent  restor- 
ative. 

In  like  manner,  and  for  analogous  reasons, 
it  is  necessary  for  every  student  who  enters 
upon  the  task  of  Independent  Spiritual  Un- 
foldment  to  understand  the  Destructive  ele- 

95 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

ments  and  processes  of  Nature  in  individual 
life  as  well  as  the  Constructive. 

In  the  development  of  the  Ethical  Formu- 
lary, the  Great  School  has  included  only 
those  elements  which  are  Constructive  in 
their  action  upon  an  Individual  Intelligence 
or  Soul.  They  have  excluded  everything  else. 
But  the  exclusion  is  understood  rather  than 
expressed. 

The  pharmacist  understands  when  he  re- 
ceives a  physician's  prescription  that  the 
chemical  formula  he  is  to  compound  includes 
only  the  particular  ingredients  therein  desig- 
nated, and  in  the  exact  amounts  prescribed. 
He  understands,  without  being  told,  that 
everything  else  is  excluded.  Knowing  some- 
thing of  the  disease  for  which  the  medicine 
is  to  be  given,  he  may  wonder  if  some  other 
ingredient  not  mentioned  in  the  prescription 
might  not  add  to  the  therapeutic  value  and 
potency  of  the  remedy.  He  may  even  think 
that  a  different  drug  might  be  substituted  for 
one  of  those  mentioned ;  or  he  may  even  be 
convinced  that  another  and  wholly  different 
formula  would  accomplish  the  desired  re- 
sult. 

96 


ETHICAL  SECTION 

It  is  the  business  of  the  physician  to 
make  the  prescription,  because  he  is  the 
individual  who  has  tried  and  tested  each 
ingredient  in  actual  practice  and  knows  its 
action  and  its  therapeutic  value,  and  also  be- 
cause this  falls  within  the  scope  of  his  profes- 
sion and  his  professional  duties. 

It  is  the  business  of  the  pharmacist  to  fill 
the  prescription  just  as  he  receives  it  from  the 
physician,  because  that  is  within  the  scope  of 
his  profession  and  a  part  of  his  professional 
duties.  It  was  for  this  that  his  license  was 
granted  him. 

It  is  the  duty  of  the  patient  to  take  the 
remedy  as  prescribed,  if  he  takes  it  at  all,  for 
only  by  so  doing  is  it  possible  for  him  to  do 
justice  to  the  physician  whose  judgment  he 
has  consulted  and  upon  whom  he  has  there- 
by placed  a  heavy  responsibility. 

These  suggestions  apply  with  added  em- 
phasis to  those  who  enter  into  the  work  of 
Independent  Spiritual  Development  under 
and  in  accordance  with  the  Formulary  of  the 
Great  School  of  Natural  Science. 

If  they  accept  the  judgment  of  the  School 
at  all,  then  they  should  understand  that  the 

97 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Formulary  is  one  which  is  not  to  be  changed. 
No  new  elements  must  be  introduced.  If  the 
Formulary  is  changed,  either  by  eliTnination, 
addition  or  substitution,  it  is  no  longer  the. 
Formulary  of  this  School;  nor  must  the  re- 
sults of  any  such  modified  Formulary  be 
charged  to  this  School. 

If  there  are  any  who  are  impatient  in  their 
desire  to  take  up  the  Technical  Work  of  the 
Second  and  Third  Sections  of  the  General 
Formulary,  they  are  asked  to  bear  in  mind 
these  important  suggestions: 

The  Ethical  Foundation  must  first  be  laid 
by  every  student,  broad  and  deep  in  his  own 
life,  before  it  is  possible  for  him  to  enter 
upon  the  Second  Section,  which  has  been 
designated  as  "Technical  Work." 

It  is  for  this  reason  that  the  Ethical  Sec- 
tion is  presented  first  for  his  consideration. 
In  this  Section  is  placed  before  him  the 
Moral  Status  which  it  is  necessary  for  him 
to  attain  within  himself  before  it  is  possible 
for  him  to  place  himself  in  that  "Attitude  of 
Soul"  from  which  alone  it  is  possible  for 
him  or  any  other  individual  ever  to  accom- 
plish the  Technical  Work. 
n 


ETHICAL  SECTION 

The  Second  and  Third  Sections  of  the 
Work,  though  designated  as  "Technical,"  are 
no  more  truly  and  definitely  "Scientific"  than 
the  Ethical  Section.  It  is  true  they  involve 
the  doing  of  certain  definite  and  specific 
things,  vs^hich  clearly  indicate  the  direct  line 
along  v^hich  he  must  put  forth  his  "Personal 
Effort,"  and  they  outline  for  him  the  mean- 
ing and  the  purpose  of  each  specific  act  he  is 
required  to  perform. 

It  is  absolutely  necessary  for  him  to  be 
the  thing  indicated  in  the  Ethical  Section  be- 
fore it  is  possible  for  him  ever  to  do  the 
things  outlined  for  him  in  the  Technical  Sec- 
tion. 

The  goal  of  Spiritual  Independence  and 
Mastership  is  one  which  cannot  be  reached 
by  those  whose  impatience  would  impel  them 
to  travel  ^^ cross-lots^*  or  to  skip  any  of  the 
''hard  places/' 

Those  w^ho  are  not  willing  in  good  faith  to 
square  their  lives  by  the  scientific  require- 
ments of  the  Ethical  Section  need  not  hope 
ever  to  accomplish  the  work  of  the  other  two. 
It  would  be  but  a  waste  of  both  time  and 

99 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

energy   for   them   to   attempt    it.     It   is    im- 
possible. 

No  greater  fallacy  could  be  suggested  than 
to  credit  the  author  of  this  volume  person- 
ally with  the  honor  of  having  wrought  out, 
from  the  recesses  of  his  own  brain  and  con- 
sciousness, the  definite  results  here  referred 
to.  He  would  be  most  willing  and  happy  to 
acknowledge  such  honor  if  he  were  justly  en- 
titled to  it.  Such]  however,  is  not  the  case. 
To  him  it  is  sufficient  honor  that  he  has  been 
assigned  the  difficult  task  of  reducing  the 
subject  to  a  si  triple  and  unambiguous  expres- 
sion in  the  language  of  his  own  people. 


too 


CHAPTER  XI 


SOUL 


"Soul"  (Ego,  Individual  Intelligence,  Es- 
sential Self)  is  the  highest  element  of  indi- 
vidual being  which  is  back  of  all  the  phe- 
nomena by  means  of  which  it  expresses  and 
manifests  itself  on  any  or  all  the  planes  of 
life,  spiritual  as  well  as  physical. 

A  Soul  is  seemingly  as  far  beyond  the 
limits  of  objective  spiritual  sight  as  it  is 
beyond  the  limitations  of  physical  vision.  In 
the  Spiritual  world  a  Soul  manifests  through 
its  spiritual  instrument,  the  spiritual  body — 
as  it  does  in  the  physical  world  through  its 
physical  body. 

A  spiritually  embodied  Soul  is  just  as 
conscious  that  it  is  something  else  than,  and 
different  from,  its  spiritual  body,  as  it  is  con- 
scious that  it  is  different  from  its  physical 
body.  In  both  conditions  it  recognizes  that 
its  body  is  only  a  mere  material  instrument, 
through  which  it  may  manifest  itself  upon 

101 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

that  particular  plane  of  materiality  to  which 
its  body  belongs. 

So  far  as  the  Great  Masters  have  been  able 
to  follow  an  Individual  Soul  in  its  evolu- 
tionary development,  there  never  comes  a 
time  nor  a  point  in  its  unfoldment  when  it 
entirely  ceases  to  employ  material  substance 
through  which  to  manifest  itself.  What  the 
ultimate  of  its  evolutionary  unfoldment  and 
possibilities  may  be,  of  course,  "doth  not  yet 
appear." 

So  far  as  The  Great  School  of  the  Masters 
has  definite  knowledge  on  the  subject,  a  Soul 
is  never  without  a  material  body  of  some 
kind.  So  far  as  yet  known,  it  does  not  evolve 
to  a  state  or  condition  wherein  it  is  able  to 
manifest  itself  without  a  material  medium  of 
manifestation.  So  far  as  science  yet  knows, 
there  never  comes  a  time  in  the  evolution  of 
an  Individual  Soul  when  it  stands  uncovered 
and  entirely  independent  of  all  material  sub- 
stance. 

Notwithstanding  its  elusiveness,  and  all 
these  difficulties  added,  we  know  that  an 
Intelligent  Soul  is  Conscious.  Wc  know 
that  it  is  capable  of  receiving  impressions.  We 

102 


SOUL 

know  that  these  impressions  result  in  what 
we  call  "experiences."  We  know  that  these 
''experiences"  constitute  our  definite  personal 
"knowledge."  We  also  know  that  the  impres- 
sions we  receive,  come  to  us  through  both 
our  physical  senses  and  our  spiritual  senses. 
We  know  that  they  result  in  what  we  desig- 
nate as  "physical  experiences"  and  "spiritual 
experiences."  We  know  that  this  is  the  rea- 
son our  knowledge  divides  itself  into  the  two 
departments  which  we  call  "physical  knowl- 
edge" and  "spiritual  knowledge"  —  more 
commonly  designated  as  "physical  science" 
and  "spiritual  science." 

On  the  basis  of  this  knowledge,  we  have 
given  names  to  certain  of  the  attributes  of  a 
Soul,  so  that  we  may  be  able  to  identify  them 
and  talk  of  them  intelligently  and  without 
being  misunderstood. 

The  attributes  of  a  Soul,  on  their  func- 
tional basis,  divide  themselves  naturally  into 
two  distinct  classes. 

(a)  Those  attributes  whose  offices  or  func- 
tions are  receptive  in  their  essential  nature,  as 
they  affect  an  Individual  Intelligence  or 
Soul.  These  appear  to  be  dependent  for  their 

103 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

operation  upon  natural  laws  and  conditions 
over  which  a  Soul  does  not  necessarily  exer- 
cise individual  control. 

The  sense  we  call  "feeling"  is  an  inherent 
and  necessary  attribute  of  a  Soul.  It  is  re- 
ceptive in  its  essential  nature,  from  the  stand- 
point of  an  Individual,  and  operates  in  re- 
sponse to  the  law  of  its  inherent  constitution. 
It  is  not  under  the  control  of  the  average 
Individual  Intelligence.  It  is  there,  and  it 
operates  without  depending  upon  us  to  set  the 
process  in  motion.  It  involves  a  process 
which  is  set  in  motion  by  outside  Nature  and 
not  by  the  Individual. 

The  attribute  we  call  "memory"  is  an  at- 
tribute of  a  Soul  by  means  of  which  an  In- 
dividual Intelligence  retains  a  knowledge  of 
its  past  experiences.  It  is  also  receptive  in 
its  essential  nature,  and  operates  in  response 
to  the  law  of  its  own  being.  It  is  not  neces- 
sarily under  the  control  of  the  Individual 
Intelligence.  It  is  there,  and  it  operates  in 
most  Individuals  regardless  of  an  Individual 
Will  or  wish. 

(b)  Those  attributes  whose  offices  or  func- 
tions  are   positive,   active   and   aggressive  in 

lOi 


SOUL 

their  essential  nature,  and  in  their  relation  to 
an  Individual  Intelligence  or  Soul.  These 
are  under  the  control  of  Individual  Intelli- 
gence, and  they  operate  because  the  Individ- 
ual takes  the  initiative  and  sets  them  in 
motion. 

We  have  that  which  we  call  "reason."  A 
Soul  cannot  reason  while  in  a  state  of  abso- 
lute negation,  or  passivity.  This  is  because 
the  process  is  one  which,  in  its  essential  na- 
ture, is  active  and  positive.  It  involves  a 
process  which  depends  upon  the  Individual 
Intelligence  to  set  it  in  motion  and  keep  it 
going. 

It  is  not  a  process  which  runs  itself  auto- 
matically and  without  an  effort  of  the  Indi- 
vidual. It  depends  upon  the  action  of  the 
Intelligent  Soul  for  its  initiative,  and  in  its 
very  nature  must  be  at  all  times  under  the 
control  of  the  Individual;  otherwise  it  would 
not  be  "Reason." 

The  attributes  of  a  Soul  which  fall  under 
the  first  class  above  mentioned  because  of 
their  negative,  passive,  or  receptive  nature, 
and  because  they  are  not  by  virtue  of  any  in- 
herent necessity  under  the  control  of  an  In- 

105 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

dividual  Intelligence,  or  Soul — we  designate 
as  ''faculties"  or  "capacities." 

Those  which  fall  under  the  second  class — 
because  they  arc  active  and  positive  in  their 
essential  nature,  and  must  be  set  in  motion 
and  controlled  by  an  Individual  Intelligence, 
or  Soul — we  designate  as  "powers." 

A  Soul  manifests  itself  upon  the  physical 
plane  through  and  by  means  of  its  physical 
instrument,  the  physical  body. 

Scientifically  speaking,  the  physical  body 
is  simply  the  physical  phenomenon  of  a  Soul, 
and  not  a  Soul  itself.  For  this  reason,  when 
we  look  into  the  eyes  of  a  friend  we  do  not  see 
him,  a  Soul.  We  see  only  the  physical  body 
through  the  windows  of  which  he  is  looking 
out  at  us.  He  closes  one  of  these  windows, 
and  we  say  "he"  is  winking  "his  eye"  at  us. 
We  say  truly,  for  the  Soul  that  does  the  wink- 
ing is  back  of  the  thing  it  winks.  Has  the 
reader  not,  more  than  once,  looked  into  the 
eyes  of  a  friend,  or  stranger,  or  loved  one, 
and  said  to  himself  something  like  this: 
"What  is  the  thing  that  sits  just  back  of  those 
eyes  looking  out  at  me?  It  is  intelligent.  It 
knows  things.     It  thinks.     It  calls  itself  '// 

106 


SOUL 

for  it  says  'I  see  you.'  But  it  doesn't  really 
see  ME.  It  sees  only  my  body.  It  can  no 
more  see  what  is  back  of  my  physical  eyes 
than  I  can  see  what  is  back  of  its." 

Then  has  he  not  turned  the  subject  of  in- 
quiry upon  himself,  and  found  himself  just 
as  profoundly  puzzled  in  his  efforts  to  anal- 
yze and  understand  himself?  Has  he  not  at 
some  time  said  to  himself:  "What  is  the  thing 
I  call  T?  What  is  this  T  that  sits  back 
within  this  physical  body  I  call  'mine,' 
and  looks  out  at  other  things  that  call  them- 
selves T?  What  is  it  that  sits  quietly  con- 
templating these  other  things  that  seem  to 
be  no  greater  mystery  to  me  than  T  am  to 
myself?"  Hasn't  he  turned  his  attention  to 
other  things  with  a  sensation  akin  to  hopeless- 
ness, at  the  thought  that  one  is  not  only  un- 
able to  see  the  essential  reality  back  of  those 
other  eyes,  but  that  he  is  just  as  far  from  be- 
ing able  to  see  his  own  essential  "Self"? 

You  can  see  your  physical  body,  and  you 
say  of  it— "It  is  MINE."  You  know  it  be- 
longs to  you,  for  a  time  at  least,  but  you  know 
also  that  it  is  not  YOU.  You  know  that  some 
day  the  body  will  cease  to  respond  to  your 

107 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

commands.  It  will  become  useless  to  you  as  a 
means  of  expressing  yourself.  Then  you  will 
throw  it  away,  or  just  creep  out  of  it  and  let 
others  who  call  themselves  "I,"  bury  it,  or 
burn  it,  while  YOlJ  will  go  on  about  your 
business  in  another  world  of  conditions. 


tot 


CHAPTER  XII 


CONSCIOUSNESS 


Individual  Consciousness  is  as  profound  a 
mystery  as  there  is  in  all  the  universe.  It  is, 
nevertheless,  the  essential  foundation  of  all 
our  individual  efforts  and  all  our  individual 
progress. 

To  fathom  the  depths  of  Consciousness  and 
understand  all  that  it  is,  all  that  it  means,  all 
that  it  involves,  and  all  its  possibilities,  it  is 
believed  by  the  Great  Masters,  v^^ould  be  to 
know  all  there  is  to  be  known  in  all  the  uni- 
verse. By  some  it  is  even  believed  that  this 
would  be  to  know  the  Great  Universal  In- 
telligence, and  all  that  this  implies. 

So  far  as  known  by  the  Great  School  of  the 
Masters,  the  possibilities  of  individual  Con- 
sciousness have  never  yet  been  determined, 
and  its  limitations  have  never  yet  been 
reached. 

We  know  by  absolute  personal  experience 
that  Consciousness  is  as  truly  subject  to  the 

109 


THE  GRKAT  WORK 

law  of  evolution  as  is  Individual  Intelli- 
gence. Is  is  forever  in  a  state  or  condi- 
tion of  unfoldment,  expansion  and  natu- 
ral growth.  The  infant  at  birth  is  con- 
scious of  but  little  outside  or  beyond  ♦^hc 
demands  of  its  physical  body  for  food  and 
comfort.  Its  growth  from  infancy  to  matur- 
ity represents  a  corresponding  growth  and 
unfoldment  of  its  Consciousness. 

The  whole  problem  of  individual  life  is, 
primarily  and  essentially,  the  problem  of  In- 
dividual Consciousness.  The  two  cannot  be 
separated,  whatever  the  scientific  relation  or 
unity  of  their  nature  may  be. 

Let  us  approach  it  along  the  line  of 
the  physical  senses.  This  is  the  field  of  its 
operation  with  which  mankind  in  general  is 
most  familiar.  Let  us  analyze  the  process  in- 
volved in  the  experience  we  call  "sound," 
and  observe  where  it  leads  us. 

The  physical  atmosphere  is  set  in  vibra- 
tory motion  at  a  sufficient  number  of  vibra- 
tions per  second,  and  of  sufficient  force,  to 
make  an  impression  upon  the  physical  organ 
of  hearing.  These  vibrations  travel  in  radiat- 
ing circles  from  the  point  of  their  inception 

110 


CONSCIOUSNESS 

until  they  strike  upon  the  outer  ear  of  the  in- 
dividual. There  they  are  gathered  and  thence 
communicated  to  the  tympanic  membrane 
which  they  set  in  synchronous  vibratory  mo- 
tion. This,  in  turn,  carries  the  vibrations 
through  the  chain  of  bones  of  the  inner  ear, 
which  are  so  delicately  adjusted  and  perfect- 
ly arranged  that  the  inner  one  of  the  chain 
impinges  upon  the  fluid  in  which  filaments 
of  the  outer  end  of  the  Auditory  Nerve  float. 
Thus  the  outer  end  of  the  auditory  nerve  is 
set  vibrating  at  the  same  rate.  The  vibrations 
travel  thence  along  the  entire  length  of  the 
auditory  nerve  to  a  point  at  the  inner  extrem- 
ity of  that  nerve,  somewhere  within  the  brain 
center.  Just  what  occurs  when  the  vibrations 
reach  the  inner  end  of  the  auditory  nerve  is 
not  known.  But  it  is  known  that  whatever  the 
thing  is  that  there  and  then  occurs,  it  makes 
an  impression  on  Consciousness  (sometimes 
called  by  the  Great  Masters  "the  Sensorium 
of  the  Soul"),  and  this  impression  is  recog- 
nized by  an  Intelligent  Soul  as  "sound." 

The  rate  of  such  vibrations — which  means 
the  number  of  vibrations  per  second — deter- 
111 


TflK  GRKAT  WORK 

mines  the  pitch  of  the  sound;  whether  it  is 
high  or  low. 

The  distance  covered  by  the  oscillations  of 
the  vibrating  body  or  substance  determines 
whether  the  sound  is  loud  or  soft.  The 
greater  the  distance  covered  by  the  oscilla- 
tions, the  louder  the  sound,  and  conversely. 

The  process  we  call  "sight"  may  be  anal- 
yzed in  the  same  way.  Vibrations  at  a  cer- 
tain rate  sufficiently  high  to  produce  an  im- 
pression, penetrate  the  eye.  They  strike  upon 
the  filaments  of  the  Optic  Nerve  spread  out 
over  the  inner  back  surface  of  the  eye-ball. 
These  are  set  vibrating  at  a  synchronous  rate, 
and  these  vibrations  are  carried  along  the  op- 
tic nerve  to  its  inner  extremity,  where  the 
same  unknown  thing  occurs  which  makes  an 
impression  on  Consciousness  (or  Sensorium 
of  the  Soul),  which  impression  is  recognized 
by  an  Intelligent  Soul  as  "sight." 

The  rate  of  vibration,  in  this  instance,  de- 
termines the  "color"  of  the  object  thus  seen, 
etc. 

Similar  processes  convey  vibrations  of 
touch,  taste  and  smell  to  the  inner  extremities 
of  the  special  nerves  which  convey  them. 

112 


CONSCIOUSNESS 

At  the  inner  extremities  of  these  special 
nerves  that  same  "unknown  thing"  occurs; 
and  in  one  case  the  "impression"  translates  it- 
self to  a  Soul  as  "touch,"  in  another  as 
"taste,"  and  in  the  third  as  "smell." 

The  vibratory  rating  determines  whether 
the  touch  is  enjoyable  or  painful,  whether 
the  taste  is  sweet  or  sour  or  bitter,  and 
whether  the  smell  is  pleasant  or  displeasing. 

The  vibrations,  in  all  these  cases,  are  vi- 
brations of  physical  material.  Strike  any  key 
of  a  piano.  You  thereby  set  a  certain  string, 
or  set  of  strings,  to  vibrating.  These  strings 
are  all  composed  of  physical  matter.  They 
communicate  their  vibrations  to  the  atmo- 
sphere. The  atmosphere  is  also  physical.  It 
communicates  its  vibrations  to  the  nerve  of 
hearing.  This  also  is  physical.  The  vibra- 
tions travel  the  entire  length  of  the  nerve  un- 
til they  arrive  at  its  inner  extremity  within 
the  brain.    The  brain  also  is  material. 

Up  to  this  point  we  have  been  following 
physical  vibrations,  or  vibrations  of  physical 
matter  only. 

Before  these  vibrations  can  be  recog- 
nized by  an  Intelligent  Soul  as  "sensation" — 

113 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

whether  of  sight,  hearing,  taste,  touch  or 
smell  —  the  purely  physical  process  which 
has  carried  them  to  the  brain,  must  either  set 
in  motion,  or  be  transmuted  into,  a  psychic 
process. 

Consciousness  is  an  attribute  of  an  Intelli- 
gent Soul.  It  is  a  Soul  that  is  affected  by 
"sensation" — in  its  final  analysis.  It  is  an  In- 
telligent Soul  that  is  waiting  to  be  impressed 
by  all  these  vibrations,  when  they  shall  reach 
the  inner  nerve  extremity,  or  brain  center. 

The  "thing"  that  is  "unknown"  in  this 
process  is  just  how  physical  vibrations,  when 
they  reach  the  brain  center,  are  transmuted 
into  psychic  experiences  which  we  call 
"sight,  hearing,  taste,  touch  and  smell."  We 
know  that  "something"  does  occur,  for  we  re- 
ceive the  sensation  and  have  the  experience. 
We  know  that  up  to  a  certain  point  the  proc- 
ess is  physical,  and  that  beyond  that  point  it 
becomes  psychical.  Just  what  occurs  at  the 
time  and  place  when  and  where  a  physical 
vibration  becomes,  or  produces,  a  conscious 
experience  of  a  Soul  —  the  wisest  of  the 
Great  Masters  do  not  assume  to  know.  They 
only  know  that  the  faculty  or  capacity  of  a 

U4 


CONSCIOUSNESS 

Soul  which  we  name  "Consciousness"  re- 
ceives "impressions"  from  these  physical  vi- 
brations, and  that  these  "impressions"  being 
recognized  by  an  Intelligence  or  Soul,  con- 
stitute what  we  call  "experiences."  Every 
"experience"  of  this  nature  constitutes  an 
item  of  "knowledge."  The  sum  total  of  all 
these  "experiences"  which  come  to  us  from 
the  plane  of  physical  nature  through  the 
channels  of  the  physical  senses,  constitutes 
our  stock  of  knowledge  concerning  the  phys- 
ical universe. 

The  process  by  which  a  Soul  receives  im- 
pressions from  the  spiritual  world,  through 
the  action  of  its  spiritual  senses,  is  so  closely 
analogous  to  that  by  which  it  receives  impres- 
sions from  the  physical  world  through  the 
physical  senses,  as  virtually  to  be  identical. 
Both  are  vibratory  processes.  Both  convey 
vibrations,  from  their  own  particular  world 
of  material,  to  individual  Consciousness. 
In  the  spiritual  world,  as  in  the  physical,  the 
process  can  be  followed  with  reasonable 
scientific  certainty,  to  the  point  where  that 
"unknown  thing"  occurs  which  converts  it 
into  a  conscious  psychic  experience. 

115 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

There  is  a  very  definite  reason  why  the 
Great  Masters  do  not  know  just  what  occurs 
at  that  point  in  the  process  where  the  phys- 
ical and  spiritual  end  and  the  psychical  be- 
gins. While  this  may  not  be  very  satisfactory 
to  the  man  who  insists  upon  knowing  what 
that  "unknown  thing"  is,  nevertheless,  it  is 
often  of  very  great  importance  to  the  scientist 
to  know  why  he  does  not  know  a  given  item 
in  an  intricate  process.  To  know  why  we  do 
not  know  a  thing  we  desire  to  know,  is  the 
next  thing  to  knowing  the  thing  itself.  So,  in 
this  particular  instance,  it  is  an  item  of  im- 
portant knowledge  to  know  why  we  do  not 
know  the  thing  we  want  to  know.  It  may 
help  us  to  know  a  number  of  other  things 
which  are  likely  to  prove  of  even  greater  im- 
mediate value  and  importance  to  us  in  con- 
nection with  the  particular  thing  we  are  now 
trying  to  accomplish. 

The  reason  why  the  Great  School  and  the 
Great  Masters  do  not  know  the  exact  nature 
of  that  "unknown  thing"  to  which  we  have 
referred,  is  to  be  found  in  the  fact  that  an 
individual  Soul  is  not  a  visible  entity,  upon 
any  of  the  planes  of  life  from  the  physical  to 

116 


CONSCIOUSNESS 

the  highest  and  most  refined  spiritual  plane 
of  which  we  have  any  definite  knowledge. 

The  reason  why  the  Great  Masters  do  not 
know  just  what  the  "thing"  is  that  occurs  to 
transmit  a  physical  and  spiritual  material  vi- 
bration to  —  or  transmute  it  into  —  a  psychic 
experience,  is  that  they  cannot  follow  the 
process  far  enough  to  determine  with  scien- 
tific certainty.  They  cannot  see  a  Soul,  nor 
otherwise  sense  it,  except  through  its  material 
phenomena. 

The  office  of  "Consciousness"  is  to  receive 
impressions.  It  is  receiving  them  all  the  time, 
whether  we  will  or  not.  It  does  not  consult  us 
as  to  its  initiative.  It  simply  receives  what- 
ever impressions  come  to  it  through  any  and 
all  of  the  channels  of  sense,  and  upon  all  the 
planes  of  individual  being.  It  is,  in  truth, 
the  "Receiver  General"  of  a  Soul.  It  is  that 
faculty  or  capacity  of  the  Soul  which  makes 
us  aware  of  the  existence  of  things.  It  might 
truly  be  said  to  be  the  "Faculty  of  Aware- 
ness." It  is  also  that  faculty  upon  which  a 
Soul  depends  for  its  wakefulness,  or  "At- 
tention." 

Suppose  we  use  an  egg  as  a  figure,  or  imag- 

117 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

inary  working  model  of  a  conscious  Soul.  In 
order  to  make  it  serve  our  purpose  we  shall 
have  to  imagine  that  its  membranous  cover- 
ing has  not  yet  hardened  into  a  shell. 

Instead  of  a  shell  it  has  a  delicate  mem- 
branous covering  which  is  very  flexible  and 
exceedingly  responsive  to  every  touch  or  im- 
pact upon  its  surface  from  without. 

Let  us,  in  our  imagination,  locate  this  soft- 
shelled  egg  in  the  brain,  at  the  point  where 
that  ''unknown  thing"  occurs.  Let  us  locate 
it  in  such  manner  that  the  inner  extremity  or 
terminus  of  each  and  every  one  of  the  special 
nerves  of  sense  rests  somewhere  upon  the 
outer  surface  of  the  membranous  egg-cover- 
ing. Now  we  have  the  egg  so  located  that  the 
inner  extremity  of  the  optic  nerve,  the  inner 
extremity  of  the  auditory  nerve,  and  the  inner 
extremities  of  all  the  other  nerves  of  sense 
rest  upon  the  outer  surface  of  the  soft,  flex- 
ible, membranous  covering.  It  is  a  simple 
matter  to  understand  that  vibrations  travel- 
ing along  any  of  these  special  nerves,  when 
they  reach  the  inner  extremity  of  the  nerve, 
will  produce  an  impact,  or  impression,  upon 
the  membranous  covering  at   the  particular 

lit 


CONSCIOUSNESS 

point  where  the  inner  end  of  the  nerve  rests 
upon  its  outer  surface.  Let  us  suppose  that 
sound  waves  strike  upon  the  outer  ear,  thence 
are  communicated  to  the  inner  ear,  and 
thence  to  the  auditory  nerve,  and  that  these 
vibrations  finally  reach  the  inner  extremity 
of  that  nerve  where  it  rests  upon  the  outer 
surface  of  the  egg  covering. 

These  would  make  their  impression  upon 
the  membranous  covering,  and  this,  being 
flexible,  would  disturb  the  entire  contents  of 
the  egg  within  its  covering. 

In  this  imaginary  figure,  let  us  assume  that 
the  contents  of  the  egg  represent  an  Individ- 
ual Intelligence,  or  Soul,  and  the  membran- 
ous covering  represents  Consciousness. 

Vibrations  of  sight,  or  sound,  taste,  touch 
or  smell,  travel  along  their  special  sense  nerve 
to  the  point  where  its  inner  extremity  rests 
upon  the  outer  surface  of  this  "soft-shelled 
Consciousness."  The  impact,  or  impression, 
thus  made  upon  Consciousness,  is  felt  by  the 
Individual  Intelligence,  or  Soul,  within  and 
thereafter  constitutes  an  "experience"  of  a 
Soul.  In  this  case,  what  is  the  office  or  func- 
tion of  this  "soft-shelled  Consciousness?"    It 

119 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

is  merely  to  receive  impressions,  or  impacts, 
for  an  Intelligent  S(3ul,  off  the  ends  of  the 
various  nerves  of  sense,  communicated  to  it 
from  the  great  world  of  Nature  that  lies 
without.  Its  office  is  to  receive  impressions, 
or  impacts.  The  Soul  within  gets  the  benefit 
of  these  in  the  form  of  so  many  definite  "ex- 
periences," which  it  retains,  and  which  con- 
stitute its  store  of  exact  "knowledge." 

The  figure  might  be  carried  out  in  such 
manner  as  to  illustrate  all  the  various  attri- 
butes of  a  Soul,  and  show  their  natural  di- 
vision into  "Faculties"  (or  Capacities),  and 
"Powers." 

Let  it  be  distinctly  understood  that  this  is 
but  an  imaginary  figure,  pure  and  simple. 
Its  only  purpose  is  to  give  to  the  reader  a 
reason  why  the  Great  School  classes  Con- 
sciousness as  a  faculty,  or  capacity,  in- 
stead of  a  power;  and  why  we  conceive  its 
office  to  be  that  of  a  "Receiver"  for  an  intel- 
ligent Soul.  It  is  necessary  for  us  to  diflfer- 
entiate  between  "Faculties"  (or  Capacities) 
and  "Powers,"  and  between  Consciousness 
and  Soul  itself. 

This    School    defines    "Consciousness"    as 

110 


CONSCIOUSNESS 

"The  fundamental  Receiving  Attribute  of 
an  Intelligent  Soul."  In  this  view  it  is  not 
Soul  itself,  but  an  attribute  of  Soul.  Its 
distinctive  office,  or  function,  is  to  receive 
impressions  for  the  Soul,  through  the  chan- 
nels of  sense,  from  as  much  of  the  universe 
of  Nature  as  those  channels  can  be  made  to 
respond  to. 

Some  of  the  Great  Masters  have  defined 
Consciousness  as  "The  Sensorium  of  the 
Soul."  In  a  mechanical  sense  it  is  not  a  bad 
definition.  It  makes  clear  the  conception 
that  it  is  a  "Receiver."  This  is  the  spe- 
cific reason  why  it  is  classed  here  as  a  Fac- 
ulty, or  Capacity,  arid  not  as  a  Power  of  a 
Soul.  It  is  so  fundamental  in  its  nature  that 
it  constitutes  the  background  for  all  other 
faculties  and  capacities  of  a  Soul. 

Consciousness  is  so  essential  in  its  nature 
that  it  is  intimately  concerned  in  every  expe- 
rience of  a  Soul,  and  constitutes  a  perfect 
register  of  a  Soul's  individual  status  or 
condition  at  any  given  time.  So  inseparably 
connected  and  intimately  associated  are  they 
that  the  growth  of  a  Soul  involves  a  nec- 
essary and  correlative  increase  in  the  capacity 

121 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

of  Consciousness  to  receive  impressions. 
The  evolutionary  development  of  a  Soul 
involves  a  corresponding  unfoldment  of  Con- 
sciousness. Conversely,  the  extension  of  Con- 
sciousness necessarily  involves  Soul  Develop- 
ment. 

The  entire  problem  of  Evolutionary  De- 
velopment and  Spiritual  Unfoldment,  in  one 
sense,  is  but  the  problem  of  how  to  extend 
Individual  Consciousness  and  thus  enlarge 
the  field  of  its  operations. 

We  know  by  absolute  personal  experience 
that  Consciousness  is  as  truly  subject  to  the 
law  of  evolution  as  is  the  Individual  Intelli- 
gence or  Soul  of  man.  It  is  forever  in  a  state 
or  condition  of  unfoldment,  expansion  and 
natural  growth. 

So  far  as  known  by  the  Great  School  of 
the  Masters,  the  possibilities  of  individual 
Consciousness  have  never  yet  been  deter- 
mined, and  its  limitations  have  never  yet  been 
reached. 

It  is  not  possible  even  to  think  of  an  In- 
telligent Soul  without  Consciousness;  for  In- 
telligence necessarily  involves  Consciousness. 
It  is  therefore  impossible  to  consider  an  In- 

122 


CONSCIOUSNESS 

telligent  Soul  without  at  the  same  time  con- 
sidering Consciousness  which  is  one  of  its  es- 
sential and  fundamental  attributes. 

If  we  might  be  permitted  to  coin  a  word 
by  which  to  express  a  slightly  different  phase 
of  this,  the  most  wonderful  of  all  our  fac- 
ulties, Consciousness  is  the  "Perceptorium" 
of  a  Soul.  That  is,  Consciousness  is  the  fac- 
ulty by  which  a  Soul  perceives.  Perception 
is  but  an  intellectual  phase  of  Consciousness. 

It  is  admitted  that  there  is,  perhaps,  no 
greater  mystery  in  all  the  Universe  than 
Individual  Consciousness.  It  is  also  admitted 
that  all  the  processes  of  a  Soul  of  which  we 
have  exact  and  definite  knowledge,  are  con- 
scious processes.  It  is  not  possible  even  to 
think  of  an  Intelligent  Soul  without  Con- 
sciousness; for  Intelligence  necessarily  in- 
volves Consciousness.  It  is  therefore  impos- 
sible to  consider  an  Intelligent  Soul  without 
at  the  same  time  considering  Consciousness 
which  is  one  of  its  essential  and  fundamental 
attributes;  for  any  consideration  of  a  Soul 
as  an  entirety  necessarily  involves  a  consider- 
ation of  all  its  attributes. 

So  fundamentally  and  essentially  is  Con- 

123 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

sciousness  a  factor  in  all  we  know  or  can  con- 
ceive of  concerning  a  Soul,  that  if  it  were 
asserted  as  a  fact  that  an  individualized  In- 
telligent Soul  is  but  a  ''Unit  of  Conscious- 
ness," it  would  be  impossible,  from  our  pres- 
ent available  data,  to  disprove  the  assertion. 
Solely  for  the  purpose  of  enabling  us 
to  give  a  simple  and  comprehensible  exposi- 
tion of  such  phases  of  a  Soul  as  are  directly 
involved  in  the  process  of  Independent  Spir- 
itual Unfoldment,  we  have  assumed  the  right 
to  consider  Consciousness  as  an  attribute  of 
a  Soul,  and  not  as  a  Soul  itself. 


IM 


CHAPTER  XIII 


WILL 

A  man,  as  an  individualized  Intelligent 
Soul,  must  preserve  the  perfect  balance  of 
his  account  with  Nature.  To  discharge  this 
fundam.ental  obligation  it  follows  that  he 
must  be  a  "Giver"  as  well  as  a  "Receiver." 
This  necessarily  implies  that  he  shall  possess 
an  attribute  of  the  Soul  specifically  designed 
for  that  particular  purpose.  If  he  is  to  be 
bound  by  the  Law  of  Personal  Responsibil- 
ity to  balance  his  account  with  Nature 
(which  includes  his  fellow  man),  he  must 
possess  a  "Giving"  Attribute,  by  means  of 
which  he  shall  be  able  to  return  to  Nature 
and  his  fellow  man  an  equivalent  for  all  he 
receives  through  his  "Receiving"  Attribute. 

In  the  very  nature  of  things  this  Giving 
Attribute  must  be  the  antithesis  of  his  Re- 
ceiving Attribute. 

From  the  standpoint  of  the  individual  Soul 
it  must  be  "active"  instead  of  "passive." 

125 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

It  must  be  "positive''  and  not  "negative." 

It  must  be  at  the  command  and  under  the 
control  of  an  Individual  Intelligence,  or 
Soul;  not  merely  an  automatic  process  which 
responds  only  to  the  impulses  of  external 
nature. 

It  must  not  only  be  under  the  immediate 
control  of  an  Individual  Intelligence,  but  he 
alone  must  take  the  initiative  in  setting  it  in 
motion.  Otherwise  the  Law  of  Personal  Re- 
sponsibility would  be  infringed. 

It  must  be  a  "Power"  instead  of  a  "Fac- 
ulty," or  "Capacity." 

It  must  be  fundamental  in  its  essential 
nature. 

There  is  such  a  Soul  Attribute.  We  rec- 
ognize it.  We  depend  upon  it  for  all  our 
achievements  in  life.   We  call  it  our  "Will." 

The  Will  is  a  Power  instead  of  a  Faculty: 

In  that  it  is  at  the  command  of,  and  is  ex- 
ercised and  controlled  by  an  individualized 
Intelligence,  or  Soul. 

Because  it  is  the  motive  factor  which  sets 
in  motion  all  the  voluntary  processes  of  in- 
dividual being,  in  all  its  various  depart- 
ments. 

126 


WILL 

It  is  active  for  the  same  reason  that  all 
powers  are  active  when  in  motion. 

We  have  a  term  by  which  we  differentiate 
the  active  state  of  the  Will  from  the  mere 
latent  power  of  Will.  The  "Will  in  action" 
is  known  to  this  School  as  "Volition."  The 
"power  to  act"  we  designate  as  "Will." 

The  Will  is  also  positive,  from  the  stand- 
point of  an  individual.  It  is  the  power  of 
initiative.  It  does  things.  It  is  never  "done," 
except  by  the  subjective  process.  It  moves 
things  intelligently.  It  is  not  automatically 
moved,  so  long  as  it  is  free  from  the  subjec- 
tive influence  of  hypnotic  or  spiritualistic 
control.  In  its  normal  condition  it  is  in  every 
sense  both  active  and  positive,  and  should  be 
independent  from  all  subjection. 

It  is  fundamental  in  that  it  is  the  one 
power  of  a  Soul  upon  which  all  other  powers 
depend. 

We  call  "Reason"  a  power — and  so  it  is. 
At  the  same  time  it  depends  upon  the  Will 
of  an  idividual  to  set  it  in  motion.  We  rea- 
son because  we  Will  to  do  so.  We  cannot  do 
otherwise. 

Under  the  active  impulse  of  the  Will  we 

127 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

set  all  the  voluntary  machinery  of  our  being 
in  motion.  We  thereby  at  once  and  of  neces- 
sity become  centers  of  dynamic  energy  and 
active  force.  But  force,  radiating  from  a 
center,  is  a  movement  outward.  The  very  es- 
sence of  such  a  process  is  an  impulse  or  a 
movement  which  proceeds  from  the  center 
outward.  That  which  proceeds  outward  from 
an  Individual  Intelligence,  or  Soul,  as  a  cen- 
ter, is  the  antithesis  of  "Receiving."  It  is 
the  process  of  "Giving."  This  process  being 
the  result  of  the  active  Will,  the  Will,  there- 
fore, is  a  "Giver." 

In  the  Power  of  an  individual  Will,  we 
have  the  one  single  attribute  of  a  Soul 
which  represents  the  complete  antithesis  of 
Consciousness,  from  a  functional  standpoint. 

Consciousness  is  passive;  Will  is  active. 

Consciousness  is  negative;  Will  is  positive. 

Consciousness  is  impressed  ;  Will  impresses. 

Consciousness  is  acted  upon;  Will  acts. 

Consciousness  receives  impressions;  Will 
gives  impressions. 

Consciousness  is  a  Faculty  (or  Capacity)  ; 
Will  is  a  Power. 

These    two    fundamental    attributes    of    a 

128 


WILL 

Soul  are  the  concomitant  factors  at  the  foun 
dation  of  intelligent  individual  existence. 
They  are  the  special  implements  which  Na- 
ture, or  the  Great  Universal  Intelligence,  has 
put  into  the  possession  of  an  Intelligent  Soul. 
They  constitute  the  "Working  Tools"  with 
which  every  individualized  Intelligent  En- 
tity must  "work  out  its  own  salvation."  These 
are  the  working  tools  with  which  each  of 
us  must  build  "The  Temple  of  Human  Char- 
acter." 

These  must  become  of  profound  interest 
and  consideration  before  we  can  proceed  to 
the  absorbing  task  of  becoming  skilled  arti- 
sans and  expert  wielders  of  our  working 
tools.  For  this  is  the  task  of  every  appren- 
tice, and  until  this  preliminary  schooling  is 
completed  he  can  never  become  a  proficient 
"Temple  Builder."  Just  how  important  it  is 
that  he  become  proficient  in  both  the  science 
and  the  art  of  building,  before  he  assumes  the 
obligations  and  responsibilities  of  a  "Master 
Builder,"  may  be  suggested  by  the  fact  that 
his  very  first  contract  is  for  the  building  of 
his  own  Temple — the  Temple  of  Character — 
wherein  he  must  abide  forever. 

129 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

The  further  we  pursue  our  analysis  of  this 
great  problem  of  Life,  the  more  fascinat- 
ingly interesting  and  wonderful  it  becomes. 
It  is  to  an  Individual's  own  best  interest,  his 
own  greatest  good  and  his  own  largest  pos- 
sibility of  happiness,  both  now  and  in  the 
future  of  this  life,  both  here  and  in  the  Spir- 
itual life,  to  enter  at  once  upon  the  noble  and 
ennobling  task  of  "Living  a  Life"  in  con- 
formity with  Nature's  Constructive  Princi- 
ple, and  never  thereafter  to  falter  until  he 
shall  arrive  at  the  goal  of  individual  Master- 
ship, whether  that  be  in  this  life  or  in  the 
great  hereafter. 


ito 


CHAPTER  XIV 


DESIRE  AND  CHOICE 


"Desire,"  in  its  broad  and  generic  sense, 
represents  a  Soul's  fundamental  search  for 
satisfaction.  It  is  based  upon  a  Soul's  pri- 
mary and  inherent  craving  for  realization. 

In  its  specific  and  determinate  sense.  De- 
sire is  but  a  mode  or  phase  of  Consciousness. 

The  Power  of  Independent  Choice  is  an 
inalienable  right  of  a  Soul.  It  is  as  absolute 
and  indefeasible  upon  the  spiritual  planes  as 
it  is  upon  the  physical  plane.  Men  are  no 
more  compelled  to  obey  the  Law  of  Life 
there  than  they  are  here.  It  is  there,  as  it  is 
here,  a  matter  of  Individual  Choice.  We  all 
know  that  food  is  necessary  to  sustain  phys- 
ical life.  Not  one  of  us  is  compelled  to  take 
it.  We  all  know  that  too  much  food  is  almost 
as  dangerous  to  physical  life  and  health  as 
too  little,  but  we  are  not  compelled  to  stop 
eating  when  the  law  of  health  has  been  com- 
plied with.  These  are  a  matter  of  Individual 

131 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Choice.  While  we  all  know  the  Law  fully 
and  understand  the  exact  meaning  of  its 
penalties,  we  are  nevertheless  able  to  defy  it 
if  we  so  elect. 

The  experience  we  call  physical  hunger  is 
but  a  "craving"  for  something  with  which  to 
satisfy  a  demand  of  a  Soul  for  food,  nour- 
ishment or  supplies  with  which  to  build  up 
and  sustain  its  physical  body.  It  is  a  certain 
definite  phase  or  mode  of  Consciousness.  It 
is  a  conscious  sensation,  the  result  of  a  de- 
mand of  a  Soul  for  satisfaction  along  a  cer- 
tain specific  line.  When  the  body  has  had 
its  needs  supplied,  and  has  received  the  food 
and  nourishment  necessary  to  that  end,  the 
phase  or  mode  of  Consciousness  changes 
from  the  sensation  of  "hunger"  to  that  of 
"satiety,"  or  "satisfaction."  These  two  dis- 
tinct and  differing  sensations  of  a  Soul  are 
but  the  results  of  two  distinct  and  differing 
phases  or  modes  of  Consciousness. 

A  Soul  experiences  the  sense  of  craving 
or  desire  in  all  the  departments  of  individual 
being. 

There  is  the  craving  of  a  Soul  for  phys- 
ical food.   Wc  name  it  "hunger."     It  is  a  de- 

132 


DESIRE  AND  CHOICE 

mand  which  can  be  satisfied  only  upon  the 
plane  of  physical  material.  The  craving  for 
physical  warmth  falls  within  the  same  de- 
partment of  Nature.  It  can  be  satisfied  only 
by  a  physical  process. 

There  are  distinct  cravings  which  tran- 
scend the  plane  of  physical  things.  One  of 
these  is  the  craving  for  spiritual  light,  and  a 
sense  of  the  world  of  spiritual  nature.  This 
cannot  be  satisfied  by  physical  processes.  Its 
gratification  is  possible  only  upon  the  plane 
of  spiritual  material. 

We  experience  the  cravings  and  desires  of 
the  Soul  for  a  knowledge  of  Truth.  But 
Truth  is  not  a  material  thing.  It  is  Nature's 
established  relationship  between  things.  This 
can  be  satisfied  only  by  a  knowledge  of  re- 
lationships. 

The  cravings  of  a  Soul  for  ethical  adjust- 
ment and  intellectual  companionship  are  de- 
mands which  transcend  the  planes  of  ma- 
teriality. These  can  be  satisfied  only  upon 
the  plane  of  the  Soul  itself.  The  highest 
craving  of  a  Soul  is  for  Individual  Comple- 
tion.    Its    satisfaction    demands    the    highest 

133 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

activity  of  a  Soul  which  we  name  "Love." 
Its  ethical  effect  we  name  "Happiness." 

There  are  countless  desires  of  a  Soul  which 
arise  solely  because  of  its  relation  to  physical 
nature.  There  are  countless  others  that  are 
due  entirely  to  its  relation  to  spiritual  na- 
ture. Finally,  there  are  numberless  desires 
of  a  Soul  for  satisfaction  which  can  come 
only  from  its  relation  to  other  Souls,  and 
from  conditions  that  transcend  all  the  realms 
of  materiality,  as  we  know  them. 

These  countless  different  cravings  for  satis- 
faction which  arise  from  a  relation  of  a 
Soul  to  all  the  departments  of  Nature,  phys- 
ical, spiritual  and  psychical,  are  but  so  many 
phases  or  modes  of  Consciousness. 

Taken  together,  these  furnish  to  an  Intel- 
ligent Soul  the  data  of  experience  from 
which  to  determine  its  course  of  action  and 
lines  of  procedure.  These  multifarious  crav- 
ings and  desires  are  of  so  diverse  and  conflict- 
ing a  nature  as  to  impose  upon  a  Soul  the 
necessity  for  a  continuous  and  never-ending 
series  of  individual  selections  or  choices  in 
its  effort  for  Self-Completion,  Individual 
Completion  and  Perfect  Happiness.    A  Soul, 


DESIRE  AND  CHOICE 

in  its  effort  to  conform  to  the  Constructive 
Principle  of  Nature,  must  keep  a  constant 
supervision  of  and  dominion  over  the  many 
conflicting  desires  and  cravings  which  might 
otherwise  impel  it  to  action  along  destruc- 
tive lines. 

A  Soul  is  impelled  by  two  desires  which 
are  of  such  a  nature  that  one  or  the  other 
must  be  controlled  in  order  that  the  other 
may  be  gratified.  One  is  the  desire  for  food 
and  the  other  a  desire  for  spiritual  unfold- 
ment.  The  latter,  in  some  instances,  necessi- 
tates the  use  of  only  certain  foods  and  those 
in  limited  quantities.  Under  those  condi- 
tions, if  a  Soul  should  fully  gratify  its  de- 
sire or  hunger  for  food,  it  must  deny  its  desire 
for  spiritual  unfoldment.  If  it  gratifies  its 
desire  for  spiritual  unfoldment  it  must  deny 
itself  the  satisfaction  it  might  otherwise  de- 
rive from  the  freedom  to  eat  and  drink  ad 
libitum. 

This  situation  of  a  Soul  between  two  con- 
flicting desires  demands  an  intelligent 
Choice.  On  the  basis  of  its  own  greatest  good, 
let  us  say,  a  Soul  elects  to  control  its  appe- 
tite for  physical  food,  and  thereby  satisfy  its 

135 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

desire  for  spiritual  unfoldmcnt.  In  this  proc- 
ess of  selection,  or  choice,  the  Will  is  the 
Power  of  Initiative  that  sets  the  machinery 
of  a  Soul  in  action  and  keeps  it  going  until 
the  chosen  end  has  been  achieved. 

Some  psychologists  would  dismiss  the  en- 
tire subject  with  the  persistent  assertion  that 
an  individual  in  making  his  choice  was 
merely  compelled  by  the  stronger  of  the  two 
desires,  and  that  after  all,  the  Will  was  auto- 
matically governed  by  that  stronger  desire. 

It  is  only  necessary  to  point  out  that  in  this 
instance  there  were  two  Desires.  The  Will 
acted  in  the  line  of  only  one  of  these.  There 
was  at  least  one  of  these  desires  that  did  not 
control  the  action  of  the  Will.  This  proves 
at  least  that  there  are  so?rie  desires  that  do  not 
control  the  Will. 

The  illustration  might  have  been  made  to 
include  as  many  as  fifty  distinct  and  different 
desires,  in  strict  accord  with  human  experi- 
ence, from  which  a  Soul  must  make  its  in- 
telligent Choice.  It  finally  chooses  but  one 
of  these.  It  matters  not  what  may  have  been 
the  motive  which  actuated  that  particular 
choice.    The  important  fact  is  that  forty-nine 

1S6 


DESIRE  AND  CHOICE 

desires  have  been  set  aside,  denied  or  over- 
ruled by  the  Soul. 

If  the  Will  were  an  automatic  instrument 
of  Desire,  it  would  be  compelled  by  the  law 
of  its  relation  to  respond,  in  this  instance,  to 
fifty  different  desires  at  the  same  time  instead 
of  one. 

The  fact  is  that  the  Soul  through  the 
Power  of  Will  alone  disposes  of  the  forty- 
nine  desires  which  it  sets  aside.  The  power 
of  Will  is  the  attribute  of  the  Soul  which  has 
made  the  execution  of  such  a  Choice  possible. 

Desire  has  simply  furnished  the  Intelligent 
Soul  the  necessary  data  from  which  to  make 
a  Choice.  It  has  presented  to  the  intelligence 
fifty  different  modes  or  phases  of  Conscious- 
ness, and  by  the  power  of  Reason  and  the  ex- 
ercise of  Will  the  Soul  has  made  its  selection. 

Many  forceful  illustrations  might  be  given 
to  show  that  by  the  exercise  of  the  power  of 
intelligent  Will  many  dominant  desires 
(which  have  become  so  compelling  that  we 
name  them  "evil  habits")  have  been  brought 
under  subjection  and  finally  eradicated  en- 
tirely. The  desires  for  liquor,  tobacco, 
opium,  etc.,  are  of  this  class. 

137 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

What  is  Desire?  What  function,  if  any, 
does  it  perform  in  the  economy  of  the  indi- 
vidual Soul?  What  relation,  if  any,  docs  it 
sustain  to  the  individual  Will? 

To  those  who  insist  that  the  power  of  Will 
is  the  automatic  instrument  of  Desire,  there 
is  one  way  to  put  the  subject  that  may  help  to 
disclose  their  sophistry.  It  is  this:  The  Will 
(which  all  agree  is  a  Soul's  power  of  initia- 
tive), is  either  an  automatic  instrument  of 
Desire,  or  it  is  not.  In  the  very  nature  of 
things  it  cannot  be  both. 

If  it  is  an  automatic  instrument,  why  hold 
our  fellow  men  and  women  responsible  for 
their  acts  and  conduct?  Why  pride  ourselves 
on  the  assumption  that  we  are  Morally  Ac- 
countable and  Personally  Responsible  for  our 
acts  and  conduct?  There  is  but  one  reply: 
"Because  we  are  obligated  by  the  law  of  our 
being  to  control  our  Desires."  By  what  pow- 
er arc  wc  to  accomplish  that  end?  There 
is  but  one  power  of  an  individual  Soul  by 
which  such  an  obligation  can  be  discharged. 
That  is  by  the  Poicer  of  Will.  We  are  either 
Morally  Accountable  and  Personally  Re- 
sponsible, or  we  arc  not.    We  cannot  be  both. 

ut 


DESIRE  AND  CHOICE 

If  we  are — which  you  will  not  hesitate  to 
admit — then  it  is  only  because  we,  as  individ- 
ualized, Intelligent  Souls,  possess  in  our  own 
right  a  power  by  the  exercise  of  which  we 
may  govern  our  acts  and  conduct,  at  least 
within  certain  limitations.  We  possess  but 
one  such  power.  There  is  but  one.  That  is 
the  power  of  Will.  It  is  only  upon  the  basis 
of  its  supremacy  over  the  emotions,  passions, 
impulses  and  desires,  that  we  become  Person- 
ally Responsible  or  Morally  Accountable  for 
our  actions  and  conduct,  under  the  law  of 
individual  being. 

There  are  those  among  our  psychologists 
who  profess  to  believe  that  Will  is  an  auto- 
matic instrument  of  Desire.  Such  a  conclu- 
sion is  of  vital  and  far-reaching  importance; 
for  if  such  an  assumption  could  be  demon- 
strated as  a  literal  fact  of  Nature  it  would 
carry  with  it  inevitable  results : 

It  would  reduce  man  from  the  status  of  an 
individualized.  Intelligent  Entity  to  that  of 
an  automatic  instrument  under  the  absolute 
domination  and  control  of  his  inherent  De- 
sires. 

It  would  destroy  completely  and  irrevoc- 

139 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

ably  man's  acknowledged  power  of  individ- 
ual Choice. 

It  would  release  man,  as  an  Individual 
Intelligence,  from  the  fundamental  obliga- 
tion upon  which  his  Personal  Responsibility 
and  Moral  Accountability  rest,  and  would 
reduce  him  to  a  status  and  condition  of  abso- 
lute irresponsibility;  for  this  is  the  status  of 
every  automaton. 

It  would  not  only  free  him  from  the  oper- 
ation of  the  law  of  Moral  Accountability, 
but  it  would  at  the  same  time  reduce  him  to 
the  level  of  the  animal. 

It  would  destroy  the  very  foundation  upon 
which  the  principle  at  the  foundation  of  the 
"Freedom  of  Will"  and  the  power  of  "Inde- 
pendent Choice"  depends. 

There  may  be  those  who,  in  their  blind 
folly,  would  be  willing  thus  to  shift  the  bur- 
den of  Moral  Accountability  and  Personal 
Responsibility  upon  Nature,  or  Universal 
Intelligence.  It  is  a  most  convenient  meth- 
od of  finding  an  excuse  for  all  our  evil  pro- 
pensities and  of  relieving  ourselves  from 
responsibility  for  all  our  "sins"  of  both 
"omission"  and  "commission."   But  after  all, 

m 


DESIRE  AND  CHOICE 

it  is  only  an  artful  delusion  and  a  cunning 
snare.  It  is  a  pitiful  effort  of  infantile  in- 
telligence to  throw  the  dust  of  sophistry  in 
the  searching  eyes  of  Conscience.  It  must  in- 
evitably fail.  When  it  does,  the  individual 
who  has  sought  to  reach  the  haven  of  eternal 
peace  in  such  a  craft  will  find  himself  far 
from  shore  and  his  frail  and  punctured  bark 
helplessly  drifting  toward  the  troubled 
waters. 

The  position  of  the  Great  School  of  the 
Masters  is  unequivocal  on  this  subject.  It 
holds,  without  equivocation  or  mental  reser- 
vation, that  we  are  charged  with  the  funda- 
mental obligation  of  Personal  Responsibility 
and  Moral  Accountability,  within  the  limi- 
tations elucidated.  It  holds  that  this  is  be- 
cause we  are  something  more  than  automa- 
tons under  the  dominion  and  control  of  in- 
herent Desires. 

To  its  own  entire  satisfaction  it  has  demon- 
strated that  Desire,  in  its  generic  sense,  is  the 
fundamental  cravings  of  a  Soul  for  satisfac- 
tion; and  in  its  determinate  sense  it  is  a  phase 
or  mode  of  Consciousness.  In  this  deter- 
minate  sense   all   the   varying   desires   of   a 

141 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Soul   arc  but  so   many  differing   phases  or 
modes  of  Consciousness. 

The  most  exalted  phase  or  mode  of  Con- 
sciousness is  the  desire  of  a  Soul  for  Individ- 
ual Completion.  Its  satisfaction  involves  the 
highest  activity  of  a  Soul,  which  is  Love. 
Its    complete   satisfaction   we   call   "Happi- 


14i 


CHAPTER  XV 


KNOWLEDGE 


Man's  permanent  income  is  Knowledge 
through  experience. 

Knowledge  is  a  Soul's  awareness  and  un- 
derstanding of  Facts  of  Nature. 

A  Soul  must  first  realize  its  need  of 
Knowledge  before  it  is  in  an  attitude  or  a 
condition  to  assimilate  it  or  appropriate  it 
to  its  legitimate  purposes. 

Through  education  as  to  the  Laws,  Prin- 
ciples, Forces,  Activities  and  Processes  of 
Mechanical  Nature  man  obtains  the  founda- 
tion of  Knowledge  which  enables  him  to 
understand,  appreciate  and  rightly  apply 
that  knowledge  under  the  Moral  Law. 

Knowledge  gained  from  the  mechanical 
processes  of  Nature  provides  a  great  benefi- 
cence when  used  constructively. 

This  knowledge  helps  man  to  evolve  to  a 
point  where  he  is   able   to   understand   the 

148 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Moral  Law  and  appreciate  his  responsibility 
under  it. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  natural  law,  in 
their  relation  to  man  as  an  Individual  In- 
telligence. Wc  call  one  of  these  ''Mechan- 
ical" and  the  other  "Moral." 

Mechanical  Laws  of  Nature,  are  that  de- 
partment of  Natural  Law  which  has  to  do 
with  the  forces  and  activities  of  material 
substance,  and  not  with  the  relations  between 
Individualized  Human  Intelligences. 

The  Moral  Law  of  Nature  has  nothing  to 
do  with  the  forces  and  activities  below  the 
level  of  Individualized  Human  Intelligence; 
that  is  below  only  in  the  sense  of  refinement. 

An  individual  should  not  look  upon  un- 
pleasant temporary  experiences  under  the 
Mechanical  Laws,  in  the  process  of  getting 
knowledge,  as  punishments,  or  penalties,  but 
rather  as  the  only  means  of  acquiring  a  good 
share  of  knowledge  which  men  must  have  to 
enable  them  to  improve  themselves  under  the 
Moral  Law  and  thereby  enlarge  their  ca- 
pacities for  personal  enjoyments  and  Hap- 
piness. 

The  knowledge  acquired  from  Mechanical 

144 


KNOWLEDGE 

Nature  must  be  regarded  as  a  reward  for 
suffering  and  hardships  in  getting  it,  and  not 
as  a  penalty  for  the  desire  which  impels  the 
search  for  it. 

Man's  responsibility  is  based  upon  the 
"Moral  Order  of  Nature,"  or  upon  the 
''Moral  Law."  The  measure  of  personal  re- 
sponsibility is  "Knowledge  of  the  Moral 
Law."  Knowledge  is  the  basis  of  responsibil- 
ity, and  its  measure  is  the  amount  of  Knowl- 
edge possessed  by  the  individual  human,  at 
any  given  time.  It  will  be  noted  that  there 
is  no  differentiation  in  this  as  to  the  kind  of 
knowledge. 

An  individual  is  walking  through  intense 
physical  darkness  over  ground  with  which 
he  is  not  familiar.  He  is  ignorant  of  what  is 
ahead  of  him.  Because  of  his  ignorance  and 
unfamiliarity  with  his  surroundings;  because 
of  his  lack  of  knowledge,  he  steps  over  the 
brink  of  a  perpendicular  cliff  and  falls  a  dis- 
tance of  fifty  feet,  suffering  a  broken  arm, 
and  all  the  physical  pain  and  inconvenience 
incident  thereto. 

If  these  are  to  be  regarded  as  "Nature's 
punishments,  or  penalties"  against  him,  they 

145 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

are  based  upon,  or  due  to,  his  lack  of  knowl- 
edge, or  his  ignorance.  This  seems  to  con- 
tradict the  statement  that  his  punishment  is 
based  upon  his  Knowledge,  and  its  measure 
upon  the  degree  or  amount  of  his  knowledge. 
It  was  due  to  his  ignorance,  and  its  measure 
upon  the  degree  of  his  ignorance. 

Suppose  an  individual  were  experimenting 
with  a  number  of  chemicals,  of  whose  prop- 
erties he  was  ignorant,  but  of  which  he  was 
endeavoring  to  acquire  definite  knowledge. 
Suddenly  there  is  a  chemical  explosion  that 
blows  up  through  the  sky-light,  burns  his  face 
and  hands,  and  cripples  him.  This  is  another 
case  of  ignorance.  If  his  suffering  and  shock 
are  to  be  regarded  as  a  penalty,  then  the  only 
way  we  can  regard  it,  from  that  angle,  is  that 
the  penalty  is  based  upon  his  lack  of  knowl- 
edge or  his  ignorance. 

An  intelligent  man  has  evolved  to  a  point 
where  he  recognizes  and  understands  the  fact 
that  Morality  is  as  much  a  Law  of  Nature 
as  is  the  Law  of  Gravity.  He  knows  that  he 
is  bound  by  it.  He  knows  that,  under  it,  he 
is  personally  responsible  to  live  his  life  in 
such  manner  as  to  exemplify  the  full  meas- 


KNOWLEDGE 

ure  of  his  knowledge  of  morality  which  has 
to  do  with  his  relations  to  his  fellowman. 
Suppose  he  goes  to  his  neighbor's,  robs  the 
house  of  many  valuable  things  which  he 
knows  are  not  his,  and  appropriates  them  to 
himself.  He  sells  them,  and  uses  the  money 
thereby  obtained. 

He  knows  all  the  while  that  the  Moral 
Law  (The  Law  of  Compensation)  holds  him 
guilty  of  a  deliberate  violation  of  his  personal 
responsibility;  and  that  sometime,  some- 
where, and  in  some  ivay,  he  is  bound  to  pay, 
and  pay  in  full  for  this  wrong. 

He  knows  that,  under  the  Moral  Law,  he 
is  bound  because  he  knew  the  Law,  and  de- 
liberately violated  it.  It  was  his  knowledge 
of  the  law,  in  this  case,  that  made  him  guilty, 
and  it  was  the  amount,  or  degree  of  his 
knowledge  that  determines  the  penalty. 

Immediately  the  question  arises:  Why  is 
one  punished,  in  this  case,  because  of  his 
knowledge,  and  in  the  other  because  of  his 
lack  of  knowledge,  or  because  of  his  ignor- 
ance? 

If  we  go  deeper  in  our  study  of  Nature's 
Laws,  we  find  a  perfectly  consistent  reason 

147 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

for  this  seeming  inconsistency,  and  that  it  is 
only  seeming,  and  not  real. 

The  Laws  of  Nature  which  govern  the 
chemical  elements,  forces  and  activities  of 
Substance,  are  Mechanical.  The  Law,  which 
produces  the  unexpected  explosion,  is  a 
Law  of  Mechanical  Nature. 

The  Law  which  holds  the  thief  responsible 
to  his  neighbor  from  whom  he  stole,  is  a 
Moral  Law. 

The  explosion  did  not  have  any  direct  rela- 
tion to  Morality,  or  the  relations  between  hu- 
man Intelligences.  But  it  did  have  a  pur- 
pose to  conserve  in  the  development  of  the 
intelligence  of  the  individual  who  unwitting- 
ly brought  about  the  explosion;  and  through 
him  it  T?iay  have  an  effect  upon  others. 

It  gave  him  an  item  of  information,  or 
useful  Knowledge.  It  taught  him  never  again 
to  mix  the  same  chemical  compound,  and 
thus  produce  another  like  explosion,  with- 
out first  guarding  himself  against  its  destruc- 
tive effects  upon  himself.  By  giving  that  in- 
formation to  others  he  may  save  them  from 
suffering. 

By  mixing  a  different  chemical  compound, 

148 


KNOWLEDGE 

he  may  produce  another  but  a  different  ex- 
plosion. From  this  also  he  will  obtain  an- 
other item  of  chemical  knowledge. 

By  mixing  a  different  chemical  compound 
from  either,  or  both  of  the  other  two,  he  may 
produce  a  cure  for  the  burns  he  suffered  from 
the  two  explosions.  From  this  he  obtains  still 
another  item  of  useful  Knowledge;  and  so 
on  ad  infinitum. 

He  may  go  on  acquiring  knowledge  of  the 
mechanical  operation  of  Natural  Laws,  un- 
til he  has  acquired  a  personal  knowledge, 
through  personal  experience,  of  all  the  Laws, 
forces  and  activities  of  Nature  governing 
purely  physical  substances. 

Within  themselves,  these  conserve  no  pur- 
pose in  his  individual  life,  other  than  to  give 
him  a  fund  of  knowledge,  from  which  he 
may  benefit  or  harm  himself,  or  others,  or 
both. 

Here  the  Moral  Law  presents  itself.  It 
says  to  him:  "It  is  all  right  for  you  to  get 
knowledge,  and  also  to  increase  it  as  far  as 
you  can ;  but  you  must,  at  the  same  time,  re- 
member that  you  dare  not  use  that  knowledge 
in  such  manner  as  to  injure  yourself  or  your 

149 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

fellowman — without,  at  the  same  time  and  as 
a  result  thereof  —  violating  My  Moral  law, 
and  incurring  the  penalties  thereof." 

It  requires  knowledge  on  the  part  of  the 
individual  to  locate  and  determine  the  line  of 
demarcation  which  marks  the  boundaries  of 
the  Constructive  process  and  differentiates 
this  from  the  Destructive.  Not  only  this,  it 
requires  the  most  exact  and  definite  knowl- 
edge. Such  knowledge  can  be  obtained  only 
by  personal  experience.  It  comes  only  as  the 
result  of  experiment  and  demonstration. 

An  individual  may  possess  a  wealth  of 
knowledge  which  he  does  not  intelligently 
apply  to  any  purpose  whatever.  Or  he  may 
possess  the  same  knowledge  and  intelligently 
apply  but  a  mere  fraction  of  it  to  the  accom- 
plishment of  moral  purposes.  He  may,  in 
like  manner,  possess  vast  knowledge  and  in- 
telligently apply  the  whole  of  it  to  the  accom- 
plishment of  vicious  and  immoral  purposes. 
In  each  of  these  cases,  even  though  he  pos- 
sesses great  knowledge  and  fine  intelligence, 
he  would  nevertheless  represent  a  low  order 
of  spiritual  development,  and  would  gravi- 


KNOWLEDGE 

tate  to  the  spiritual  plane  corresponding 
thereto. 

Intelligence,  morality  and  knowledge  are 
all  essential  elements  of  spiritual  growth  and 
developrhent ;  it  requires  the  three  in  relative 
combination  in  the  life  of  an  individual  to 
determine  his  spiritual  gravity. 

Spiritual  development  does  not  consist  of 
intellectual  development  alone,  although  in- 
telligence is  a  primary  and  fundamental  ele- 
ment of  it.  Neither  does  it  consist  of  moral 
development  alone,  although  morality  is  a 
basic  and  necessary  principle  involved  in  it. 
Nor  does  it  consist  in  the  acquisition  of 
Knowledge  alone,  although  Knowledge  is  an 
important  and  indispensable  ingredient  of  it. 

It  involves  all  these  elements  with  some- 
thing added.  The  spiritual  development  of 
an  individual  is  measured  by  the  Intelligence 
with  which  he  applies  his  Knowledge  to  the 
accomplishment  of  moral  purposes. 

It  is  an  established  and  accepted  rule  or 
principle  of  Ethics  that  knowledge  is  an  es- 
sential element  and  factor  at  the  foundation 
cf  Moral  Accountability  and  Personal  Re- 
sponsibility.   There  can  be  no  such  thing  as 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Moral  Accountability  or  Personal  Responsi- 
bility without  knowledge.  Under  the  Great 
Law  men  and  women  are  morally  account- 
able and  personally  responsible  for  their  acts 
and  conduct,  to  the  full  limit  of  their  individ- 
ual knowledge,  other  things  being  equal.  But 
the  law  does  not  bind  them  nor  hold  them 
morally  accountable  nor  personally  responsi- 
ble beyond  that  limit. 

The  Moral  Accountability  and  Personal 
Responsibility  of  an  individual,  at  any  given 
time,  depend  upon  the  amount  of  knowledge 
he  possesses,  other  considerations  being  equal. 
The  less  the  amount  of  knowledge  an  indi- 
vidual possesses,  the  less  are  his  Moral  Ac- 
countability and  Personal  Responsibility 
under  the  great  law  of  Spiritual  Unfoldment. 
The  greater  the  amount  of  his  knowledge,  the 
larger  his  Moral  Accountability  and  the 
greater  his  Personal  Responsibility.  The  de- 
gree of  his  knowledge  measures  the  degree  of 
his  Moral  Accountability  and  Personal  Re- 
sponsibility, other  things  being  equal. 

A  child,  too  young  to  understand  or  appre- 
ciate the  meaning  of  its  act,  takes  and  appro- 
priates  to   itself   that   which   belongs   to   an- 

152 


KNOWLEDGE 

other.  It  does  not  commit  a  crime  thereby, 
nor  does  it  in  any  manner  or  degree  violate 
the  principle  of  Moral  Accountability  or 
Personal  Responsibility.  A  man  of  mature 
intelligence,  in  full  possession  of  all  his  facul- 
ties, capacities  and  powers,  does  the  same 
thing.  He  thereby  commits  the  crime  of 
theft.  He  violates  the  law  of  Moral  Account- 
ability and  Personal  Responsibility.  Why? 
Because  he  knows  better.  He  has  the  neces- 
sary knowledge.  The  one  is  bound  by  the 
law.  The  other  is  not.  The  one  is  bound  be- 
cause of  his  knowledge.  The  other  is  exempt 
because  of  its  lack  of  knowledge.  Other 
things  being  equal,  knowledge  alone  deter- 
mines the  existence,  as  well  as  the  degree,  of 
Moral  Accountability  and  Personal  Respon- 
sibility. 

Knowledge  depends  upon  Consciousness. 
Consciousness  is  the  foundation  and  support 
of  all  knowledge.  Without  Consciousness 
there  can  be  no  such  thing  as  knowledge. 

Moral  Accountability  and  Personal  Re- 
sponsibility, in  their  final  analysis,  also  de- 
pend upon  Consciousness;  and  the  degree  of 
Consciousness  determines  the  extent  to  which 

153 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

an  Individual  Intelligence  or  Soul  is  mor- 
ally accountable  and  personally  responsible 
at  any  given  time,  other  things  being  equal. 
Consciousness  is  at  the  foundation  of  Knowl- 
edge. Knowledge  is  an  essential  factor  at  the 
very  foundation  of  Moral  Accountability. 
Moral  Accountability  is  at  the  foundation  of 
Constructive  Spirituality.  Constructive  Spir- 
ituality is  at  the  foundation  of  Spiritual  Inde- 
pendence and  Mastership. 

Ergo:  Consciousness,  in  its  final  analysis, 
is  the  substantial  basis  of  Spiritual  Independ- 
ence and  Mastership. 


u» 


CHAPTER  XVI 


POSSESSIONS 


In  an  exact  and  scientific  sense,  the  only 
things  we  are  legitimately  entitled  to  say  we 
''possess,"  are  those  things  over  which  Na- 
ture, or  the  Great  Intelligence,  has  given  us 
direct,  immediate,  continuous  and  individual 
dominion  and  power,  as  a  result  of  our  own 
inherent  necessities  as  individualized  Intelli- 
gences. 

As  an  Individual  Intelligence,  or  Soul, 
every  human  being  enters  upon  the  business 
of  this  life  with  the  following  possessions 
which  constitute  his  stock  in  trade: 

1  physical  body, 

1  spiritual  body, 

1  Consciousness, 

1  Will, 

1  full  set  of  appetites,  passions,  emotions, 
desires,  impulses,  ambitions  and  aspirations. 

With  this  equipment  and  invoice  of  stock 
he  enters  upon  the  business  of  life  which, 

155 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

from  the  standpoint  of  a  Soul,  is  that  of  ac- 
cumulating experience  and  enlarging  his 
store  of  knowledge. 

As  an  individualized,  Intelligent  Soul,  each 
human  being  actually  and  literally  "pos- 
sesses" only  those  things  with  which  Nature 
or  Universal  Intelligence,  has  invested  and 
endowed  him  in  order  that  he  may  express 
himself  as  such. 

From  the  very  first  moment,  he  begins  to 
"get  ahead";  for  he  begins  to  have  experi- 
ences. Every  one  of  these  brings  to  him  an 
item  of  knowledge.  There  comes  a  time  when 
the  physical  body  reaches  its  limit  of  growth, 
hut  the  growth  of  a  Soul  in  knowledge  and 
experience  never  ceases,  so  far  as  we  know. 

His  permanent  income  is  knowledge  and 
experience.  This  constitutes  his  "increment." 
It  is  not  an  "unearned  increment,"  concern- 
ing which  we  hear  so  much  in  economics. 
Under  the  Law  of  Compensation  he  has  paid 
for  it  all  a  just  equivalent.  Knowledge  comes 
to  an  individual  only  as  the  result  of  Per- 
sonal Eflfort.  Every  item  must  be,  and  is, 
paid  for  by  his  own  personal  effort,  either 
physical,  spiritual,  mental  or  moral.   For  this 

156 


POSSESSIONS 

reason  it  becomes  his  earned  increment.  At 
the  same  time  it  becomes  a  permanent  posses- 
sion. Having  compensated  for  it,  paid  for  it, 
and  earned  it  by  his  own  personal  effort,  it  is 
his  of  right  under  the  law  of  his  being.  It  is 
a  possession  of  which  he  can  never  divest 
himself,  and  it  goes  on  increasing  to  the  end 
of  his  physical  life,  and  throughout  all  the 
spiritual  lives  that  lie  beyond,  so  far  as  we 
know.  This  is  individual  progression,  indi- 
vidual evolution. 

Rectitude  of  character,  virtue,  knowledge 
and  wisdom  are  mere  germs  of  possibility 
within  a  Soul.  They  have  to  be  grown  as 
the  grain  of  wheat  must  be  grown  in  order 
that  they  may  reproduce  themselves.  It  is  in 
the  process  of  their  growth  that  their  equiva- 
lent in  Personal  Effort  is  expended.  Virtue 
never  grew  and  matured  into  a  permanent 
possession  of  any  Soul,  except  as  compensa- 
tion for  the  strivings  of  that  Soul  for  better 
things.  Knowledge  and  wisdom  never  thrust 
themselves  gratuitously  upon  any  man.  Some 
time,  somewhere,  he  has  paid  their  full  price 
in  Personal  Effort.  They  have  come  to  him 
only  as  compensation  for  the  energy  he  has 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

spent  in  his  struggle  upward  into  the  light  of 
Truth.  There  is  no  achievement,  in  the  realm 
of  a  Soul,  without  Personal  Effort.  Labor  is 
the  true  measure  of  all  Soul  values. 

In  recognition  of  the  great  fundamental 
principle  which  underlies  all  individual  un- 
foldment  and  growth  of  a  Soul,  one  of  the 
Great  Masters  has  named  this  "The  School 
of  Personal  Effort."  With  equal  justice  an- 
other has  named  it  "The  School  of  Compen- 
sation." A  third  sees  it  as  "The  Great  School 
of  Natural  Science."  All  of  these  are  correct; 
for  The  Great  School  of  Natural  Science  is 
the  Great  School  of  Nature  wherein  the 
Law  of  Compensation  is  acknowledged  and 
the  standard  of  values  is  Personal  Effort. 

Knowledge  and  Wisdom  and  Experience 
are  the  earned  increment  of  a  Soul.  The 
very  law  of  their  nature  makes  of  them  an  in- 
defeasible possession  of  a  Soul.  They  are 
the  results  which  accrue  to  man  as  the  reward 
of  his  efforts  in  the  right  use  of  his  original 
stock.  Unlike  material  possessions,  he  may 
give  them  to  others  in  unlimited  measure 
without  in  the  least  diminishing  their  amount 
within    his    own    possession.     The    more    he 

15t 


POSSESSIONS 

gives  the  larger  becomes  his  stock  from  which 
to  give,  ad  infinitum. 

The  man  w^ho  gives  to  his  neighbor  half  of 
all  the  wheat  he  possesses,  thereby  reduces  his 
own  stock  of  wheat  one-half;  but  the  man 
who  gives  from  his  stock  of  knowledge  only 
increases  it  by  adding  to  it  the  knowledge 
which  comes  to  him  as  a  result  of  the  Per- 
sonal Effort  of  giving.  Thus  the  earned  in- 
crement of  a  Soul  is  that  which  no  man  can 
afford  to  withhold  from  those  who  are  duly 
and  truly  prepared,  worthy  and  well  quali- 
fied to  receive  it. 

Herein  arises  another  important  phase  of 
the  Great  Law: 

He  who  possesses  knowledge  or  wisdom 
or  power  is  likewise  charged  with  the  re- 
sponsibility of  rightly  using  it. 

These  things  cannot  be  held  as  individual 
possessions  for  purely  selfish  gratification. 
They  must  be  used.  Moreover,  the  Law  of 
Compensation  is  not  satisfied  by  simple  use. 
They  are  intelligent  possessions.  They  must 
therefore  be  used  intelligently.  This  means 
that  they  must  be  used  for  the  highest  good. 

Each  human  being,  as  an  individualized 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Intelligence,  or  Soul,  "possesses"  a  physical 
body;  but  he  does  not  "possess"  the  clothes 
with  which  he  covers  it,  nor  the  house  within 
which  he  shelters  it.  We  "possess"  our  own 
feet,  but  we  do  not  "possess"  the  shoes  in 
which  we  dress  them.  As  Individual  Intelli- 
gences we  all  "possess"  the  faculty  of  Con- 
sciousness, but  we  do  not  "possess"  the  mate- 
rial things  of  earth  which  impress  themselves 
upon  that  faculty  of  the  Soul.  We  "possess" 
the  impressions  of  these  things  but  not  the 
things  themselves.  Each  one  of  us  "possesses" 
a  Will,  but  we  do  not  "possess"  the  things  of 
earth  nor  of  the  material  universe  which,  act- 
ing upon  the  faculty  of  Consciousness,  fur- 
nish the  motive  and  the  impulse  for  our  exer- 
cise of  that  wonderful  power  of  Will.  We 
"possess"  the  Soul  Attributes  which,  in  them- 
selves alone,  distinguish  us  from  all  the 
rounds  of  animal  life  below  us;  but  we  do  not 
"possess"  the  earth  whereon  we  temporarily 
abide,  nor  any  part  of  it  save  that  almost  in- 
finitesimal fraction  of  it  which  constitutes  our 
present  physical  bodies. 

The  ancient  Latins,  from  whom  our  word 
"possess"  comes  down  to  us,  had  a  somewhat 

160 


POSSESSIONS 

more  accurate  conception  of  the  principle 
under  consideration  than  we  of  today  have. 
Our  word,  reduced  to  Latin,  is  a  compound 
of  the  two  Latin  words,  'To,"  meaning 
"power,"  and  "Sidere,"  meaning  "to  sit 
upon."  The  Latin  meaning  of  "possess"  was 
and  is  "The  Power  to  sit  upon." 

The  Latins  employed  the  term  "posidere" 
in  a  strictly  literal  sense.  They  applied  it 
more  especially  to  what  we  of  today  would 
understand  as  "Real  Estate  rights  and  titles," 
or  rights  and  interests  in  lands.  To  them  it 
was  held  to  be  lawful  for  a  "Free  Man"  to 
own  and  hold  as  much  land  as  he  had  the 
"power  to  sit  upon,"  but  no  more.  With  them 
it  was  literally  a  matter  of  "power";  for,  in 
order  to  hold  a  land  estate,  an  individual  was 
compelled,  whenever  called  upon  by  his 
neighbors  for  that  purpose,  to  demonstrate 
his  ability  to  "sit  upon"  all  the  estates  to 
which  he  laid  claim.  He  must  prove  his  abil- 
ity or  his  power  to  prevent  all  others — more 
especially  his  feudal  enemies — from  settling 
upon  ("sitting  upon")   any  part  of  it. 

Our  still  more  ancient  Brothers,  from 
whom  the  Latins  received  their  concept  of 


rUV.  GREAT  WORK 

material  "ownership"  and  "possession,"  had 
a  far  more  just  and  accurate  understanding 
of  the  fundamental  principle  under  consid- 
eration. The  term  they  used,  if  translated 
into  English,  would  mean  "to  make  a  part  of 
one's  self." 

This  is  an  almost  literal  expression  of  the 
principle  outlined.  The  things  we  "possess" 
are  those  which  we  are  able  to  appropriate 
and  employ  in  a  definite  and  personal  sense. 
Literally  it  means  that  the  things  we  "pos- 
sess" are  those  only  which,  taken  together, 
constitute  each  one  of  us  what  we  are — an  in- 
dividualized. Intelligent  Ego,  Soul,  or 
Entity — an  individual  human  being,  a  man 
or  a  woman. 

This  is  the  true  psychological  concept  back 
of  all  "possessions."  However  much  we  may 
try,  it  is  impossible  for  us  literally  to  "pos- 
sess" any  part  or  parcel  of  the  great  universe 
of  material  things  outside  the  limits  of  our 
own  individual,  organic  constitutions,  phys- 
ical, spiritual  and  psychical;  that  is,  outside 
our  essential  selves.  We  may  assume  an  ex- 
clusive character  of  jurisdiction  over,  and 
control  of,  a  considerable  part  of  the  material 

162 


POSSESSIONS 

universe  outside  of  us.  Indeed,  it  would  seem 
that  this  constitutes  the  principal  occupation 
of  a  very  large  majority  of  all  mankind, 
women  as  well  as  men.  In  so  far  as  we  are 
successful  in  our  efforts  along  this  line  of  en- 
deavor, we  may  even  deprive  the  rest  of  man- 
kind of  its  use  as  well  as  of  any  and  all  ma- 
terial benefits  which  might  otherwise  flow 
from  it. 

It  matters  not  how  much  of  the  material 
universe  we  may  be  able  to  exercise  jurisdic- 
tion over  or  control  of,  we  can  never  "pos- 
sess" it,  any  more  than  we  can  possess  that 
part  of  the  atmosphere  we  do  not  breathe  into 
our  lungs,  or  that  part  of  the  ocean  we  do  not 
absorb  into  our  physical  organisn;s  and 
thereby  make  an  essential  part  of  us. 

This  view  of  life  reduces  our  real  pos- 
sessions to  a  simple  and  normal  basis.  At 
the  same  time  it  removes  from  the  pathway 
of  our  higher  endeavors,  and  from  the  neces- 
sity for  undue  consideration,  the  vast  universe 
of  grossly  material  "Things"  over  which  men 
and  women,  the  world  over,  are  forever 
breaking  their  hearts  and  destroying  their 
lives  in  their  vain  and  fruitless  efforts  to  es- 

163 


THi:  C^RKAT  WORK 

tablish  a  character  of  "ownership"  or  "pos- 
session" which  their  fellows  will  permit  them 
to  exercise  without  protest  or  hindrance. 

Under  the  "Principle  of  Use,"  every  indi- 
vidual is  obligated  by  the  law  of  individual 
being  to  make  active  and  beneficent  use  of  all 
his  possessions.  Under  its  operation  no  man 
is  entitled  to  that  which  he  does  not  or  cannot 
use. 

An  intelligent  analysis  and  study  of  this 
principle  in  its  relation  to  our  real  possessions 
will  disclose  the  startling  fact  that  there  is 
not  one  of  us  but  possesses  far  more  than  he 
justly  deserves  when  judged  by  the  standards 
of  men. 

Each  one  of  us  possesses  a  physical  body. 
We  also  possess  a  spiritual  body,  though  some 
of  us  are  not  yet  wise  enough  to  know  that 
fact.  \Vc  likewise  possess  all  the  Faculties, 
Capacities,  and  Powers  of  an  individualized, 
Intelligent  Soul.  These  are  all  "gifts"  to  us 
from  Nature,  or  from  the  Universal  Intelli- 
gence that  is  back  of  Nature. 

It  is  impossible  to  conceive  of  the  idea  that 
all  these  were  given  to  us  for  no  purpose. 
Every   sane   and   intelligent   individual   will 

164 


POSSESSIONS 

recognize  the  fact  that  we  are  invested  and 
endowed  with  these  transcendent  possessions 
of  Soul  for  a  purpose.  Primarily  there  can 
be  found  but  just  one  purpose  and  that  is 
"Use."  This  means  "Right  Use,"  because 
the  entire  evolutionary  principle  of  Nature 
rests  upon  the  use  of  individual  faculties,  ca- 
pacities and  powers  in  such  manner  as  to  con- 
form to  the  Constructive  Principle  of  Nature 
in  Individual  Life. 

Under  this  law  of  evolution  each  one  of  us 
is  bound  by  the  most  exalted  obligation  that 
could  be  fixed  upon  us: 

To  make  use  of  all  our  faculties,  capacities 
and  powers. 

To  make  a  right  use  of  them,  in  such  man- 
ner as  to  conform  our  lives  to  the  Construct- 
ive Principle  of  Nature. 

To  do  this  to  the  full  limit  of  our  own  indi- 
vidual abilities. 

To  do  it  all  the  time. 

Let  every  individual  take  these  proposi- 
tions home  with  him,  think  over  them,  an- 
alyze them,  ponder  them,  live  with  them 
until  he  has  made  their  acquaintance.  If  he 
is  honest  with  himself  he  will  turn  from  mel- 

165 


Tin:  (iRLAT  WORK 

ancholy  martyrdom  and  ackn(3wledgc  his 
indebtedness  and  gratitude  to  Nature,  or  to 
Nature's  God,  for  all  the  transcendent  pos- 
sessions of  a  Soul  which  he  has  never 
earned,  never  rightly  used,  and  according  to 
our  human  standards  of  judgment  never 
deserved. 

No  honest  and  intelligent  man  can  dwell 
long  upon  the  problem  without  discovering: 

That  he  possesses  faculties,  capacities  and 
powers  lihich  he  does  not  rightly  use. 

That  many  of  these  he  deliberately  and  in- 
tentionally misuses,  times  without  number. 

That  he  seldom,  if  ever,  employs  them 
rightly  to  the  full  limit  of  their  capacity. 

That  tnuch  of  the  time  he  does  not  employ 
them  at  all. 

In  the  face  of  these  facts  but  one  conclu- 
sion is  possible,  that  every  intelligent  human 
being  possesses  vastly  more  than  he  deserves, 
if  the  problem  be  determined  according  to 
the  standards  of  men.  This  is  the  stand- 
ard by  which  we  assume  to  pass  judgment 
upon  our  fclhnv  men  in  all  the  affairs  of  this 
earthly  life.  \Vc  do  not  hesitate  an  instant 
to  declare   that   the   man   who   controls   vast 

166 


POSSESSIONS 

wealth  or  large  estates  does  not  deserve  them 
unless  he  puts  them  to  their  proper  and  legit- 
imate use.  All  men  sustain  us  in  this  position, 
thus  not  only  recognizing  but  declaring  the 
evolutionary  principle  of  "Right  Use." 

The  psychological  value  and  importance 
of  all  this  is  the  point  upon  which  it  is  de- 
sired to  place  special  emphasis.  To  those  who 
are  able  to  look  beyond  the  limitations  of 
physical  nature  into  the  realm  of  the  spiritual 
the  subject  does  not  require  emphasis,  for  in 
that  life  the  Law  of  Use  expresses  itself  in 
definite  results  which  cannot  be  mistaken  nor 
misinterpreted. 

The  student  who  has  once  entered  intelli- 
gently upon  the  definite  task  of  Independent 
Spiritual  and  Psychical  Unfoldment  will 
find  his  work  greatly  facilitated  by  a  clear 
understanding  and  a  due  appreciation  of  the 
important  facts: 

He  is  not  a  mere  physical  body  and,  as 
such,  "possessing"  a  Soul.  He  is  an  intelli- 
gent Soul,  and  as  such  he  "possesses"  a  phys- 
ical body  whose  only  apparent  purpose  is  to 
enable  him  to  express  himself  upon  the  plane 
of  physical  life  and  action.     In  this  view  of 

167 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

life  the  body  is  a  mere  instrument  of  a  Soul, 
and  not  its  Master. 

This  will  change  his  entire  attitude  toward 
himself  as  an  Individual  Intelligence,  and 
toward  the  subject  of  this  life  in  all  its  im- 
portant bearings.  It  will  impel  him  to  place 
a  radically  different  value  on  the  purely  ma- 
terial things  of  this  physical  life,  over  which 
otherwise  intelligent  men  and  women  of  all 
nations,  all  peoples  and  all  times  have  broken 
their  hearts  and  destroyed  their  lives  without 
avail,  and  are  today  doing  the  same  thing 
over  again. 

As  an  intelligent  Soul  with  but  a  tempo- 
rary physical  body,  the  only  fractional  part 
of  this  physical  universe  he  can  ever  appro- 
priate to  himself  in  such  manner  as  to  "pos- 
sess" it,  is  just  enough  material  food  to  re- 
plenish and  sustain  the  physical  body,  just 
enough  clothing  to  protect  it  in  comfort 
against  the  chilling  blasts  of  winter  and  dec- 
orate it  to  meet  the  requirements  of  his 
esthetic  tastes,  and  sufficient  shelter  to  protect 
it  from  the  inclement  elements  of  physical 
nature. 

Everything  else  is  not  only  useless  but  im- 

168 


POSSESSIONS 

measurably  worse  than  useless  to  the  individ- 
ual who  spends  his  life  in  trying  to  "possess" 
it  to  the  exclusion  of  the  remainder  of  hu- 
manity. It  is  worse  than  useless  because 
every  ounce  of  this  physical  world  he  fastens 
upon  the  Soul  (and  for  which  he  has  no 
actual  use  or  need),  is  only  an  incumbrance 
which  binds  the  Soul  to  earth  and  holds  it 
there  with  a  power  which  only  time  and  per- 
sonal effort  can  ever  break  or  overcome. 

One  by  one  a  Soul  must  be  willing  to  part 
with  all  the  material  treasures  of  earth,  be- 
fore it  is  possible  for  it  to  rise  above  the 
shadow-land  of  earth  and  find  enjoyments  in 
the  realms  of  Spiritual  Life  and  Light. 

When  an  Intelligent  Soul  has  slipped  its 
physical  bonds  and  put  aside  its  earthly  in- 
strument, the  physical  body,  its  need  of  phys- 
ical food,  physical  clothing  and  physical  shel- 
ter no  longer  exists.  And  if  an  individual 
has  lived  his  life  rightly  in  relation  to  these 
things  he  will  no  longer  care  for  them.  He 
will  lay  them  down  with  a  realization  that 
they  have  served  their  purpose  and  that 
thenceforth  he  enters  upon  a  finer  life  in  the 
midst  of  finer  conditions  where  only  finer  in- 

169 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

strumcnts  will  answer  his  demands  for  ex- 
pression. 

From  the  viewpoint  of  spiritual  life,  the 
man  or  the  woman  whose  earthly  life  is  spent 
in  the  accumulation  and  selfish  enjoyment  of 
the  material  things  of  earth,  is  far  more  to  be 
pitied  than  those  who  have  lived  this  life  in 
poverty  and  want,  and  who  at  death  have 
nothing  of  material  value  to  leave  behind. 
More  especially  is  this  true  where  the  pov- 
erty and  want  in  this  life  are  the  result  of 
unselfishness  and  the  generous  impulses  of  a 
noble  Soul  to  share  with  others  the  blessings 
of  life.  These  are  they  who  in  spiritual  life 
wear  the  crown  of  true  royalty. 

Whatever  of  the  things  of  this  material 
plane  of  earth  we  gather  about  us  beyond 
those  which  answer  the  needs  of  the  physical 
body  for  life,  comfort  and  protection,  repre- 
sent wasted  energy,  loss  of  time  and  misdi- 
rected eflfort  on  our  part. 

It  is  true,  we  may  leave  them  to  relatives 
and  friends  who  may,  or  may  not,  appreciate 
them  or  rightly  use  them.  From  the  view- 
point of  our  own  individual  best  good  and 
our  own  most  rapid  spiritual  and  psychical 

170 


POSSESSIONS 

development  and  progress,  they  represent 
less  than  nothing.  They  stand  for  a  definite 
and  specific  loss. 

When  the  physical  body  is  worn  out  and 
we  no  longer  can  use  it  as  an  instrument  of 
expression  it  will  fall  away  from  us.  With 
it  will  go  whatever  of  material  "Things"  we 
have  piled  up  around  it.  We  can  no  longer 
hold  them. 

If  only  the  sad  and  self-pitying  could  know 
how  brief  is  the  span  of  earth's  trials  and  dis- 
ciplines when  compared  with  the  enduring 
rewards  of  Courage,  Faith,  Patience  and 
Cheerfulness,  no  one  would  waste  his  oppor- 
tunities in  self-commiseration.  If  they  could 
but  know  what  the  Constructive  Law  of 
Hope,  Faith,  Courage  and  Cheerfulness  can 
do  for  men  and  women  even  yet  "in  the 
physical  body";  if  they  but  understood  how 
these  set  in  motion  the  active  forces  that 
"make  for  good";  if  they  but  knew  how  such 
individuals  attract  to  themselves  beneficent 
influences  (both  in  the  body  and  out)  which 
make  for  social  content  and  material  pros- 
perity of  the  individual  man  and  woman  who 
harbors  them;  they  would   turn  from   their 

171 


THK  GREAT  WORK 

pitying  with  a  song  of  joy  in  their  hearts  and 
a  benediction  upon  their  lips  for  the  bless- 
ings within  their  reach. 

If  one  hundred  men  and  women  who  are 
pessimists  today  would  but  cast  off  their 
bondage  of  doubt  of  Nature's  beneficence, 
and  set  themselves  the  reasonable  task  of  liv- 
ing their  lives  like  men  and  women  of  full 
stature,  with  cheerful  courage;  of  cooperat- 
ing for  mutual  happiness  and  material  good; 
and  of  asking  for  the  help  of  the  Great 
Friends  when  their  own  efforts  have  failed  in 
the  achievement  of  lawful  results;  it  is  safe  to 
say  that  within  five  years  each  and  every  one 
of  them  would  have  attained  to  a  state  of 
individual  Content  and  individual  Comfort 
in  material  things.  The  great  Law  of  Com- 
pensation has  just  as  many  rewards  for  the 
courageous  and  the  faithful  as  it  has  penalties 
for  the  weak  and  the  selfish. 


172 


CHAPTER  XVII 


LAW  OF  COMPENSATION 


There  is  a  Law  in  physical  nature  which 
is  known  as  the  "Law  of  Compensation."  It 
is  a  law  of  mechanics.  It  operates  with 
mathematical  exactness  and  precision.  Its 
results  are  susceptible  of  definite  calculation 
and  verification. 

A  suggestion  of  this  law  may  be  obtained 
from  a  scientific  study  of  the  relation  between 
"speed"  and  "power."  Speed,  in  the  realm 
of  physical  material,  can  be  obtained  only  at 
the  expense  of  power,  other  things  being 
equal.  The  higher  the  speed  the  greater  the 
power. 

In  the  realm  of  mechanics,  if  we  would 
have  speed  we  must  be  willing  to  compen- 
sate for  It  in  power. 

If  the  degree  of  power  is  fixed  and  remains 
the  same,  then  if  we  would  increase  the  speed 
we  must  be  willing  to  compensate  for  it  in 
volume.    The  law  is  that  "other  things  being 


THE  GRLAT  WORK 

equal,  the  greater  the  speed  the  smaller  the 
volume." 

Let  us  suppose  that  100  horsepower  ap- 
plied to  a  2,000  pound  car  will  propel  it  at  a 
speed  of  60  miles  an  hour.  Now,  if  we  desire 
to  move  the  same  car  at  a  higher  rate  of  speed 
we  can  do  so  only  by  increasing  the  number 
of  horsepower.  If  we  desire  greater  speed  in 
this  case,  we  are  compelled  to  compensate  for 
it  in  power. 

But  suppose  we  desire  to  increase  the  speed 
without  increasing  the  number  of  horsepower 
above  100.  How  can  we  accomplish  the  de- 
sired increase  of  speed?  This  can  be  done  by 
reducing  the  weight  (or  volume)  of  our  car. 
If  we  reduce  the  weight  of  our  car  to  1,000 
pounds,  our  100  horsepower  will  propel  it  at 
a  much  higher  rate  of  speed  than  it  would 
propel  the  2,000  pound  car.  In  this  case,  if 
we  would  increase  the  speed  we  must  be  will- 
ing to  compensate  for  speed  with  weight  (or 
volume). 

There  is  in  Nature  a  mechanical  law  of 
compensation.  It  is  recognized  everywhere 
in  the  W(jrld  by  physical  science.  It  is  im- 
mutable,   so    far    as   we    know.      Under    this 


LAW  OF  COMPENSATION 

mechanical  law  Nature  exacts  something  in 
return  for  everything  she  grants.  She  does 
not  give  without  receiving  in  return.  Nature 
is  generous  after  all;  she  does  not  always  de- 
mand of  us  that  we  pay  in  kind.  She  does, 
however,  demand  a  full  equivalent. 

If  man,  as  an  Individual  Intelligence,  were 
nothing  more  than  a  mechanical  device  and, 
as  such,  responded  automatically  to  the  laws 
of  mechanics,  the  problem  of  life  would  be 
as  simple  as  the  multiplication  table,  or  as  the 
simplest  problem  in  mathematics.  In  that 
event  all  our  actions  and  reactions  would  be 
as  automatic  and  mechanical  as  are  those  of 
the  chemical  atoms  of  the  physical  universe. 
The  Law  of  Compensation  would  then  sat- 
isfy itself  in  us  as  it  does  in  the  chemical 
universe.  As  automatons  we  would  have  no 
choice  of  action.  We  would  satisfy  the  law, 
but  it  would  be  an  automatic  or  mechanical 
satisfaction  and  not  a  voluntary  or  intelligent 
one  from  the  standpoint  of  an  individual. 

Chemical  atoms  act  and  are  acted  upon  au- 
tomatically. Machines  that  are  invented  and 
constructed  by  men  act  mechanically.  In 
neither    case   is    there    power   of    individual 

175 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

choice  in  the  actor.  In  both  cases  the  Law  of 
Compensation  is  satisfied.  The  giving  and 
the  receiving  exactly  balance  each  other.  Be- 
cause the  processes  involved  are  automatic 
and  mechanical  the  results  may  be  deter- 
mined in  advance  and  with  mathematical 
precision.  This  is  the  realm  of  mathematics, 
or  mechanical  science. 

Man  is  not  an  automaton  nor  a  mechanical 
device.  As  an  Individual  Intelligence  he 
rises  to  a  plane  above  the  realm  of  simple  me- 
chanics. His  actions  and  reactions,  being 
largely  voluntary,  do  not  lend  themselves  to 
the  rules  of  simple  mathematics.  For  this 
reason  they  cannot  be  determined  in  advance 
by  the  application  of  mathematical  rules  or 
mechanical  principles,  with  absolute  cer- 
tainty or  precision.  Whatever  may  be  claimed 
for  astrology  as  a  "science  of  prophecy,"  it 
must  never  be  forgotten  that  man's  individual 
power  of  Will  is  greater  than  the  influence  of 
any  planet  or  combination  of  planets,  in  de- 
termining the  lines  of  his  individual  life  and 
conduct.  Every  man  is  "greater  than  his 
planet."  If  this  were  not  so,  man  would  be- 
come  an   automaton   under   planetary   influ- 

176 


LAW  OF  COMPENSATION 

ences.  In  that  event  it  would  be  possible  to 
reduce  him  to  a  "mathematical  calculation" 
and  determine  at  his  birth  every  act,  thought, 
impulse  and  inspiration  of  his  life  from  that 
instant  to  the  time  of  his  death,  however  long 
his  life  may  be. 

There  is  that  in  man  which  lifts  him  above 
the  level  of  mere  automatism  and  simple  me- 
chanics. As  an  individualized  Intelligence 
he  possesses  certain  attributes  which  make 
him  "a  law  unto  himself"  within  certain  lim- 
itations. The  powers  of  Will  and  Choice  do 
not  operate  automatically  nor  in  accordance 
with  the  law  of  mechanics.  They  are  powers 
of  a  self-acting  Intelligent  Soul,  and  are 
not  operated  by  planetary  influences  alone. 

From  the  standpoint  of  science,  man  occu- 
pies a  most  interesting  position.  For  all  sci- 
entific and  philosophic  purposes,  each  Indi- 
vidual Intelligence  is,  from  his  own  point  of 
vision,  the  center  of  the  universe.  In  this 
unique  position  he  stands  as  a  target  for  all 
the  forces  and  influences  of  Nature.  He  con- 
stitutes the  natural  vortex  wherein  the  con- 
structive and  destructive  forces  and  processes 
pf   Nature    are   forever   contending    for   su- 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

premacy.  By  the  majesty  of  his  individual 
\y\\\  alone  can  their  issue  be  determined. 
While  he  is  a  creature  of  the  Great  Law,  yet 
he  alone  must  determine  whether  he  will  re- 
spect that  Law.  By  the  power  of  individual 
Choice  and  the  exercise  of  his  Will  alone  he 
may  cooperate  with  either  the  constructive  or 
the  destructive  forces  of  Nature.  He  alone 
may  thus  determine  his  own  destiny. 

He  can  at  no  point  evade  or  avoid  the  Law 
of  Compensation.  He  can  at  no  time  place 
himself  outside  the  limits  of  its  jurisdiction. 
In  so  far  as  he  conforms  his  life  to  the  Con- 
sfruclive  Principle  he  not  only  earns  Xalure's 
reward  therefor,  hut  he  must  receive  it. 

In  so  far  as  he  patronizes  the  Destructive 
Principle  in  just  that  far  he  earns  Nature's 
penalty  therefor,  and  he  must  receive  it. 

At  this  point  an  interesting  problem  arises. 
Since  the  Law  of  Compensation  demands  of 
us  that  we  give  a  full  equivalent  for  all  we 
receive,  and  receive  a  full  equivalent  for 
all  we  give,  how  is  progression  possible?  If 
a  man  gives  all  he  receives  how  is  it  possible 
for  him  ever  to  get  ahead?     If  others  do  the 

178 


LAW  OF  COMPENSATION 

same  thing,  how  is  it  possible  for  the  human 
race  to  advance? 

The  entire  problem  of  Evolution  involves 
progression.  It  means  that  there  is  a  constant 
and  ever-increasing  residuum  of  benefit  that 
remains  with  both  an  individual  and  the 
race.  Otherwise  how  could  an  individual  or 
the  race  ever  progress  or  "get  ahead"? 

From  the  standpoint  of  mechanics  there  is 
absolutely  no  answer.  If  man  were  nothing 
more  than  a  mere  physical  organism,  subject 
alone  to  the  laws  of  physical  material,  there 
could  be  no  such  thing  as  progression,  and 
hence  no  such  thing  as  evolution.  The  Law 
of  Compensation  in  the  realm  of  physics  de- 
mands that  the  giving  and  the  receiving  shall 
be  absolutely  equal.  If  not  in  kind,  it  must 
be  so  in  equivalent.  This  means,  from  a  pure- 
ly material  viewpoint,  that  there  can  be  no 
such  thing  as  "progression"  or  "evolution." 

In  the  realm  of  material  nature,  if  you  re- 
ceive from  your  neighbor  a  bushel  of  corn, 
you  must  either  return  to  him  a  bushel  of 
corn  or  its  equivalent  in  value.  You  must 
either  return  to  him  an  equal  measure  of  the 
same  thing,  or  you  must  return  to  him  that 

179 


THi:  t;RKA'r  work 

which  will  enable  him  to  purchase  from  an- 
other an  equal  measure  of  the  same  thing. 
Otherwise  you  remain  in  his  debt  for  the  dif- 
ference. Since  the  laws  of  physical  nature 
are  inexorable,  he  will  continue  to  have  a 
claim  upon  you  until  you  have  given  to  him 
the  full  measure  of  all  you  have  received 
from  him,  or  its  full  equivalent. 

If  you  receive  from  your  neighbor  a  bushel 
of  corn  and  return  to  him  a  bushel  of  corn, 
the  account  between  you  in  material  value  is 
"balanced."  From  a  material  point  of  view 
neither  of  you  is  ahead.  Or,  if  you  receive 
from  him  a  bushel  of  corn  and  return  to  him 
an  equivalent  in  potatoes  or  wheat,  you  have 
returned  to  him  that  which  will  enable  him 
to  purchase  from  another  a  bushel  of  corn  to 
replace  the  one  he  gave  to  you.  In  this  case 
also  you  have  satisfied  the  Law  of  Compen- 
sation on  the  material  plane.  But  neither 
you  nor  he  is  ahead  in  the  transaction,  from 
a  purely  material  point  of  view.  This  does 
not  mean  "progress"  from  a  purely  material 
point  of  view,  for  neither  of  you  is  "ahead." 

The  Law  of  Compensation,  or  Equili- 
brium, does  not  provide  for  nor  seem  to  con- 
no 


LAW  OF  COMPENSATION 

template  the  principle  of  progression  or  evo- 
lution. 

This  same  great  Law  of  Compensation,  or 
its  correlative,  obtains  throughout  the  moral 
order  of  the  universe  w^herein  man  abides. 
Inasmuch  as  Morality  is  at  the  foundation 
of  Constructive  Spirituality,  it  follows  that 
the  Law  of  Compensation  is  also  vitally 
related  to  Constructive  Spirituality.  Since 
Independent  Spiritual  Unfoldment  and 
Mastership  are  the  outgrowths  of  Construct- 
ive Spirituality  and  Morality,  it  is  equally 
clear  that  the  Law  of  Compensation  is  vitally 
related  to  the  whole  subject  of  this  work. 

In  the  realm  of  Morality  the  Law  of  Com- 
pensation is  inexorable.  It  is  the  great  lev- 
eler.  It  is  ever  seeking  to  establish  equili- 
brium by  rounding  off  the  rough  corners  of 
human  character  and  filling  in  the  low  places 
to  bring  the  whole  to  a  common  level.  It  is 
no  respecter  of  persons.  It  binds  all  and  fa- 
vors none. 

It  is  not  within  the  province  of  human  in- 
telligence, so  far  as  we  know,  even  to  under- 
stand (much  less  to  explain),  why  any  law  of 
Nature  exists.    It  is  not  within  the  legitimate 

181 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Sphere  of  science  to  do  more  than  to  de- 
termine the  fact  that  certain  laws  of  Na- 
ture do  exist.  Any  attempt  to  go  back  of  a 
law  of  Nature  and  explain  the  reason  for  its 
existence  would  be  an  attempt  to  analyze  the 
mental  processes  of  the  Creator  of  that  law, 
and  determine  what  was  in  His  mind  when 
He  established  it.  The  Great  School  of  the 
Masters  does  not  claim  to  be  on  terms  of  such 
intimacy  with  the  Great  Creative  Intelli- 
gence as  to  speak  with  authority  concerning 
the  reasons  or  motives  which  impelled  the 
establishment  of  Natural  Laws.  It  has  been 
and  is  content,  for  the  present  at  least,  to  con- 
fine its  researches  to  the  field  of  Nature's  es- 
tablished facts  and  their  relations  to  each 
other.  The  field  of  ultimate  causation  is  one 
which  lies  far  out  beyond  the  sphere  of  its 
present  limitations. 

The  Law  of  Compensation  is  one  of  the  ex- 
isting facts  of  Nature.  Why  it  came  into  ex- 
istance,  and  how  it  came  to  be  one  of  the 
profoundly  interesting  and  important  facts  of 
Nature,  are  questions  which  the  Great  Cre- 
ative   Intelligence    alone    is    in    position    to 

182 


LAW  OF  COMPENSATION 

answer,  if  indeed  they  may  be  answered 
at  all. 

In  the  realm  of  physical  nature,  and  on  the 
plane  of  purely  physical  things — things  that 
are  portable  and  may  be  fenced  ofif  from 
other  physical  things — we  have  our  man- 
made  Law  of  Compensation.  It  is  enacted 
by  the  state  legislatures  and  may  be  found  in 
the  "Revised  Statutes"  of  the  several  states. 
It  represents  man's  efforts  to  define  what  he 
is  pleased  to  term  his  "Property  Rights"  and 
his  "Personal  Rights"  in  his  relation  to  his 
fellow  man,  and  establish  these  upon  a  basis 
of  "Equity,  Justice  and  Right." 

Because  the  statutes  of  the  several  states  are 
made  by  men,  and  because  the  laws  therein 
contained  are  man-made  laws,  it  follows  that 
the  penalties  which  are  prescribed  in  case  of 
their  violation  are  penalties  w^hich  man  only 
can  enforce.  They  are  not  automatic  in  their 
action,  as  are  the  laws  of  Nature.  For  this 
reason  men  who  are  not  law-abiding  find  it 
possible  to  evade  many  of  them  in  such  man- 
ner as  to  avoid  the  penalties  they  prescribe. 
Even  though  these  statutory  laws  often  fall 
far  short  of  the  Equity,  Justice  and  Right  for 

183 


thp:  great  work 

Avhich  they  were  intended,  and  for  this  reason 
might  in  some  instances  seem  to  justify  the 
practice  of  those  who  violate  them;  never- 
theless, if  their  penalties  were  automatic  as 
are  those  of  Nature's  laws,  and  therefore  in- 
exorable, their  intentional  violations  would 
be  exceedingly  few  and  far  between.  In  that 
event  no  man  would  violate  the  law  unless  he 
were  ready  and  willing  to  suffer  the  penalty 
prescribed  for  such  violation. 

It  is  only  because  violations  of  man-made 
laws  must  first  be  discovered  by  other  men, 
and  the  penalties  prescribed  for  such  viola- 
tions, if  enforced  at  all,  must  be  enforced  by 
men,  that  the  "Laws  of  the  Land"  are  so  little 
respected. 

It  is  because  of  these  inadequacies  in  the 
systems  of  men  and  in  the  uncertainty  with 
which  their  laws  are  enforced  and  adminis- 
tered, that  men  in  all  the  walks  of  life  have 
grown  habitually  lawless.  It  is  because  they 
are  so  successful  in  avoiding  the  laws  of  man 
that  they  have  grown  to  have  so  little  regard 
for  the  laws  of  Nature.  Then  again.  Nature's 
penalties  are  not  always  immediately  appar- 
ent.  Some  of  them  do  not  become  clearly  ap- 


LAW  OF  COMPENSATION 

parent  to  the  violator  until  after  many  and 
oft  repeated  violations  have  occurred.  In  the 
meantime  a  habit  has  been  formed  which  is 
not  always  easy  to  overcome.  But  sooner  or 
later  every  man  must  come  to  know  the  laws 
of  Nature  which  have  to  do  with  his  own  in- 
dividual detriment  or  welfare.  So  it  is  that 
sooner  or  later  all  men  shall  know  of  the 
great  and  immutable  Law  of  Compensation 
which  enters  into  the  problem  of  Indepen- 
dent Spiritual  Unfoldment. 

There  is  but  one  way  known  to  science 
whereby  it  may  be  established  beyond  all 
question  that  this  Law  is  a  necessary  factor 
in  the  Ethical  Formulary  upon  which  Spir- 
itual Independence  depends.  That  is  by  in- 
dividual experimentation.  Within  the  Great 
School  of  the  Masters  it  has  been  tried  and 
tested  many,  many  times.  Every  experiment 
thus  far  made  has  produced  the  same  result. 
Thus  it  has  been  determined  with  scientific 
exactness  and  certainty  that  there  is  no  such 
thing  as  Constructive  Spiritual  Unfoldment 
possible  to  the  man  or  the  woman  who  is  not 
as  ready  and  as  willing  to  give  as  to  receive, 
and  to  give  in  equal  measure.    Could  there 


THE  GREAT  WOUK 

be  any  better  or  more  conclusive  test  of  the 
Law  than  this? 

The  Law  of  Compensation  is  one  of  the 
great  and  profound  facts  of  Nature.  It  is 
desired  to  emphasize  the  fact  also  that  it  is 
as  much  and  as  truly  a  factor  in  the  Moral 
Order  of  the  universe  as  it  is  in  the  realm  of 
physical  nature.  It  is  not  a  thing  of  man's 
invention  or  creation.  Its  penalties  are  fixed 
and  immutable,  and  they  apply  to  all  men. 

The  individual  who  reaches  this  point  in 
the  regular  unfoldment  of  the  Ethical  Sec- 
tion of  the  General  Formulary  may  well 
pause  and  contemplate  himself  in  the  light 
of  the  Great  Law.  Here  it  is  that  he  is  com- 
pelled to  face  his  first  great  Ethical  Test. 
Unless  he  can  pass  the  test  of  "Unselfish- 
ness" this  should  be  his  present  stopping 
place.  It  would  be  but  a  waste  of  both  time 
and  energy  for  him  to  attempt  to  proceed  be- 
yond this  point.  It  would  be  but  an  attempt 
to  climb  the  steep  and  towering  mountain  of 
Truth  backward,  with  his  face  turned  toward 
the  Valley  of  Spiritual  Darkness.  It  CANNOT 
BE  DONE. 


IM 


CHAPTER  XVIII 


RECEIVING  AND  GIVING 


We  receive  and  we  give. 

This  is  the  fundamental  business  of  indi- 
vidual life.  It  is  the  basic  function  and  proc- 
ess of  a  Soul.  In  its  primary  aspect  this 
represents  the  sum  total  of  life's  activities. 
How  simple  life  becomes  when  we  thus  re- 
duce it  to  its  final  analysis.  How  complex 
the  problem  becomes  when  we  attempt  to 
work  out  this  simple  process  of  Receiving 
and  Giving  under  the  Law  of  Compensa- 
tion. 

In  this  simple  process  is  embodied  the  en- 
tire scope,  purpose  and  spirit  of  the  Law  of 
Compensation.  It  is  the  primary  and  funda- 
mental basis  of  Ethics.  It  is  the  beginning 
and  the  ending  of  Morality.  It  is  the  central 
and  inmost  inspiration  of  all  true  philosophy 
and  religion.  It  is  the  spirit  of  all  true  Co- 
operation. It  is  the  foundation  upon  which 
alone  the  Temple  of  Human  Character  may 

187 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

be  erected  safely  and  securely.  On  this  foun- 
dation only  can  it  endure. 

Receiving  and  Giving.  How  supremely 
simple  and  easy  this  sounds.  It  would  seem 
incredible,  in  the  light  of  modern  meta- 
physics and  psychology,  that  the  activities  of 
a  Soul  thus  should  be  susceptible  of  reduc- 
tion to  a  basis  of  such  simplicity  as  to  appear 
almost  absurd.  At  first  thought  the  mind  is 
inclined  to  rebel  at  the  suggestion. 

And  yet,  it  is  safe  to  predict  that  you  who 
read  these  pages,  free  from  prejudice,  and 
who  are  ready  for  "More  Light"  on  the  path- 
way of  spiritual  life  and  progress,  will  do  as 
others  before  you  have  done  under  similar 
conditions.  You  will  go  back  and  begin  your 
study  of  the  problem  of  individual  life  all 
over  again.  When  you  do  you  will  proceed 
anew  frfjm  the  simple  basis  here  suggested. 
In  due  time  you  will  find  it  possible  to  reduce 
many  of  the  complex  and  intricate  problems 
of  your  own  life  to  the  same  simple  basis. 
When  you  have  learned  to  do  this,  new  doors 
will  open  to  you  through  which  broader 
vistas  of  life's  possibilities  will  appear,  and 
you  will  marvel  at  the  results. 

188 


RECEIVING  AND  GIVING 

Viewing  yourself  as  an  individualized,  In- 
telligent Entity,  and  Nature  as  the  cosmic 
source  of  creative  energy,  then  as  between 
you  on  the  one  hand  and  Nature  on  the  other, 
you  were  the  first  receiver  and  Nature  the 
first  giver.  You  first  received  from  Nature 
the  Soul  Attribute  of  Consciousness  with 
which  you  were  originally  invested,  in  order 
that  through  this  channel  you  might  gain 
knowledge  through  individual  experiences. 
By  thus  investing  you  Nature  opened  the 
way  for  you  to  receive  a  knowledge  of  her 
laws,  principles,  forces,  activities  and  proc- 
esses, within  your  own  being  as  well  as 
without. 

In  your  relationship  to  Nature  you,  as  an 
Individual  Intelligence,  have  been  a  constant 
receiver  from  the  very  beginning  of  your 
conscious  existence.  So  far  as  may  be  deter- 
mined, this  relationship  wherein  you  are  a 
constant  receiver  will  continue  to  exist 
throughout  Life.  It  is  therefore  clear  that 
by  virtue  of  this  established  relationship  you 
are  brought  into  direct  touch  and  communi- 
cation with  Nature's  great  reservoir  of  knowl- 
edge.   This  reservoir  being  inexhaustible,  so 


TliK  CiRKAT  WORK 

far  as  wc  know,  it  is  safe  to  assume  that  you 
will  have  employment  in  your  capacity  as  a 
receiver  for  some  time  to  come,  and  it  may 
be  "for  all  eternity."  Who  is  there  that  can 
fix  the  limit? 

In  the  very  essential  nature  of  your  being 
and  by  virtue  of  the  original  relation,  it  was 
necessary  that  you  in  your  individual  capac- 
ity should  first  receive  before  it  was  possible 
for  you  to  give  in  return. 

For  like  reasons  it  is  impossible  for  you, 
in  your  individual  capacity,  ever  to  make  a 
voluntary  gift  of  more  than  you  have  re- 
ceived. You  cannot  give  that  which  you  do 
not  yet  possess. 

Consciousness  is  a  Soul  Attribute  through 
which  we,  as  individual  intelligences,  receive 
from  Nature  and  our  fellow  man  all  that  we 
now  possess  or  ever  shall  possess,  whether  in 
this  physical  life  or  in  the  realms  of  the  spir- 
itual life,  so  far  as  we  have  been  able  to 
determine. 

Will  is  the  concomitant  and  correlative  at- 
tribute of  a  Soul.  By  its  exercise  we  may 
set  in  motion  all  the  voluntary  activities  and 
processes  of  our  own  individual  being,   and 

190 


RECEIVING  AND  GIVING 

thereby  give  back  a  just  equivalent  for  all  we 
receive  through  Consciousness. 

Through  the  Faculty  of  Consciousness  vv^c 
receive,  and  by  the  pov^er  of  Will  v^e  may 
give  again.  In  these  two  attributes  of  the 
Soul,  the  one  a  Faculty  and  the  other  a  Power, 
we  find  our  "Working  Tools."  They  consti- 
tute our  primary  equipment  as  individual  in- 
telligences. By  their  exercise  alone  are  we 
able  to  preserve  that  "balance  of  account" 
with  Nature  and  our  fellow  man,  demanded 
of  us  by  the  Law  of  Compensation. 

This  gives  to  us  a  view  of  this  life  of  earth 
which  comes  clearly  to  those  only  who  are 
striving  intelligently  for  spiritual  life  and 
light.  It  is  one  which  was  familiar  to  the 
"Wise  Men  of  the  East"  long  ages  before  it 
was  recognized  by  the  Master  Jesus.  It  is 
this  view  that  gives  to  us  a  correct  reading 
of  our  actual  relation  to  the  material  uni- 
verse. It  also  conveys  to  us  a  just  conception 
of  the  immutable  relationship  v/e  sustain  to 
our  fellow  men  and  women.  It  likewise  af- 
fords us  an  exact  interpretation  of  the  per- 
fect balance  which  Natui-e  has  established 
and   would    have   us   maintain   between   our 

191 


THE  (iREAT  WORK 

"Rights"  on  the  one  hand  and  our  "Duties" 
and  ''Obligations"  on  the  other;  between 
what  we  "receive"  and  what  we  "give"  again 
in  return. 


192 


CHAPTER  XIX 


FIRST  GREAT  MILE-POST 


In  the  Ethical  Section  there  are  three  dis- 
tinct problems  which  stand  out  with  such 
ethical  prominence  and  spiritual  significance 
as  to  constitute  distinct  climaxes  and  veri- 
table mile-posts  on  the  journey  of  life.  They 
seem  to  be  distinctively  pivotal  in  their  na- 
ture. They  bring  the  honest  and  intelligent 
student  to  a  realizing  sense  of  their  vital  im- 
portance. They  seem  to  stand,  in  their  ethical 
significance,  at  the  "parting  of  ways." 

We  have  arrived  at  one  of  these.  It  is  the 
first  of  the  three.  It  marks  the  first  pivotal 
point,  the  first  great  "parting  of  ways"  in  the 
journey  of  individual  life,  at  which  every  in- 
telligent Soul  must  arrive,  sooner  or  later.  It 
is  here,  at  this  first  great  "Mile- Post",  that 
each  and  every  one  of  us  must  stand  and 
make  our  first  determining  election.  From 
this  point  forward  two  divergent  pathways 
lead.    If  we  proceed  beyond  this  point  we 

193 


THE  GREAT  WDRK 

must  travel  one  or  the  other  of  these,  for  we 
caniKJt  travel  both. 

One  of  these  pathways  leads  to  the  North 
toward  the  Land  of  Spiritual  Darkness  and 
Death,  the  other  to  the  South  toward  the 
Land  of  Spiritual  Light  and  Life.  One  leads 
to  a  state  and  condition  of  Individual  Bond- 
age, the  other  to  that  of  Individual  Liberty. 
The  one  ends  in  the  complete  subjection  and 
enslavement  of  an  Individual  Intelligence, 
with  all  its  faculties,  capacities  and  powers; 
the  other  in  the  ultimate  and  complete  eman- 
cipation of  a  Soul  from  the  gravitative  in- 
fluence of  evil  and  the  destructive  tendencies. 

These  are  not  mere  figures  of  speech.  They 
give  expression  to  a  profound  scientific  and 
historic  truth  as  real  as  life  itself. 

From  the  remotest  period  in  the  march  of 
human  progress,  of  which  we  have  any  au- 
thentic data,  to  the  present  time,  the  mighty, 
ceaseless  and  ever  increasing  column  of  hu- 
manity has  been  marching  onward  and  up- 
ward along  the  evolutionary  pathway  of  life 
to  this  first  great  Mile-Post  and  Parting  of 
Ways.  At  this  point  of  divergence  the  col- 
umn   has   forever   divided,   the   many   going 

194 


FIRST  GREAT  MILE-POST 

North  into  Darkness  and  Bondage,  and  only 
the  few  going  South  into  the  Land  of  Liberty 
and  Light.  Still  the  ceaseless  tide  of  human- 
ity marches  onward,  and  still  the  many  go 
North  and  the  few  go  South. 

Students  of  psychology  have  endeavored  to 
solve  the  significant  problem  of  why  it  is  that 
the  multitudes  deliberately  turn  at  this  point 
to  the  North  and  without  apparent  hesitation 
walk  down  the  broad  Pathway  of  Servitude 
into  the  Land  of  Darkness  and  Desolation, 
and  why  it  is  that  only  the  few  choose  the 
way  which  leads  to  Liberty  and  Light.  It 
is  a  profound  psychological'  problem  of 
the  most  fascinating  and  vital  interest  to 
every  traveler  upon  the  journey  of  individual 
life. 

From  this  first  of  the  three  pivotal  mile- 
posts  along  the  highway  of  life,  the  road  to 
the  North  is  broad  and  smooth,  down  grade 
all  the  way,  in  the  shade  and  with  the  wind. 
To  travel  this  road  is  so  easy  and  seductive 
that  one  has  only  to  surrender  himself  to  the 
pull  of  gravity  from  in  front  and  the  push 
of  the  wind  from  behind,  to  find  himself 
gliding  forward  and  downward  with  ever-in- 


THK  GRKAT  WORK 

creasing  swiftness  over  a  smooth  and  unob- 
structed surface.  Every  impulse  is  to  yield 
himself,  in  the  spirit  of  delicious  abandon- 
ment, to  the  devolutionary  Principle  of  Na- 
ture, without  thought  of  or  care  for  the  re- 
sults which  must  inevitably  come  to  him  at 
the  end  of  his  journey. 

The  path  to  the  South  is  extremely  narrow 
and  rough,  up-hill  all  the  way,  in  the  sun  and 
facing  the  wind.  To  travel  this  way  is  diffi- 
cult. It  calls  for  the  most  intense  and  unre- 
mitting Personal  Effort.  Every  step  of  the 
way  the  traveler  must  overcome  the  pull  of 
gravity  from  behind  and  the  push  of  the  wind 
in  front.  He  must  climb  over  many  an  ob- 
struction and  remove  many  an  obstacle  from 
his  way.  He  must  do  all  this  himself.  For 
the  path  is  so  narrow  and  the  footing  so  diffi- 
cult that  there  is  room  for  only  one  at  a  time. 
The  traveler  next  in  front  and  the  one  next 
behind  are  both  so  busy  with  their  own 
climbing  that  they  cannot  carry  him. 

However  many  additional  explanations 
might  be  given,  if  this  one  be  true  is  it  not 
sufficient  alone  to  account  for  the  remarkable 
fact  that  so  many  of  life's  travelers  go  to  the 

196 


FIRST  GREAT  MILE-POST 

North  and  so  few  to  the  South?  Add  to  this 
explanation  the  further  fact  that  the  vast  ma- 
jority of  mankind  have  but  a  hazy  and  im- 
perfect understanding  and  indefinite  knowl- 
edge of  the  destinations  to  which  these  two 
diverging  ways  lead,  and  the  psychological 
problem  becomes  still  more  simple  and  easy 
of  solution. 

Let  us  suppose  that  you,  kind  reader,  in 
your  own  journey  of  life  had  reached  this 
crucial  point.  Let  us  suppose  that  you  were 
now  standing  at  this  first  great  "Parting  of 
Ways,"  and  were  called  upon  to  determine 
which  of  the  two  roads  you  would  elect  to 
travel. 

Let  us  further  suppose  that  you  were  not 
entirely  certain  concerning  the  destinations 
to  which  these  two  roads  lead.  Under  these 
conditions  which  road  do  you  think  you 
would  choose?  Would  you  travel  to  the 
North,  or  to  the  South?  There  can  be  little 
doubt  that  you  would  join  the  multitudes  in 
the  broad,  smooth,  shady  and  much-traveled 
highway  leading  to  the  North,  with  the  wind 
at  your  back  and  easy  descent  ahead  of  you. 

The  only  inducement  that  could  impel  you 

197 


THL  GREAT  WORK 

or  any  other  sane  and  intelligent  individual 
to  choose  the  narrow,  rough,  up-hill  and 
difficult  road  to  the  South,  would  be  the  defi- 
nite assurance  from  those  who  have  been 
over  it,  that  it  leads  to  the  Land  of  Liberty 
and  Light  wherein  you  long  to  dwell.  This 
would  be  the  only  reward  sufficient  to  justify 
the  arduous  and  difficult  struggle. 

In  contemplating  the  picture  presented, 
and  after  comparing  the  relative  difficulties 
of  the  two  roads  presented  to  the  student,  it 
is  perhaps  but  natural  that  he  should  wonder 
why  it  is  that  the  wrong  way  is  so  easy  and 
enticing  and  the  right  way  so  difficult. 

We  do  not  know. 

Just  why  it  is  that  Nature  has  made  the 
road  to  individual  and  Intellectual  Bondage 
so  broad,  so  easy  and  so  seductive,  and  the 
path  to  individual  and  Intellectual  Liberty 
so  difficult  and  narrow,  is  a  problem  which 
the  Great  Creative  Intelligence  alone,  per- 
haps, can  answer  satisfactorily.  At  any  rate, 
it  is  one  which  lies  outside  the  limitations  of 
human  intelligence,  so  far  as  we  know.  It 
would  therefore  seem  to  be  both  unwise  and 
unprofitable  to  spend  valuable  time  and 

198 


FIRST  GREAT  MILE-POST 

thought  upon  its  solution,  or  to  speculate  and 
dogmatize  concerning  it.  For  all  practical 
purposes  of  this  present  life,  it  would  seem 
to  be  sufficient  for  us  to  know  that  it  is  a  fact 
which  dare  not  be  ignored  by  Individual 
Intelligence  without  thereby  inviting  the 
most  unhappy  results. 

We  do  not  know  why  it  is  that  the  element 
of  so-called  "evil"  is  so  deeply  and  securely 
implanted  in  the  very  heart  of  human  nature. 
We  do  not  know  why  it  is  that  so  many  of  our 
natural  tendencies  would  seem  to  impel  us 
forward  into  paths  of  life  and  ways  of  living 
which  our  own  intelligences  know  to  be  im- 
moral and  wrong.  We  do  not  know  why 
Nature  has  made  it  necessary  for  us  to  spend 
so  much  of  our  time,  thought  and  effort  in 
overcoming  these  evil  and  destructive  ten- 
dencies in  us.  We  do  not  know  why  it  is  that, 
with  all  these  evil  tendencies,  Nature  has  also 
implanted  in  us  that  which  enables  us  to  rec- 
ognize and  understand  the  wrong  and  at  the 
same  time  impels  us  to  strive  for  better 
things.  We  do  not  know  anyone,  even  among 
the  wisest  and  most  exalted  of  the  Great 
Friends,  who  knows  why  these  things  are  so. 

199 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

The  Great  School  of  the  Masters  does  not 
assume  to  know.  It  does  not  assume  to  know 
why  the  Great  Creative  Intelligence  made 
the  universe,  nor  why  it  seems  to  have  set 
man  the  task  of  living  his  life  in  the  midst  of 
so  many  difficulties.  And  yet,  the  facts  are  so 
painfully  apparent  that  we  could  not  get 
away  from  them  however  earnestly  we  might 
try  to  do  so. 


200 


CHAPTER  XX 


SELF-CONTROL 


No  man  knows  how  narrow  and  rough 
and  uninviting  is  the  path  that  leads  to  Self- 
Control  until  he  has  been  over  it  in  his 
search  for  the  Land  of  Liberty  and  Light 
Men  talk  of  Self-Control.  Women  write  of 
it.  Both  think  of  it,  at  odd  moments,  and 
most  usually  when  there  is  no  special  demand 
for  its  practice.  Both  say  wise  and  beautiful 
things  concerning  it.  But  the  kind  and  qual- 
ity of  Self-Control  that  constitutes  an  essen- 
tial element  of  Spiritual  Unfoldment  and 
Mastership  has  been  but  dimly  sensed  and 
imperfectly  conceived  by  the  men  and  women 
who  make  up  the  great  body  of  our  western 
civilization. 

Self-Control  is  the  first  of  the  three  great 
fundamental  problems  of  Mastership, 

The  broad  highway  to  the  North  is  the 
"Way  of  Self- Indulgence."  The  narrow 
pathway  to  the  South  is  "The  Way  of  Self- 

201 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Control."  It  is  this  latter  way  that  leads  to 
Mastership.  This  is  the  way  all  must  travel 
who  reach  the  desired  goal  to  which  the  work 
of  this  School  is  intended  to  carry  them. 

Self-Control  constitutes  the  next  "regular 
step"  along  the  pathway  of  Spiritual  Un- 
foldment.  It  is  the  first  great  Mile-Post  in 
the  journey  of  life  at  which  every  individual 
must  inevitably  arrive  on  his  way  to  Spiritual 
Independence  and  Mastership. 

Self-Control  is  the  rough  and  narrow 
path  that  leads  to  the  South,  and  "Self-Con- 
trol" is  the  word  in  letters  of  Light  upon  the 
guide-post  which  stands  at  the  parting  of 
ways  and  points  with  its  "Hand  of  Love"  to 
the  "Pathway  of  Duty." 

Perhaps  there  is  no  subject  of  vital  interest 
and  importance  to  the  student  of  Individual 
Life  and  Unfoldment  more  widely  misun- 
derstood, misconstrued,  mis-stated  and  mis- 
taught  than  the  subject  of  Self-Control  in  its 
relation  to  psychic  development.  This  is  due, 
in  large  measure,  to  the  fact  that  the  problem 
has  been  treated  from  the  viewpoint  of  me- 
chanics rather  than  as  a  problem  of  Morality. 

The  Self-Control  which  the  Great  School 

202 


SELF-CONTROL 

of  Natural  Science  would  have  its  votaries 
attain,  and  which  constitutes  an  important 
element  of  the  Formulary,  does  not  mean 
''Self  -  Suppression"  nor  ''Self  -  Abasement;' 
which  are  so  generally  advocated. 

It  does  not  mean  the  entire  destruction, 
annihilation  or  elimination  of  a  single  ele- 
ment, impulse,  desire  or  function  of  individ- 
ual human  nature,  either  physical,  spiritual 
or  psychical. 

It  does  not  mean  emasculation  in  any  sense. 

It  does  mean  that  every  appetite,  every  pas- 
sion, every  desire,  every  emotion  and  every 
impulse  of  a  Soul  shall  be  so  absolutely  under 
the  control  of  the  Individual  that  he  can,  in 
an  instant  and  by  a  simple  act  of  the  Will, 
either  check  it,  suspend  it,  divert  it,  or  convert 
it  into  channels  of  Constructive  activity. 

A  vast  amount  of  time  and  valuable  energy 
have  been  wasted  by  those  who,  under  false 
instructions,  have  endeavored  to  annihilate, 
extinguish,  uproot,  eradicate,  eliminate  and 
entirely  destroy  certain  elements,  passions, 
tendencies,  desires,  impulses  and  functions  of 
the  Soul  and  of  Individual  Intelligence,  in- 
stead of  seeking  to  make  of  them  powerful 

203 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

and  effective  instruments  of  the  Will  through 
the  proper  exercise  of  Self-Control. 

You  who  have  labored  under  the  disadvan- 
tage of  such  false  instruction,  or  who  have 
been  groping  over  the  pathway  without  in- 
struction of  any  kind,  will  understand  more 
fully  what  is  here  intended  when  it  is  ex- 
plained that  there  is  not  a  single  emotion, 
impulse,  passion  or  desire  of  your  being, 
whether  of  the  kind  you  are  accustomed  to 
designate  as  physical,  or  spiritual,  or  psychi- 
cal (and  which  if  it  were  permitted  to  con- 
trol you  would  become  destructive),  but  may 
— under  proper  control  of  your  Will — be 
transmuted  into  a  vital  impulse  of  Construc- 
tive Energy  and  Power. 

Every  impulse  of  a  Soul,  which  reaches 
the  plane  of  expression  through  the  physical 
organism,  involves  the  expenditure  of  phys- 
ical energy  and  vitality.  The  impulse  of  fear, 
in  any  of  its  many  shades,  degrees  and  phases, 
is  a  destructive  force  when  uncontrolled.  It 
involves  the  loss  of  vital  energy  and  power. 
But  if  the  impulse  is  checked  by  the  power 
of  Will  in  its  inception,  it  may  be  converted 
instantly  into  a  constructive  impulse  which 

204 


SELF-CONTROL 

will  enable  the  individual  to  avoid  the  thing 
which  inspired  the  impulse  of  fear.  The 
Power  of  Self-Control  in  this  instance  has 
converted  a  destructive  impulse  of  fear  into 
a  constructive  effort  to  avoid  that  which  in- 
spired the  destructive  impulse  of  fear.  The 
same  is  equally  true  of  every  other  destruc- 
tive impulse  of  a  Soul.  By  the  proper  Self- 
Control  it  may  be  converted  into  a  Construc- 
tive effort  in  line  with  the  process  of  Inde- 
pendent Spiritual  Unfoldment  and  Evolu- 
tionary Growth. 

To  annihilate  or  entirely  extinguish  the 
impulse  of  fear  at  the  approach  of  an  enraged 
bull  (without  converting  that  impulse  into  a 
constructive  effort  for  escape),  would  be  to 
expose  one's  self  to  a  danger  much  greater 
than  that  involved  in  the  impulse  of  fear  it- 
self. 

//  is  as  impossible  for  you  to  annihilate, 
extinguish,  or  entirely  eradicate  the  impulses 
of  the  Soul  (without  thereby  and  at  the  same 
time  destroying  your  own  individuality),  as 
it  is  for  the  chemist  to  extract  or  extinguish 
the  Oxygen  in  water  without  thereby  and  at 
the  same  time  destroying  the  water  itself, 

205 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

The  reason  is  the  same  in  both  cases.  It  is 
because  they  are  essential  itKjredients  in  the 
compound.  The  one  is  as  essential  to  human 
nature  as  the  other  is  to  the  nature  and  con- 
sistency of  water. 

There  is  not  only  an  antidote,  but  likewise 
a  natural  cure  for  every  ill.  There  is  at  least 
one  remedy.  It  is  important  that  every  stu- 
dent of  Independent  Spiritual  Unfoldment 
should  be  in  possession  of  this  remedy,  lest  he 
unwittingly  carry  into  his  life  and  his  work 
germs  of  pestilence  and  destructive  elements 
which  are  excluded  by  the  Formulary  under 
which  he  is  working. 

There  is  a  fundamental  principle  of  life 
which  if  once  clearly  perceived  and  rightly 
applied,  once  universally  understood  and  ap- 
preciated, would  rid  the  world  of  all  its 
''Constitutional  Martyrs." 

That  principle  is  Self-Control  and  a  broad- 
ening of  true  sympathy  for  others  than  our- 
selves, who  like  ourselves  have  also  been 
tried,  troubled,  mistreated  and  denied. 

When  Self-Control  awakens  in  a  Soul  un- 
selfish compassion  for  the  sufferings  of  hu- 
manity, then  has  that  Soul  lifted  itself  from 

206 


SELF-CONTROL 

weakness  to  strength.  Then  has  it  abandoned 
the  Destructive  for  the  Constructive  Prin- 
ciple of  Nature  in  Individual  Life. 

It  is  not  an  uncommon  thing  to  hear  men 
and  w^omen  of  seeming  intelligence  learnedly 
discoursing  upon  the  subject  of  "Self,"  in 
such  manner  as  to  confuse  all  our  ideas  of 
Moral  Accountability  and  Personal  Respon- 
sibility. By  a  clever  trick  of  the  mind  they 
halve  the  essential  entity  or  "Self"  by  a  hori- 
zontal cleavage  into  tw^o  "Selves."  One  of 
these  necessarily  lies  above  the  line  of  cleav- 
age and  is,  for  this  very  apparent  reason, 
given  the  appropriate  name  of  the  "Higher 
Self."  The  other  lies  below  the  line  of  men- 
tal cleavage,  and  for  a  similar  reason  is  ap- 
propriately named  the  "Lower  Self."  This 
clever  method  of  psychological  mutilation 
furnishes  those  who  desire  to  avail  themselves 
of  it  a  most  convenient  fiction  by  means  of 
which  to  avoid  the  necessity  for  Self-Control 
and  at  the  same  time  offer  to  the  world  a 
plausible  excuse  for  all  manner  of  self-in- 
dulgences and  immoralities.  This  interesting 
psychological  fiction  works  itself  out,  in  the 

207 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

minds  of  some,  in  a  manner  somewhat  after 
the  following  formulary: 

"My  Higher  Self  is  my  rral  self.  It  is,  in  its  essen- 
tial nature,  pure,  sinless  and  perfect.  It  is  a  spark  of 
the  Divine.  It  is  therefore  immortal.  It  can  do  no 
wrong  because  it  is  a  part  of  God.  Nothing  can  harm 
it  because  nothing  can  harm  God.  It  lives  in  the  realm 
of  the  Universal.  It  is  therefore  above  and  beyond 
the  influence  of  things  material  or  terrestrial. 

"My  Lower  Self  is  my  material  self.  It  is  my  un- 
real  self,  because  all  matter  is  unreal.  Matter  is  but 
an  illusion.  My  lower  self,  which  is  also  my  material 
se\{,  is  therefore  an  illusion.  It  lives  upon  the  plane 
of  earth.  Being  an  illusion,  it  is  impermanent  and 
varushing.  It  is  dispelled  at  physical  death.  It  there- 
fore dies  with  the  physical  body  and  is  no  more.  It 
is  only  a  medium  through  which  my  real  self,  my 
Higher  Self,  gathers  experience.  It  can  bring  me 
naught  but  good,  because  nothing  can  harm  my  Higher 
Self." 

On  the  basis  of  this  sort  of  fiction  men  nnd 
women  of  excellent  intelligence  and  vicious 
tendencies  are  today  indulging  themselves  in 
all  manner  of  immoralities.  This  they  do  on 
the  theory  that  the  appetites,  passions  and  de- 
sires are  of  the  flesh.  They  are  therefore  a 
part  of  the  "Lower  Self."  Thy  do  not  in  the 
least  degree  affect  the  "Higher  Self"  which  is 
the  Soul. 

Upon  such  a  theory  there  is  no  reason  why 
men  and  women  should  set  themselves  the 
burdensome  and  difficult  task  of  controlling 

208 


SELF-CONTROL 

the  appetites,  passions  and  desires.  For  on 
the  basis  of  such  a  theory  it  is  possible  for  the 
"Higher  Self"  to  sit  upon  its  immaculate 
shelf  of  perfection  in  the  realm  of  the  Infinite 
and  with  perfect  security  and  complacency 
observe  its  ''weaker  sister,"  the  "Lower  Self," 
wallow  in  the  mire  of  immorality,  even  to 
the  deepest  depths  of  degradation,  without  in 
the  remotest  degree  affecting  the  moral 
status  or  development  of  the  "Higher  Self," 
the  essential  Soul. 

To  those  who  are  not  accustomed  to  this 
line  of  sophistry,  or  who  have  not  come 
in  contact  with  those  who  advocate  such 
theories,  it  may  seem  incredible  that  human 
intelligence  should  resort  to  such  bald  trick- 
ery and  ignoble  pretense  in  order  to  avoid  the 
obligation  of  Self-Control  which  the  Moral 
Law  imposes  upon  all  men  who  have  at- 
tained to  the  status  of  Personal  Responsibility 
and  Moral  Accountability.  There  are  not 
only  men  and  women  of  this  type,  but  there 
are  many  of  them,  and  they  are  industriously 
spreading  the  virus  of  moral  leprosy  wher- 
ever they  can  find  those  who  will  listen  to 
them.    Such  a  theory,  or  "doctrine,"  fits  in 

209 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

with  all  the  vicious  tendencies  of  unbridled 
libertinism. 

The  same  tendency  of  human  nature  to 
avoid  the  necessity  for  Self-Control,  may  be 
found  in  the  various  ingenious  interpretations 
which  our  Occidental  students  have  placed 
upon  the  Oriental  doctrine  of  "Karma."  This 
ancient  concept  of  an  immutable  Law  of 
Cause  and  Effect  has  been  tortured  into  many 
strange  devices,  by  designing  intelligences, 
quite  foreign  to  its  original  meaning.  The 
purpose  has  been  to  formulate  an  acceptable 
excuse  for  the  kind  of  self-indulgence  which 
substitutes  lust  for  love  and  license  for 
liberty. 

There  are  those  among  our  western  stu- 
dents who  seem  to  hold  "karma"  to  be  the 
sole  responsible  cause  of  all  their  individual 
weaknesses,  immoralities,  vices,  shortcomings 
and  imperfections.  They  seem  to  regard 
themselves  as  mere  automatic  results  of 
what  they  are  pleased  to  term  their  "karma." 
If  they  are  possessed  of  evil  tendencies,  it 
is  due  to  their  "karma."  If  they  yield  to 
these  tendencies  and  fall  into  vicious  and 
immoral    practices,    it    is    because    of    their 

210 


SELF-CONTROL 

"karma."  Thus  they  invest  the  term  with 
the  meaning  and  the  attributes  of  an  over- 
powering personality  to  whose  irresistible 
authority  they  are  irrevocably  subject.  To 
have  found  an  explanation  of  why  they  yield 
to  temptations,  seems  to  be  regarded  by 
them  as  a  sufficient  excuse  for  the  self-in- 
dulgence they  have  thereby  enjoyed.  To  have 
found  an  explanation  of  why  they  sin,  is  of- 
fered as  sufficient  justification  for  the  sinning. 
The  man  of  this  type  deliberately  injures  his 
neighbor,  knowing  at  the  time  that  he  is  com- 
mitting an  offense  against  the  Moral  Law. 
He  is  called  to  account  for  his  act.  In  his 
effort  to  evade  responsibility  he  pleads 
"karma,"  not  only  as  the  cause  of  his  act,  but 
likewise  as  an  excuse  for  it.  He  does  not 
seem  to  realize  that  Personal  Responsibility 
holds  him  accountable  for  his  act  by  a  law 
of  Nature  just  as  immutable  and  inexorable 
as  the  Law  of  "Karma." 

There  are  others  who  reduce  the  law  of 
"karma"  to  a  species  of  "fatalism."  No  mat- 
ter what  they  do  nor  what  the  result  may  be, 
they  are  simply  "working  out  their  karma." 

Self-Control  is  the  exercise  of  a  governing, 

211 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

restraining,  guiding  and  directing  influence 
over  all  the  appetites,  passions,  emotions  and 
desires  of  the  human  entity. 

Self-Suppression  is  the  exercise  of  an  in- 
fluence which  overpowers,  crushes,  over- 
throws and  destroys  the  appetites,  passions, 
emotions  and  desires  of  the  human  entity. 

Self-Control  is  a  simple  but  sublime  Prin- 
ciple of  Nature  in  Individual  Life. 

It  is  but  a  fruitless  waste  of  both  time  and 
energy  for  an  individual  who  is  in  search  of 
Mastership  to  attempt  the  impossible  task  of 
eradicating  or  annihilating  the  primary  and 
essential  elements  of  the  Soul  in  the  hope  of 
thereby  ridding  himself  of  the  natural  ten- 
dencies of  human  nature.  His  real  task  lies 
not  in  this  direction  at  all.  If  he  is  truly  in 
search  of  it  he  may  find  it  in  the  effort  of  the 
Soul  to  acquire  that  kind  and  quality  of  Self- 
Control  which  will  enable  him  to  become  the 
most  powerful  and  efficient  co-operator  with 
Nature  in  the  constructive  unfoldment  and 
development  of  all  his  powers. 

This  is  the  only  known  pathway  which 
leads  to  Individual  MASTERSHIP. 


SIS 


CHAPTER  XXI 


TEMPERANCE 


"Temperance"  is  a  word  about  which  a 
world-old  controversy  has  raged  among  men, 
and  concerning  the  exact  meaning  and  virtue 
of  which  men  still  differ. 

Temperance:  Self-Control  of  the  Indul- 
gence of  all  the  appetites,  passions,  emo- 
tions, impulses  and  desires,  at  all  times,  with- 
in the  limits  of  the  Constructive  Principle  of 
Nature  in  Individual  Life. 

The  ^'Self-Control"  is  to  be  exercised — 
NOT  of  the  appetites,  passions,  emotions,  im- 
pulses and  desires,  directly,  but  of  the  ''In- 
dulgence'' of  them.  The  reason  lies  in  the 
fact  that  "Self-Indulgence"  is  found  to  be 
one  of  the  most  powerful  enemies  of  indi- 
vidual human  Life  and  Happiness,  in  all 
the  world.  Under  the  definition,  it  must 
be  controlled,  at  all  times,  within  construc- 
tive limitations. 

The  "appetites,  passions,  emotions  and  de- 

213 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

sires"  are  the  gifts  of  Nature  to  every  Soul. 
When  wisely  exercised,  these  are  all  great 
beneficences,  and  from  the  right  use  of  them 
we  all  derive  intense  pleasure  and  legitimate 
satisfaction.  And  we  are  taught  to  control 
our  "Indulgence"  of  these  gifts  of  Nature 
within  ''Constructive  limitations." 

Our  appetite  is  that  gift  of  Nature  which 
impels  us  to  seek  and  eat  food  for  the  sus- 
tenance and  life  of  the  physical  body,  as  well 
as  for  its  health  and  our  own  satisfaction. 
Some  of  us  have  a  very  strong  appetite  for 
certain  definite  kinds  of  food,  or  drink. 
Others  of  us  have  an  equally  strong  appetite 
for  other  and  very  different  kinds  of  food  and 
drink. 

Suppose  a  man  has  an  intense  appetite  for 
raw  eggs  and  sherry  wine.  He  sees  no  reason 
why  he  should  not  indulge  that  appetite  to  its 
full  demands.  He  does  so  indulge  it  three 
times  a  day.  At  the  end  of  ten  days  he  suffers 
a  severe  attack  of  biliousness.  He  knows  this 
is  not  (jood  for  him;  yet  he  does  not  know  the 
cause  of  this  distressing  condition  within  his 
physical  body.  After  three  or  four  days, 
possibly  a  week,  of  intense  nausea  and  other 

214 


ITEMPERANCE 

sufferingj^'his  system  overcomes  the  illness, 
and  he  regains  his  normal  state  of  health. 
Immediately  his  appetite  returns;  he  desires 
raw  eggs  and  sherry  wine. 

Again  he  indulges  his  appetite.  Within 
ten  days  he  has  an  equally  severe  attack  of 
biliousness.  He  suffers  as  before.  This  time 
he  begins  to  suspect  that  the  indulgence  of 
his  appetite  for  sherry  and  raw  egg  is  the 
cause  of  his  illness.  But  he  is  not  sure.  In 
due  time  his  appetite  returns  in  all  its  inten- 
sity, and  again  he  indulges  it.  The  result  is 
the  same;  he  has  another  equally  severe  at- 
tack of  biliousness.  By  this  time,  he  is  almost 
sure  of  the  cause.  In  the  course  of  the  next 
two  years  he  repeats  his  indulgence  over  and 
again.  In  every  instance  the  result  is  a  severe 
attack  of  biliousness. 

Now  he  can  safely  say:  "I  Know".  And 
he  DOES  know.  He  does  not  need  anybody  to 
tell  him  that  continued  indulgence  of  his 
appetite  for  sherry  and  raw  egg  will  cause 
him  a  severe  attack  of  biliousness.  He 
knows  that  biliousness  is  a  destructive  condi- 
tion within  his  body.  Why?  Because  it  not 
only  makes  him  sick;  but  it  weakens  him  and 

215 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

causes  him  to  lose  many  pounds  below  his 
average  weight.  He  does  not  need  anybody  to 
tell  him — not  even  the  best  doctor  on  earth — 
that  biliousness  is  destructive  to  his  physical 
body.  He  knows  it.  Why?  Because  he  has 
proven  it  by  repeated  personal  experiences. 
He  has  first-hand  KNOWLEDGE  of  the  fact. 
What  is  the  remedy? 

In  course  of  time  and  experiment  he  finds 
he  can  take  sherry  and  egg  two  or  three  times 
a  week  without  experiencing  the  slightest  un- 
pleasant or  destructive  results. 

He  decides  to  increase  the  amount  to  once 
a  day.  In  the  course  of  a  month  he  is  ill 
again.  What  does  this  mean?  That  his  phys- 
ical body  cannot  endure  that  amount. 

He  now  knows — from  actual  personal  ex- 
perience— that  he  cannot  indulge  his  appetite 
for  sherry  and  egg,  beyond  a  certain  amount. 
He  now  knows  that  if  he  desires  to  avoid  fur- 
ther suffering  from  biliousness,  he  must  prac- 
tice "moderation"  in  the  indulgence  of  his 
appetite. 

What  constitutes  "moderation,"  in  this 
case?  Not  more  than  three  times  a  week. 
Why?    Because  through  personal  experience 

216 


TEMPERANCE 

he  has  learned  that  oftener  than  three  times  a 
week  produces  destructive  results,  and  three 
times  a  week,  or  less,  produces  constructive 
results. 

He  has  but  one  alternative.  He  must 
either  elect  to  die  from  a  disease  of  the  liver, 
or  he  must  "Control  the  indulgence  of  his  ap- 
petite within  constructive  limitations."  This 
means  "Temperance." 

He  decides  to  practice  Temperance.  In 
doing  so,  he  is  not  doing  violence  to  any  of 
"Nature's  Beneficences."  He  is  not  trying  to 
destroy  his  appetite.  He  is  merely  controlling 
his  indulgence  of  it.  He  is  controlling  the 
indulgence  of  his  appetite  within  constructive 
limits. 

He  is  practicing  "Temperance".  So  long 
as  he  does  so,  he  is  on  the  right  path,  and  is 
NOT  destroying  his  physical  body,  nor  en- 
slaving his  Soul  to  a  destructive  Habit. 

A  man  is  intensely  fond  of  corned-beef- 
and-cabbage.  He  sees  no  good  reason  why 
he  should  not  eat  it,  since  it  is  recognized  by 
other  men  as  a  wholesome  article  of  food. 
He  decides  to  indulge  his  appetite  for  it,  un- 
til he  is  satisfied.    He  eats  corned-beef-and- 

217 


1  hi:  great  work 

cabbage  three  times  a  day,  and  at  each  meal 
eats  to  excess.  But  his  appetite  is  never  satis- 
fied. After  two  or  three  days  he  has  a  severe 
spell  of  acute  indigestion.  He  suffers  the 
most  intense  and  excruciating  pains  in  his 
stomach.  So  severe  is  his  suffering  that  he 
believes  he  is  going  to  die.  His  physician 
helps  to  restore  his  health,  and  cautions  him 
against  indulging  his  appetite  for  corned- 
beef-and-cabbage.  He  tells  him  to  eat  it  not 
oftener  than  once  in  two  weeks,  and  then  in 
moderation. 

For  a  time  he  follows  the  doctor's  advice, 
and  has  no  return  of  the  trouble.  Then  one 
day  he  has  an  intense  craving  for  his  favorite 
dish.  He  indulges  his  appetite  until  he  has 
over-eaten.  The  result  is  another  attack  of 
acute  indigestion,  with  all  its  excruciating 
pains  and  suffering.  This  time  he  reaches  the 
very  brink  of  death,  before  Nature  succeeds 
in  restoring  him  to  life  and  strength. 

This  experience  has  taught  him  that  Na- 
ture will  not  permit  him  to  indulge  his  ap- 
petite for  such  food  beyond  constructive  lim- 
its. He  has  learned  that  it  is  better  for  him 
to  curb  his  appetite  than  to  suffer  such  tor- 

218 


TEMPERANCE 

tures  and  danger  of  physical  death.  Hence, 
in  accordance  with  his  own  best  intelligence, 
based  on  his  knowledge  from  experience,  and 
the  advice  of  his  physician,  he  decides  to  ex- 
ercise Self-Control  over  the  indulgence  of  his 
appetite  for  corned-beef-and-cabbage  in  fu- 
ture. He  therefore  becomes  a  Temperate  man 
in  his  use  of  that  particular  article  of  food. 

The  article  of  food,  in  itself,  is  entirely 
wholesome — when  used  in  moderation. 

When  used  properly  (constructively),  it 
causes  him  neither  suffering  nor  discomfort; 
and  it  sustains  his  strength  and  vitality. 

This  is  all  that  Nature  demands  of  him, 
and  all  the  lesson  she  was  trying  to  teach  him. 

This  does  not  mean  that  Nature  would 
make  him  a  "Total  Abstainer,"  nor  a  "Pro- 
hibitionist" as  to  corned-beef-and-cabbage. 
All  she  demands  of  him  is  that  he  exemplify 
Temperance  in  his  use  of  this  particular 
article  of  excellent  food. 

If  he  abuses  himself  (and  others)  by  in- 
dulging his  appetite  iNtemperately  (destruc- 
tively). Nature  punishes  him  for  his  indul- 
gence beyond  constructive  limitations.  She 
does  not  prohibit  him  from  eating  that  par- 

219 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

ticular  food,  nor  any  other.  She  does  not  even 
tell  him  that  he  must  absolutely  abstain  from 
ever  eating  corned-beef-and-cabbage.  She 
merely  punishes  him,  if  and  whenever,  he 
violates  (by  over-indulgence)  her  Construc- 
tive Principle  in  Individual  Life. 

It  is  possible  for  us  to  abuse  and  misuse 
every  beneficence  of  Nature.  The  most 
tempting  impulse  of  human  nature  is  "Self- 
Indulgence."  Because  liquor  stimulates  cheer- 
fulness and  good  feeling  (both  of  which,  in 
themselves,  are  beneficent),  we  are  impelled 
to  go  on  and  on,  drinking  until  our  cheerful- 
ness becomes  hilarity,  and  our  good  feeling 
becomes  familiarity,  then  on  to  jealousy  and 
finally  anger. 

Because  we  have  an  excellent  appetite  for 
food  (which,  in  itself,  is  most  beneficent) 
we  go  on  and  on,  eating  until  we  have  over- 
loaded our  stomachs  with  more  food  than 
they  can  digest  and  assimilate.  What  is  the  re- 
sult? Dyspepsia,  deranged  digestion,  and  all 
manner  of  diseases  and  ailments  that  arise 
from  "over-feeding."  We  soon  cease  to  get 
more  than  a  mere  fraction  of  good  from  what 
we  eat.  We  are  miserable,  our  lives  take  on  all 

830 


TEMPERANCE 

manner  of  somber  hues,  and  darkness  seems 
to  fill  the  air  wherever  we  go,  or  whatever 
we  do.  Life  itself  becomes  wretched,  miser- 
able, and  scarcely  worth  the  living  —  as  it 
impresses  us  in  the  midst  of  such  conditions. 

In  proportion  as  the  drunkard  loses  his 
power  of  self-control  he  also  loses  his  sense 
of  moral  accountability  and  sinks  to  the  level 
of  the  animal.  He  becomes  the  plaything  of 
his  own  appetites,  passions  and  desires,  and  is 
more  a  beast  than  a  man. 

This  is  why  the  principle  of  temperance 
(quite  aside  from  the  question  of  expediency) 
is,  in  essence,  superior  to  that  of  prohibition., 
The  man  who  is  able  to  walk  in  the  midst  of 
temptations  and  has  reached  that  degree  of 
self-control  where  he  is  strong  enough  in  his 
own  right  to  live  a  clean  life,  is  a  greater  Soul 
in  every  way  than  he  who  must  depend  upon 
statutes  to  banish  from  his  sight  the  tempta- 
tions of  life. 

There  are  many  palliatives  for  drunken- 
ness, but  there  is  only  one  cure.  That  is  the 
development  of  self-control  sufficient  to  with- 
stand by  one's  own  efforts  the  allurements  and 
enticements  of  drink. 

221 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Temper^anxE  does  not  mean  ''Total  Ab- 
stinence" nor  "Prohibition."  The  first  of 
these  means  that  you  absolutely  cease  to  use 
sherry  and  egg,  under  any  conditions  or  cir- 
cumstances; the  latter  means  that  somebody, 
or  some  Law  absolutely  prevents  you  from 
using  them,  under  any  conditions  or  circum- 
stances whatsoever. 

If  you,  of  your  own  free  Will  and  accord, 
elect  to  discontinue  their  use  entirely,  you 
are  practicing  "Total  Abstinence;''  but  you 
will  note  that  this  is  something/  which  you 
alone  determine,  and  concerning  which  no- 
body else  whomsoever  has  anything   to  say. 

If  somebody  else,  or  some  Law,  makes  it 
utterly  impossible  for  you  to  get  your  sherry 
and  egg,  that  is  "Prohibition."  You  will  note 
that  it  is  something  which  is  thrust  upon  you, 
and  that  it  is  something  which  denies  you  the 
right  to  use  it  at  all.  It  is  something  which 
denies  you  the  liberty  of  deciding  the  matter 
for  yourself,  and  forces  you  to  obedience, 
whether  you  believe  in  it  or  not. 

If  you  decide  to  limit  your  indulgence  of 
them  within  constructive  limits,  you  are  prac- 
ticing "Temperance." 

222 


TEMPERANCE 

Between  "Temperance,"  on  the  one  hand, 
and  "Prohibition"  on  the  other,  there  is  a 
great  fundamental  principle  involved. 

Self-Control  is  one  of  the  vital  elements 
in  the  Attitude  of  Soul  which  is  at  the 
foundation  of  Spiritual  Unfoldment  and 
Spiritual  Mastership.  It  is  a  vital  element 
in  the  Evolution  of  Individual  Human  Life, 
and  in  the  attainment  of  Happiness. 

Self-Control  is  also  the  result  of  the  exer- 
cise of  the  Power  of  Will  in  restraint  of  our 
Indulgence  of  our  appetites,  passions,  emo- 
tions and  desires,  within  constructive  limita- 
tions. It  is  therefore  at  the  foundation  of 
Temperance. 

Temperance  is  one  of  the  attainments  of 
an  Individual  upon  which  Mastership  de- 
pends. No  man  who  fails  to  exercise  Self- 
Control  over  the  Indulgence  of  his  appetites, 
passions,  emotions  and  desires  within  con- 
structive limits,  need  ever  expect  or  hope  to 
attain  Spiritual  Mastership. 

Whatever  deprives,  or  relieves  an  indi- 
vidual of  the  necessity  for  exercising  Self- 
Control,  takes  from  him  a  vital  element  in  the 

Attitude  of  Soul  on  which  Spiritual  Mas- 

223 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

tership  (and  Individual  Immortality)  de- 
pend— according  to  the  Masters. 

Like  over-indulgence  in  food  and  drink, 
there  is  not  an  appetite,  passion,  emotion, 
desire,  ambition  or  impulse  of  human  nature 
(which  in  itself  is  right),  but  may  be  in- 
dulged to  a  point  where  it  becomes  destruc- 
tive to  the  individual.  The  only  power  that 
can  prevent  it  from  reaching  the  destructive 
point  is  that  of  Self-Control. 

//  may  be  indulged  to  any  point  short  of 
the  destructive,  in  perfect  accord  with  Na- 
ture's purposes.  So  long  as  it  is  held  within 
those  limitations  it  is  Constructive  in  its 
effects  upon  the  individual.  These  are  the 
limitations  which  are  meant  to  be  indicated 
by  the  term  "Temperance."  The  thoroughly 
tempered,  or  temperate  individual,  is  he  who 
exercises  the  Power  of  Self-Control  over  all 
the  appetites,  passions,  desires,  emotions,  am- 
bitions and  impulses  of  his  nature  to  such  de- 
gree that  none  of  them  shall  reach  the  de- 
structive point. 

The  thoroughly  Masterful  Man  is  he  who 
is  able  to  give  to  each  of  these  its  fullest  pos- 
sible    latitude,     within     Constructive     lines, 

224 


TEMPERANCE 

without  permitting  it  ever  to  pass  those  limi- 
tations. 

The  student  must  lay  hold  of  all  his  many 
selfish  desires  and  all  his  intellectual  ambi- 
tions. 

He  must  control  his  longing  for  mere  com- 
fort, whenever  indulgence  of  the  same  would 
deprive  another  of  the  comfort  to  which  he 
is  of  right  entitled. 

He  must  control  his  thirst  for  Power, 
whenever  and  wherever  its  indulgence  would 
involve  the  enslavement  or  control  of  his  fel- 
low man. 

He  must  control  his  Vanity  whenever  it 
impels  him  to  thrust  himself  forward  into 
place  or  position  to  which  another  is  better 
entitled,  or  which  he  himself  has  not  earned. 

He  must  control  the  impulse  of  Greed  for 
material  things,  and  compel  himself  to  be 
satisfied  with  a  just  and  proper  measure  nec- 
essary to  his  health,  well  being  and  reason- 
able comfort. 

He  must  control  the  "Love  of  Money," 
which  is  one  of  the  lowest  and  most  degrad- 
ing cravings  of  a  Soul,  and  constitutes  one 
of  the  strongest  fetters  that  bind  a  Soul  to 

225 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

earth  after  it  has  passed  beyond  the  Valley 
of  the  Shadow. 

He  must  control  the  Fear  that  paralyzes 
and  the  Anger  that  destroys. 

"Temperanxe"  is  the  remedy  for  all  hu- 
man excesses.  If  we  lived  temperately,  in  all 
things,  we  would  be  able  to  derive  from  every 
beneficence  of  Nature  nothing  but  GoOD,  and 
Good  to  its  full  limit— and  all  the  time. 

The  key-note  is  Temperance  in  all  things 
that  are  in  themselves  legitimate  and  proper. 


226 


CHAPTER  XXII 


INALIENABLE  RIGHTS 


We  all  recognize  the  fact  that  each  of  us, 
as  an  Individual  Intelligence  or  Soul,  has 
certain  Rights,  Privileges  and  Prerogatives, 
which  all  men  should  respect.  Whether  or 
not  they  do  so  respect  them  is  quite  another 
matter.  We  know  that  we  possess  them 
whether  they  are  respected  by  others  or  not. 
We  know  that  they  are  ours  as  a  part  of  our 
natural  inheritance  from  the  Great  Intelli- 
gence who  honored  us  with  the  distinction  of 
an  intelligent  individuality.  We  know  this 
because  they  are  necessary  to  our  individual 
existence  and  are  natural  concomitants  of  our 
being.  Our  existence  as  individualized  Intel- 
ligent Souls  would  have  no  meaning  without 
them. 

Among  these  are  the  Right  to  Individual 
Life,  Individual  Liberty,  and  the  Pursuit  of 
Individual  Happiness.  These  are  rights 
which   we    designate    as    "Inalienable,"    be- 


227 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

cause  wc  know  that  they  arc  those  which  no 
man  has  the  right  to  take  from  us.  No  man 
has  the  right  to  interfere  with  us  in  the  per- 
fect enjoyment  of  them,  so  long  as  we  on  our 
part  do  not  interfere  with  him  in  the  enjoy- 
ment of  the  same  Rights  in  his  own  behalf. 

A  broader  view  of  the  subject  transcends 
the  legitimate  scope  of  either  Sociology  or 
Civil  Government,  as  these  arc  generally 
considered  and  accepted  under  the  name  of 
'''Sciences."  It  is  to  this  broader  aspect  of 
the  subject  that  the  Ethical  Section  of  the 
Formulary  carries  us. 

There  is  a  principle  of  "Service"  which, 
from  the  standpoint  of  Soul  Growth  and 
Spiritual  Development,  far  transcends  any  of 
the  "Inalienable  Rights"  or  "Unavoidable 
Obligations,"  as  these  arc  generally  defined 
and  understood. 

Each  one  of  us  recognizes  his  own  In- 
alienable Right  to  Individual  Life.  The 
mere  right  to  live,  upon  which  wc  all  insist, 
and  upon  which  all  other  individual  achieve- 
ments necessarily  depend,  would  be  an  empty 
and  meaningless  heritage  if  mere  living  were 
the  goal  of  individual  attainment  or  of  indi- 


INALIENABLE  RIGHTS 

vidual  purpose.  The  man  who  is  so  busy 
"standing  on"  his  Right,  and  who  is  so  com- 
pletely absorbed  in  jealously  guarding  it 
from  the  encroachment  of  possible  trespassers 
that  he  has  no  time  left  for  using  it,  thereby 
makes  of  it  an  empty  treasure.  The  rarest 
jewel  in  the  world  would  only  make  of  its 
owner  an  ignoble  slave  if  its  value  so  im- 
pressed itself  upon  him  as  to  impel  him  to 
spend  all  his  life  in  the  selfish  effort  to  pre- 
vent the  rest  of  mankind  from  sharing  it  with 
him  or  in  any  manner  whatsoever  benefiting 
through  its  existence. 

The  broader  view  of  this  one  supreme  and 
Inalienable  Right  of  Individual  Existence 
is,  that  Life  itself  is  of  no  value,  either  to 
an  individual  or  to  the  world,  except  in  so 
far  as  it  is  made  a  life  of  Service  to  the  Cause 
of  Humanity.  From  this  point  of  vision  there 
is  something  vastly  more  important  to  be  ac- 
complished than  merely  to  "stand  upon  our 
Rights."  The  thing  most  devoutly  to  be 
sought,  is  not  a  method  of  repelling  by  force 
or  violence  those  who  would  otherwise  tres- 
pass upon  our  Inalienable  Right  to  Life,  but 
how  to  live  a  life  in  such  manner  as  to  ren- 

229 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

der  the  most  valuable  service  to  both  the  in- 
dividual and  society. 

An  individual  who  dedicates  his  life  to 
the  highest  and  best  Service  of  which  he  is 
capable  will  never  find  it  necessary  to  give 
either  time  or  thought  to  the  problem  of  his 
"Right  to  Life."  Neither  will  it  be  necessary 
for  him  to  trouble  himself,  except  in  the 
rarest  instances,  concerning  the  manner  in 
which  others  shall  "respect"  that  Right.  A 
life  of  Service  to  others  draws  unto  itself  all 
the  "respect"  and  all  the  "protection"  it  is 
possible  for  society,  with  few  exceptions,  to 
render  to  any  human  being. 

The  Inalienable  Right  of  Individual  Lib- 
erty is  one  which  every  intelligent  Soul  cher- 
ishes. But  the  kind  of  liberty  which  means 
nothing  more  than  merely  to  be  "let  alone" 
is  of  small  value  as  compared  with  the  lib- 
erty of  a  Soul  which  comes  from  a  life  of 
Service  in  the  Cause  of  Truth  and  Human- 
ity. Liberty  to  work  out  the  great  problem  of 
individual  life  and  destiny  according  to  the 
dictates  of  individual  Conscience,  is  worth 
vastly  more  to  any  Soul  than  the  liberty  to 
accumulate  material  possessions,  or  the  lib- 

230 


INALIENABLE  RIGHTS 

erty  to  enjoy  them  to  the  exclusion  of  those 
who  more  justly  deserve  them  or  more  great- 
ly need  them. 

An  individual  v^ho  is  intent  upon  a  life 
of  Service  to  others  need  not  be  troubled 
concerning  the  respect  v^ith  v^hich  his  fel- 
low^s  may  or  may  not  honor  his  inalienable 
Right  of  Individual  Liberty.  That  is  a 
matter  v^hich  w^ill  take  care  of  itself.  Such 
a  life,  w^ith  fev^  exceptions,  will  command 
all  the  "Liberty"  it  is  possible  for  society  to 
grant  or  secure  to  any  mortal.  The  Liberty 
which  men  find  it  necessary  to  "fight"  for  is 
seldom,  if  ever,  comparable  in  real  value 
with  that  which  their  fellows  will  freely 
grant  them  in  return  for  beneficent  services 
generously  rendered. 

The  right  of  every  individual  to  seek  his 
own  happiness  is  recognized  by  intelligent 
men  and  women  everywhere;  provided  he 
does  not  thereby  interfere  with  others  who 
are  making  the  same  search.  An  individual 
happiness  which  does  not  take  into  account 
also  the  happiness  of  others  seldom,  if  ever, 
rises  above  the  level  of  selfish  enjoyment. 
The  kind  or  quality  of  "happiness"  that  con- 

231 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

sists  in  being  ''let  alone"  to  do  whatsoever  his 
selfish  instincts  and  impulses  would  suggest, 
is  but  poorly  and  inadequately  named.  It  is 
as  far  below  the  level  of  real  Happiness  as 
the  instincts  of  the  animal  are  below  the 
inspirations  and  aspirations  of  the  most  ex- 
alted human  Soul. 

Whilst  it  is  important  that  each  Individual 
Intelligence  or  Soul  should  understand  and 
appreciate  his  Inalienable  Right  to  seek  for 
his  own  happiness,  it  is  of  far  greater  impor- 
tance that  he  learn  to  understand  and  appre- 
ciate the  profound  fact  of  Nature,  that  he 
will  never  find  it  alone.  Happiness  is  not  to 
be  found  in  loneliness.  It  is  the  natural  result 
of  the  harmonic  relation  between  two  indi- 
viduals of  opposite  polarity.  This  means 
that  true  Happiness  is  the  result  of  our  de- 
pendence upon  others,  and  not  our  inde- 
pendence of  them.  Happiness,  in  its  true 
sense,  is  one  of  the  things  which  Nature 
compels  us  to  share  with  others  whether 
we  will  or  not.  It  cannot  possibly  be  made 
an  exclusive  individual  possession.  An  in- 
dividual who  attempts  to  appropriate  it  in- 
evitably loses  it  or  fails  to  find   it.    To  the 

232 


INALIENABLE  RIGHTS 

greedy,  the  selfish,  the  ambitious  and  vain  it 
is  a  veritable  will-o'-the-wisp.  It  eludes  them, 
and  is  forever  just  beyond  their  grasp. 

It  is  only  when  a  Soul  turns  to  others 
with  a  cry  of  love  and  recognition  that  Hap- 
piness pauses  in  its  onward  flight.  True  Hap- 
piness is  the  result  of  Love  alone.  Perfect 
Happiness  is  the  result  of  the  perfect  Love 
relation.  There  are  no  substitutes.  It  is 
therefore  reciprocal  in  its  essential  nature.  It 
is  as  impossible  to  appropriate  it  as  it  is  to 
appropriate  companionship.  Two  individ- 
uals are  as  necessary  to  the  existence  of  Hap- 
piness as  the  two  elements  (Oxygen  and 
Hydrogen),  are  necessary  to  the  existence  of 
water. 

Thus  it  is  that  all  our  "Inalienable  Rights" 
are  but  empty  and  meaningless  titles  so  long 
as  we  attempt  to  "stand  upon"  them  in  such 
manner  as  to  appropriate  their  possible  bene- 
fits and  enjoyments  to  ourselves  alone.  It  is 
only  when  we  regard  them  and  employ  them 
as  implements  of  Service  to  our  fellows  that 
they  have  a  meaning  or  a  value  to  us  or  to 
them. 

The  only  legitimate  reason  or  excuse  for 

233 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

the  existence  of  an  "Inalienable  Right  to 
Life"  is  that  the  Life  shall  be  worth  it;  and 
the  only  Life  that  is  worth  anything  is  the 
life  of  Service  to  Humanity. 

This  does  not  mean  that  we  are  not  to 
"stand  upon  our  Rights''  whenever  and  wher- 
ever that  may  be  necessary  to  the  accomplish- 
ment of  a  just  and  upright  Life.  Nor  does  it 
mean  that  our  life  of  Service  shall  entirely 
exclude  ourselves  from  our  thoughts  nor  ig- 
nore our  benefits  as  a  part  of  the  purposes  to 
be  accomplished  by  the  Service.  It  does 
mean,  that  in  the  exercise  of  our  "Inalien- 
able Rights"  we  shall  ever  keep  in  mind  the 
"Rights  of  Others"  and  never  allow  our- 
selves to  trespass  upon  them.  It  means  also 
that  in  all  our  efforts  for  individual  un- 
foldmcnt  and  progress  we  are  never  to  lose 
sight  of  the  fact  that  each  one  of  us  consti- 
tutes a  unit  of  force  and  purpose  in  the  great 
Body  of  Humanity  of  which  we  are  a  part, 
and  that  we  owe  it  to  Society,  as  well  as  to 
ourselves,  to  be  a  healthy  unit  in  that  capacity 
and  to  render  to  Society  the  highest  measure 
of  healthful  Service  of  which  we  are  capable. 


2U 


CHAPTER  XXIII 


DUTIES  AND  OBLIGATIONS 


It  is  at  this  point  in  the  journey  along  the 
pathway  toward  Liberty  and  Light  that  so 
many  fail.  It  is  here  they  become  discour- 
aged and  turn  back,  to  join  the  merry  throng 
in  the  broad  highway  to  the  North.  It  is 
here  at  this  crucial  point  that  so  many  stop 
and  cry  out:  "It  is  too  hard!  The  path  is  too 
narrow!  The  way  is  too  difficult!" 

Duties  and  Obligations  and  Responsibil- 
ities, when  considered  from  a  psychological 
point  of  view,  may  be  classified  as: 

Active. 

Passive. 

An  active  Obligation  is  one  which  binds 
us  to  do  something.  A  passive  Obligation  is 
one  which  binds  us  to  refrain  from  doing 
something. 

All  honest  men  recognize  the  Obligation 
to  pay  their  just  debts.  This  is  an  Obligation 
which  binds  them  to  do  something.    It  calls 

23S 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

for  the  performance  of  a  specific  act.    This 
is  an  Active  Obligation. 

We  all  recognize  the  fact  that  we  are  un- 
der Obligation  to  refrain  from  doing  any- 
thing which  shall  intentionally  injure  or 
wrong  our  fellow  men.  This  is  an  Obligation 
not  to  do  something  which  it  is  within  our 
power  to  do.    This  is  a  Passive  Obligation. 

Duties  and  Obligations  bind  us: 

To  do  or  not  to  do  something  to  or  for  our 
selves. 

To  do  or  not  to  do  something  to  or  for  our 
fellow  men. 

From  tlic  standpoint  of  each  individual  they 
are  either  Subjective  or  Objective,  in  that  one 
class  concerns  only  ourselves  while  the  second 
class  concerns  others  than  ourselves. 

All  our  Duties,  Obligations  and  Respon- 
sibilities, simply  bind  us  "to  do  or  not  to  do," 
as  the  case  may  be. 

Every  Duty  or  Obligation,  in  its  final  anal- 
ysis, involves  either  "action"  or  "non-action." 

It  is  just  this  narrow  view  of  the  subject 
that  has  caused  so  much  uncertainty  and  con- 
fusion in  the  minds  of  men  the  world  over. 
By  thus  reducing  the  problem  to  a  basis  of 


DUTIES  AND  OBLIGATIONS 

mere  mechanics,  and  assuming  thereby  that 
"action"  and  "non-action"  are  all  that  is  in- 
volved in  the  performance  of  Duties,  the 
discharge  of  Obligations  and  the  fulfillment 
of  Responsibilities,  the  most  important  ele- 
ment  of    the   problem    is   entirely   omitted. 

Among  our  individual  acquaintances,  each 
bf  us  will  be  able  to  recall  one  or  more 
who  have  deeply  impressed  us  with  a  sense 
of  their  melancholy  martyrdom  to  Duty. 
There  are  comparatively  few  who  do  not,  to 
some  extent,  impress  us  with  the  feeling  that, 
to  them,  the  Duties  and  Obligations  and  Re- 
sponsibilities of  life  are  only  so  many  bur- 
dens imposed  upon  them  wrongfully  and  ar- 
bitrarily, by  Nature  or  their  fellow  man,  for 
the  express  purpose  of  inflicting  upon  them 
more  than  their  just  or  rightful  share  of  un- 
happiness  and  misery. 

What  a  rude  and  unwelcome  awakening 
awaits  all  those  who  measure  life  from  this 
somber  and  erroneous  viewpoint.  With  what 
a  cruel  shock  they  are  destined  some  day  to 
realize  the  profound  and  solemn  truth  that 
no  duty  ever  yet  was  performed  and  none 
ever  will  be  performed  by  a  human  being 

237 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

while  the  Soul  of  the  actor  is  filled  with  an- 
ger, bitterness,  hatred,  contempt,  aversion,  re- 
sentment, reluctance,  or  any  shade  of  protest. 

Nature  did  not  only  endow  us  with  "In- 
alienable Rights."  She  went  one  step  fur- 
ther. It  was  a  most  important  step,  too.  She 
at  the  same  time  fixed  upon  us  certain  con- 
comitant Obligations,  Duties  and  Respon- 
sibilities. 

These  Obligations,  Duties  and  Responsi- 
bilities are  just  as  truly  unavoidable  as  our 
Rights  are  inalienable.  They  bind  us  as  un- 
compromisingly as  our  Rights,  Privileges 
and  Prerogatives  bind  the  rest  of  mankind. 

Among  the  unavoidable  Obligations  which 
Nature  has  fixed  upon  every  Intelligent  Soul 
is  that  of  recognizing  and  respecting  the  "In- 
alienable Rights,  Privileges  and  Prerog- 
atives" of  every  other  Intelligent  Soul.  He 
is  bound  by  the  law  of  his  being  so  to  live 
his  own  Life,  enjoy  his  own  Liberty,  and 
pursue  his  own  Happiness  that  he  shall  not 
in  any  manner  whatsoever  endanger  the  Life, 
curtail  the  Liberty,  nor  destroy  the  Happi- 
ness of  any  other  human  being  who  is  doing 
the  same  thing. 

391 


CHAPTER  XXIV 


SPIRIT  OF  THE  WORK 


In  the  discharge  of  an  Obligation,  in  such 
manner  as  to  make  it  an  impulse  toward 
Spiritual  Unfoldment  and  Mastership,  the 
mechanical  act  necessary  to  do  the  thing  in- 
volved is  important,  but  it  is  not  the  most  im- 
portant thing  to  be  considered.  That  which  is 
primary  and  fundamental  is  the  Spirit  in 
conformity  with  which  the  mechanical  act 
must  be  done. 

The  Oriental  intelligence,  more  especially 
the  Hindu,  in  a  manner  that  is  entirely  con- 
sistent with  his  own  nature,  reaches  the  con- 
clusion that  "serenity,"  or  "tranquillity,"  ex- 
presses the  most  rapid  and  perfect  Spiritual 
Unfoldment.  He  endeavors  to  cultivate  se- 
renity and  tranquillity  in  the  midst  of  all  the 
conditions  and  experiences  of  life.  The  very 
spirit  of  Orientalism  is  serenity.  To  the 
Hindu  the  most  perfect  expression  of  Self- 
Control  is  that  of  serenity,  quiescence,  calm- 
239 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

ncss  and  poise.  He  is  taught  these  from  early 
infancy.  They  are  a  part  of  the  very  at- 
mosphere he  breathes.  They  arc  an  ever- 
present  prenatal  influence.  They  are  trans- 
mitted to  him  through  centuries  upon  cen- 
turies of  consistent  heredity.  From  infancy 
to  old  age  they  are  wrought  into  the  texture 
of  his  essential  being.  It  is  only  natural, 
therefore,  that  he  should  go  about  the  per- 
formance of  his  Duties  and  the  discharge  of 
his  Obligations  in  that  spirit  of  serenity  and 
tranquillity  which,  to  him,  expresses  the 
highest  attainment  of  Self-Control.  For  he 
knows  that  Self-Control  is  one  of  the  funda- 
mental keys  to  Spiritual  Unfoldment  and 
Mastership. 

There  was  a  time  within  the  history  of  the 
Great  School  when  Self-Control  was  re- 
garded as  the  one  and  only  key  to  Master- 
ship. In  a  deep  and  fundamental  sense  this  is 
true.  But  it  was  due  to  a  superficial  under- 
standing of  the  meaning  of  Self-Control  in 
its  spiritual  and  psychical  significance  that 
the  barbarous  systems  and  phases  of  Yogi 
practice  came  into  existence  among  certain  of 
the  Oriental  schools  of  religion  and  philos- 

240 


SPIRIT  OF  THE  WORK 

ophy.  It  was  due  to  this  misconception  of 
the  meaning  and  character  of  Self-Control  in 
its  relation  to  Independent  Spiritual  Un- 
foldment  that  the  most  cruel  and  needless 
physical  tortures  became  a  part  of  their  sys- 
tem of  discipline. 

A  somewhat  different  application  of  the 
same  general  misconception  of  the  true  mean- 
ing and  nature  of  Self-Control  is  responsible 
for  the  fundamental  and  distinguishing  fea- 
ture of  the  School  of  Stoicism.  The  ability 
so  to  exercise  the  power  of  Self-Control  as  to 
betray  no  evidence  of  emotion,  in  the  midst 
of  the  most  trying  experiences  of  life,  was 
held  to  be  the  crucial  test  of  a  Soul. 

Our  American  Indians  betray  the  same 
fundamental  error  in  the  barbarous  and  in- 
human tortures  to  which  they  subject  their 
physical  bodies  in  some  of  their  religious 
rites  and  ceremonials.  The  perfect  serenity 
and  tranquillity  with  which  they  suffer  their 
physical  bodies  to  be  torn  and  mutilated  is 
truly  an  evidence  of  remarkable  Will-Power 
and  wonderful  Self-Control. 

This  is  neither  the  kind  nor  the  quality  of 
Self-Control  demanded  of  the  Student  who 

241 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

is  in  search  of  Independent  Spiritual  De- 
velopment and  Mastership.  It  is  neither  a 
Duty  nor  an  Obligation  we  owe  to  ourselves 
nor  to  anyone  else  thus  to  mutilate  the  ma- 
terial instrument  of  the  Soul,  the  physical 
body,  through  which  alone  the  Intelligence 
may  express  itself  upon  the  plane  of  physical 
nature.  It  is  a  much  less  difficult  feat  of  a 
Soul  to  suffer  the  torture  of  the  flesh  or  even 
the  destruction  of  the  physical  body,  than  it 
is  so  to  train  and  develop  that  body  as  to 
make  it  a  perfect  instrument  for  the  Soul's 
expression,  an  instrument  that  is  at  all  times 
under  absolute  control  of  its  Master,  the  In- 
telligent Soul  that  inhabits  it. 

In  the  process  of  Independent  Spiritual 
Development  there  are  many  things  more 
difficult  to  attain  than  that  of  patiently  en- 
during physical  pain  or  bodily  suffering. 
The  proper  performance  of  some  of  our  sim- 
plest duties  of  life  often  calls  for  a  character 
of  Self-Control  superior  to  that  which  en- 
ables us  to  endure  with  patience  the  most  in- 
tense physical  suffering. 

Whilst  "Serenity"  and  "Tranquillity"  in 
the  discharge  of  all  our  personal  Obligations 

242 


SPIRIT  OF  THE  WORK 

are  attainments  devoutly  to  be  sought,  and  are 
correct,  as  far  as  they  go,  they  do  not  repre- 
sent the  highest  nor  the  best  there  is  in  the 
spirit  of  our  western  civilization,  nor  do  they 
co-ordinate  w^ith  the  activity  of  our  mental 
methods  and  processes.  While  it  is  true  that 
"Serenity"  has  become  almost  a  normal  con- 
dition of  the  Oriental  intelligence,  it  is  diffi- 
cult, even  in  thought,  to  associate  the  concept 
:with  a  people  w^hose  very  psychic  constitu- 
tion is  that  of  the  most  intense  activity. 

The  kind  of  "serenity"  for  which  we  must 
strive  is  not  the  serenity  of  stagnation  nor 
that  of  inertia.  It  must  be  the  serenity  of 
Action.  The  kind  of  "Tranquillity"  which 
alone  will  meet  the  demands  of  our  western 
psychological  momentum  is  the  tranquillity 
of  Motion. 

We  have  in  English  a  word  which  em- 
bodies all  these  psychological  demands.  It 
is  one  of  the  most  significant  and  important 
words  In  our  language.  It  is  one  whose 
psychological  potencies  and  possibilities  are 
but  dimly  sensed  by  the  masses  of  man- 
kind and  but  imperfectly  understood  by 
the  more  enlightened  students  of  psychology 

243 


THE  GREAT  \VORK 

and  searchers  after  spiritual  light  and  truth. 
It  is  one  in  such  common  use  that  its  orthog- 
raphy is  familiar  to  almost  every  man, 
woman  and  child  who  speaks  the  English 
language.  It  is  a  word  whose  spirit  and  mean- 
ing the  Master  Jesus  endeavored  to  impress 
upon  all  who  heard  his  words  of  instruction. 

In  its  psychological  analysis  it  might  well 
be  said  to  include  both  "serenity  in  action" 
and  "tranquillity  in  motion.''  It  combines  all 
the  elements  of  both  serenity  and  tranquillity 
in  combination  with  the  most  healthful  activ- 
ities of  a  thoroughly  awakened  consciousness. 
It  indicates  a  condition  or  status  of  a  Soul 
far  more  difficult  to  attain  and  hold  perma- 
nently than  that  of  either  tranquillity  or  se- 
renity, or  both  of  these  combined.  It  is,  in 
like  measure,  a  more  exalted  achievement  to 
set  before  the  aspiring  student,  and  when  at- 
tained it  carries  him  that  much  nearer  the 
goal  of  his  endeavors. 

To  carry  our  Responsibilities,  perform  our 
Duties  and  discharge  our  Obligations  at  all 
is  a  task  before  which  many  a  strong  man 
has  fallen.  It  is  one  before  which  any  man 
or   woman    might   pause   with    a    feeling   of 

244 


SPIRIT  OF  THE  WORK 

doubt  and  dread.  But  to  do  all  this  with  the 
Soul  forever  keyed  to  the  level  of  true  Spir- 
itual Unfoldment  is  even  a  more  difficult 
task.  It  is  at  the  same  time  a  more  exalted 
one.  It  calls  for  the  best  there  is  in  us.  It 
involves  a  character  of  Self-Control  of  which 
the  Oriental  Yogi,  the  ancient  Stoic,  the 
American  Indian  and  the  cloistered  monk 
have  never  so  much  as  dreamed.  Yet  it  is  that 
for  which  every  student  of  the  Great  School 
of  Natural  Science  must  strive  with  all  his 
power.  It  is  not  easy  of  accomplishment, 
but  it  is  within  the  bounds  of  human  achieve- 
ment. 

There  is  perhaps  no  point  within  the  lim- 
its of  the  Ethical  Section  where  so  many  fail 
as  here. 

The  discharge  of  almost  every  specific 
Obligation  calls  for  the  performance  of  some 
physical  act.  By  habit,  custom,  training,  edu- 
cation, environment,  heredity,  conscience, 
and  almost  every  other  influence  upon  us,  we 
have  come  to  regard  the  mere  physical  act  as 
the  only  thing  involved  in  the  Obligation. 
From  this  viewpoint  it  is  but  logical  as  well 
as  natural  that  we  should  look  upon  the  sim* 

245 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

pie  performance  of  the  act  itself  as  a  com- 
plete discharge  of  the  Obligation.  From  the 
viewpoint  of  the  Great  Work  of  Spiritual 
Unfoldment,  we  thereby  ignore  virtually  all 
there  is  of  vital  importance  in  the  problem. 

He  who  gives  grudgingly  the  crust  of 
bread  to  the  hungry  wayfarer  has  done  a 
physical  act,  but  he  has  performed  only  the 
smallest  part  of  his  Duty.  He  who  supplies 
the  material  necessities  of  the  home  grudg- 
ingly, or  with  reluctance,  or  in  the  spirit  of 
unkindness  or  protest,  has  accomplished  but 
an  empty,  naked  and  meaningless  act.  He 
has  not  performed  his  Duty.  She  who  pre- 
sides over  the  destinies  of  the  home,  even 
though  she  labor  early  and  late  to  meet  the 
multiplicity  of  demands  upon  her  time,  her 
thought  and  her  strength,  has  utterly  failed 
of  her  Duty  if  the  spirit  of  bitterness,  im- 
patience, protest  or  complaint  pervades  the 
Soul  and  casts  its  somber  shadow  over  the 
home.  How  many  husbands  are  there  today 
who,  in  actual  practice,  provide  the  material 
necessities  of  the  home  in  such  manner  as  to 
perform  the  Duty  and  discharge  the  Obliga- 
tion in  full  which  they  owe  to  those  who  are 

246 


SPIRIT  OF  THE  WORK 

of  right  dependent  upon  them?  How  many 
wives  are  there  today  who  meet  the  demands 
upon  them  in  such  manner  as  to  cast  no 
shadow  of  bitterness,  impatience,  protest  or 
complaint  over  the  home? 

How  many  men  and  women  are  there  to- 
day who  perform  their  Duties,  discharge 
their  Obligations  and  carry  the  burden  of 
their  Personal  Responsibilities  in  such  man- 
ner as  to  obtain  therefrom  the  highest  degree 
of  Constructive  Spiritual  Development  and 
the  fullest  measure  of  Psychic  Unfoldment 
of  which  they  are  capable?  It  is  not  possible 
to  answer  this  question  definitely,  but  it  is 
safe  to  conclude  that  the  number  is  compar- 
atively small. 

One  more  element  of  the  Formulary  enters 
into  the  "Spirit  of  the  Work"  from  which 
alone  our  Personal  Efforts  will  impel  us  for- 
ward in  the  direct  line  of  Constructive  Spir- 
itual Unfoldment. 

That  element  is  to  be  found  in  the  Spirit 
in  which  we  "stand  upon  our  Rights,"  per- 
form our  Duties,  discharge  our  Obligations, 
and  carry  the  burden  of  our  Personal  Re- 
sponsibilities. 

247 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

That  element  may  be  perfectly  expressed 
in  one  simple  every-day  English  word.  It 
will  be  observed  that  the  specific  word  has 
not  been  given.  The  omission  is  not  the  re- 
sult of  an  oversight.  It  is  entirely  intention- 
al. The  reader  is  entitled  to  know  why  so 
important  a  key  is  withheld  from  him. 

The  word  constitutes  the  "Official  An- 
swer" to  one  of  the  most  important  "Prob- 
lems'' of  the  Ethical  Section.  This  common 
little  word  gives  expression  to  what  might 
well  be  named  "The  Color  Scheme''  of  the 
Philosophy  of  Individual  Life.  It  gives  ex- 
pression to  that  which  lends  warmth,  beauty 
and  illumination  to  the  otherwise  hard  life 
of  "Duty,"  and  transforms  the  iron  chain  of 
"Obligation"  into  the  sparkling,  bejeweled 
golden  thread  of  "Privilege." 


CHAPTER  XXV 


SECOND  GREAT  MILE-POST 


Personal  Responsibility  is  the  second 
Great  Mile-Post  in  the  journey  of  ethical  un- 
foldment.  The  problem  is  one  which  in- 
volves an  entire  philosophy  of  life. 

It  is  as  much  and  as  truly  a  result  of  Nat- 
ural Law  as  is  Gravity,  or  Life  itself.  The 
individual  can  no  more  defy  this  law  and  at 
the  same  time  escape  its  natural  and  inevit- 
able consequences,  than  he  can  violate  any 
other  Law  of  Nature  without  having  to  suf- 
fer the  penalty  of  such  violation. 

Personal  Responsibility  rests  upon,  in- 
volves the  existence  of,  and  in  its  essential  na- 
ture is,  in  fact,  a  "Duty,"  a  "Liability,"  a 
"Burden,"  a  "Moral  Obligation."  This  is  one 
of  the  most  important  discoveries  ever  made 
by  human  intelligence,  because  it  constitutes 
the  essential  foundation  upon  which  rests  the 
entire  ethical  superstructure,  and  makes  the 
existence  of  Society  possible. 

2i9 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

In  order  that  it  may  have  any  meaning  or 
value  to  the  individual,  or  to  the  social  struc- 
ture of  which  he  is  an  integral  and  essential 
factor,  the  Duty,  or  Obligation,  must  be  both 
fixed  and  definite. 

One  of  the  gravest  and  most  vital  errors 
into  which  many  of  the  leading  intelligences 
in  the  fields  of  both  religion  and  philosophy 
have  fallen  in  their  attempted  solutions  of 
this  profound  problem,  is  the  mistake  of  as- 
suming that  the  Obligation,  or  Onus,  at  the 
foundation  of  Personal  Responsibility  is  in- 
definite and  changeable,  and  that  it  may  be 
shifted,  modified,  mitigated,  avoided,  or  even 
abrogated  and  set  aside  entirely,  at  the  Will 
and  pleasure  of  the  individual. 

Such  is  not  the  case.  It  is  both  fixed  and 
definite  in  its  application  to  each  and  every 
Individual  Intelligence.  More  than  this,  it 
is  automatic  in  its  action  and  self-adjusting, 
in  that  it  fits  itself  to  the  exact  status  and 
present  needs  of  each  individual. 

There  may  be  objections  and  protests  as  to 
the  accuracy  of  this  statement  (jf  the  Law  of 
Compensation,    and    of    the    immutable    and 

250 


SECOND  GREAT  MILE-POST 

irrevocable  nature  of  the  Law  of  Personal 
Responsibility. 

Some  may  protest  that  the  "wicked  do 
flourish."  It  is  not  impossible  that  some  of 
these  protestants  may  themselves  be  con- 
scious of  their  own  derelictions,  and  of  the 
fact  that  they  have  not  yet  been  "found  out." 
Then  again,  they  will  be  able  to  point  out  the 
fact  that  the  position  here  taken  is  not  sanc- 
tioned by  the  findings  of  Sociology,  or  the 
common  experiences  of  ordinary  social  life. 

A  certain  humorous  poet  was  not  so  far 
from  the  great  principle  when  he  jestingly 
put  it:  "We  must  make  the  penalty  fit  the 
crime."  For  in  the  marvelous  unfoldment 
of  Nature's  Law  of  Compensation  every  con- 
scious and  intentional  evasion  or  violation  of 
Personal  Responsibility  must  be  paid  for,  "to 
the  uttermost,"  either  here  or  in  the  great 
Hereafter. 

God,  or  Nature,  is  never  in  haste.  Their 
mills  grind  slowly,  but  they  grind  "exceed- 
ing fine."  Each  delinquent  is  given  ample 
time  to  "work  out  his  penalties"  under  the 
Law  of  Personal  Responsibility  —  which  is 

2S1 


Tin:  c;rf;at  work 

but  another  way  of  "working  out  his  own 
salvation." 

If  the  transgressor  shall  escape  the  swift 
penalties  of  man-made  laws,  or  the  condem- 
nation of  society,  or  even  the  pangs  of  accus- 
ing conscience,  for  an  entire  life-time,  still 
must  he  "come  to  judgment"  before  the 
Great  Tribunal  of  outraged  Nature,  and  in 
accordance  with  the  immutable  Justice  of 
the  Universal  Law  Maker  he  must  work  out 
his  Sins  of  both  Omission  and  Commission, 
even  to  the  uttermost. 

In  the  Tribunal  of  Nature  he  is  in  a  Court 
of  Absolute  Justice,  from  whose  jurisdiction 
there  are  no  possible  changes  of  venue, 
against  whose  Decrees  there  are  no  injunc- 
tions nor  stays  of  execution,  and  from  whose 
Judgments  there  are  no  appeals. 

Any  Duty  or  Obligation,  in  order  that  it 
may  have  binding  force  and  effect,  must  be 
fixed  upon  an  individual  by  adequate  au- 
thority. It  is  the  contemplation  of  this  spe- 
cific phase  of  the  great  problem  that  the  stu- 
dent is  compelled,  whether  he  wills  it  or  not, 
to  take  note  of  the  fact  that  there  is  in  Nature 

252 


SECOND  GREAT  MILE-POST 

an  Intelligence  which  is  entirely  adequate  to 
meet  the  demands  of  absolute  authority. 

The  more  profoundly  we  study  the  prob- 
lem of  Personal  Responsibility  and  Moral 
Accountability  and  the  more  critically  we 
analyze  it  in  all  its  many  phases,  the  more 
conclusive  the  fact  becomes  that  the  Duty, 
or  Obligation,  or  Burden  at  its  foundation  is 
one  which  was  never  fixed  nor  imposed  upon 
mankind  by  man  himself.  If  there  were  no 
other  evidence  on  which  to  base  the  truth  of 
this  statement,  its  conclusiveness  is  estab- 
lished by  the  simple  fact  that,  although  man 
intuitively  recognizes  the  existence  of  the 
Duty,  Burden,  or  Obligation,  he  nevertheless 
deliberately  and  persistently  refuses  to  ac- 
knowledge its  binding  force  and  effect  just  as 
long  as  he  is  able  to  find,  manufacture  or  in- 
vent an  excuse  that  will,  even  in  part,  relieve 
the  aching  of  a  troubled  conscience. 

Even  after  he  has  been  literally  driven,  by 
sheer  force  of  an  intelligent  and  wakeful 
Consciousness,  to  see  and  acknowledge  it  as  a 
fact  of  Nature,  he  is  still  impelled  to  run 
from  it  as  long  as  he  has  any  hope  of  evading 
or  avoiding  it. 

253 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

There  is  no  man  living  who  has  the  intel- 
ligence, the  courage  and  the  perseverance  to 
follow  the  subject  to  its  legitimate  conclusion 
but  will  find  himself,  sooner  or  later,  driven 
into  a  corner,  a  psychological  trap,  from 
which  there  is  no  possibility  of  escape. 

When  every  trick  of  inventive  genius  and 
intelligent  sophistry  has  been  tried  in  vain; 
when  every  avenue  of  possible  escape  has 
been  cut  off;  when  he  finds  himself  at  bay 
with  every  weapon  of  both  offense  and  de- 
fense shattered  and  broken;  when  he  is  thus 
finally  and  inevitably  compelled  to  turn  and 
face  the  great  problem  on  its  merits,  he  finds 
that  the  Duty,  the  Onus,  or  the  Obligation  at 
the  basis  of  Personal  Responsibility  is  inher- 
ent in  his  own  essential  being.  Then  it  is  he 
is  compelled  to  observe  that  it  is  something 
which  goes  back  of  his  own  Independent  In- 
telligence and  voluntary  powers,  and  is  re- 
ferable alone  to  the  Source  and  Author  of  his 
being  for  its  inception. 

When  we  have  come  to  realize  the  mean- 
ing and  the  magnitude  of  this  profound  truth 
in  its  relation  to  our  status  as  individualized. 
Intelligent  Souls,  we  stand  for  the  first  time 

251 


SECOND  GREAT  MILE-POST 

with  Soul  uncovered,  as  it  were,  face  to  face 
with  the  Great  Architect  of  our  being.  Then 
it  is  that  our  desire  and  impulse  to  run  from 
the  underlying  truth  of  the  great  problem 
vanishes  forever.  Then  it  is  we  come  to  real- 
ize with  irresistible  force  that  the  thing  we 
have  been  trying  to  escape,  and  from  which 
we  have  been  running,  is  an  essential  part  of 
ourselves.  When  this  fact  dawns  upon  us 
clearly  and  unmistakably,  we  are  then  able  to 
realize  how  futile  is  all  our  running  away, 
for  it  is  but  an  effort  to  run  away  from  our- 
selves. Then  it  is  that  we  are  able  to  under- 
stand and  appreciate  how  foolish  and  vain 
are  all  our  efforts  to  escape  from  or  in  any 
manner  avoid  that  which  God,  or  Nature, 
has  fixed  upon  us  as  one  of  the  very  funda- 
mental elements  which  lift  us  above  the  plane 
of  the  animal  and  make  us  what  we  are,  Man. 

The  chief  psychological  distinction  be- 
tween man  and  the  animal  is  in  the  funda- 
mental fact  that  the  animal  does  not  rise  to 
the  level  of  Moral  Accountability,  while 
man  does. 

The  animal  has  no  moral  status,  while  man 
has.   The  animal  is  exempt  from  the  obliga- 

255 


THE  GRKAT  WORK 

tions  of  individual  responsibility,  while  man 
is  not. 

Why  is  the  animal  not  a  responsible,  indi- 
vidual intelligence?  Why  has  he  not  risen  to 
the  level  of  moral  accountability? 

It  is  because  the  animal  nature  and  devel- 
opment are  devoid  of  the  Soul  attributes — 
those  faculties,  capacities  and  powers — upon 
which  individual  responsibility  depends.  If 
the  animal  possessed  these  attributes  of  the 
Soul  he  would  be  both  individually  respon- 
sible and  morally  accountable  under  the  law 
of  his  being.  Without  them  he  is  neither  in- 
dividually responsible  nor  morally  account- 
able. 

It  would  almost  appear  that  in  the  stupen- 
dous scheme  of  evolution  Nature,  or  Univer- 
sal Intelligence,  has  been  engaged  in  a 
process  of  evolving  an  order  of  intelligence 
upon  which  it  could  shift  the  burden  of  in- 
dividual responsibility  for  its  acts  and  con- 
duct beyond  that  point.  In  Man  it  has 
achieved  that  end. 

Whatever  Personal  Responsibility  may  be 
in  essence,  it  is  something  which  all  men 
agree  upon  as  one  of  the  profoundly  impor- 

256 


SECOND  GREAT  MILE-POST 

tant  facts  of  Nature.  All  men  agree  that, 
whatever  it  may  be  in  essence,  it  binds  hu- 
manity because  it  is  a  part  of  man's  estate. 
//  binds  him  because  he  is  a  Man,  and  he  is 
a  Man  because  it  binds  him.  The  two  are 
inseparable.  Man  would  be  no  longer  Man 
if  the  element  of  Personal  Responsibility 
were  taken  out  of  his  being. 
This  makes  clear  one  fundamental  fact: 
Man  is  bound  by  the  Law  of  Personal  Re- 
sponsibility because  of  his  essential  constitu- 
tion. But  it  is  his  constitution  that  makes  him 
Man.  By  changing  his  essential  constitution, 
if  such  things  were  possible,  it  might  be  that 
he  could  be  taken  out  from  under  the  opera- 
tion of  the  Law.  But  that  which  would 
change  his  essential  constitution  would  at  the 
same  time  transform  him  into  something  else 
than  Man.  For  a  Man  without  the  essential 
constitution  of  a  Man  is  no  longer  a  Man.  It 
would  therefore  seem  clear  that  it  is  some- 
thing in  Man's  inherent  being  that  makes 
him  Personally  Responsible,  that  he  was  Per- 
sonally Responsible  from  the  beginning  of 
his  "manhood,"  and  that  he  will  so  remain 
while  he  continues  to  be  Man. 

257 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

It  has  been  the  work  of  the  best  minds  of 
all  ages  to  determine  with  scientific  accuracy 
exactly  what  it  is  within  the  essential  being 
of  Man  upon  which  his  Personal  Responsi- 
bility and  his  Moral  Accountability  depend. 
It  has  been  determined  that  these  are  directly 
related  to  and  dependent  upon  those  attri- 
butes of  human  nature  which  we  designate  as 
"Soul  Attributes."  These  are  the  attributes 
which  are  distinctively  "Human"  in  their  es- 
sential nature,  and  distinguish  man  from  all 
the  rounds  of  animal  life  and  intelligence 
below  the  human. 

The  accompanying  diagram  will  help  to 
fix  the  subject  more  definitely  in  mind.  It 
will  also  answer  a  number  of  other  interest- 
ing and  important  questions  that  are  likely  to 
arise.  Special  attention  is  called  to  it  with 
the  added  suggestion  that  it  be  made  the  sub- 
ject of  the  most  thoughtful  and  critical 
study. 

This  brings  us  to  the  consideration  of  a 
theme  that  cannot  fail  to  be  of  the  deepest 
and  most  profound  interest  to  every  intelli- 
gent student  and  thinker  who  has  ever  given 
the  subject  his  consideration.   This  should  be 

258 


SECOND  GREAT  MILE-POST 


AN  INDIVIDUAL 

INTELLIGENCE 

g 

8 

P 

z 

r« 

c« 

< 

n 

o 

o 

r" 

a 

H 

c« 

Z 

O 
z 

CO 

CO 

^— *^^^^ 

^^^ 

7^ 

z 
o 

> 

H 

O 
Z 

n 
o 

z 

CO 

n 
o 

w 

w 
z 

a 
w 

> 

3 

> 

CD 

> 

c5 

z 

<; 

< 

fi 

Crt 

H 

w 

W 

W      > 

5^       r^ 

c    a 

ow^> 

l-lhH 

2      =» 

S       a 

a      a 

">  3  S'o 

S  5 

l^'l 

III. 

o       a 

m 

c   2- 

M 

1      ^ 

n         CL 

a 

3    w    n 

o 

5' 

0. 

1 

■^"^ 

t^ 

W 

W 

<5 

l-H 

M 

1—4 

z 

z 

0 

0 

o> 

t>H 

w 

t^ 

3 

ONiaa  ONiAn 

aiaiSNOdsa^  v 

259 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

true  regardless  of  the  School  of  thought  in 
which  he  has  received  his  education,  or  of 
the  religion  with  which  he  may  be  identified, 
or  of  the  particular  church  to  which  he  may 
belong. 

It  is  possible  that  this  thought  may  be  new 
to  some  of  those  who  shall  read  these  pages. 
If  so,  it  doubtless  will  come  to  them,  as  it  has 
to  others,  with  an  indescribable  shock,  a  feel- 
ing of  profound  regret  that  such  a  thought, 
even  if  true,  should  ever  find  utterance. 
There  are  those,  no  doubt,  whose  natural  re- 
luctance to  accept  such  an  interpretation  of 
religious  history  will  stimulate  them  to  active 
researches  in  the  hope  of  disproving  it.  Such 
as  these  will  find  themselves  not  only  aston- 
ished but  humiliated  to  find  how  conclusive- 
ly the  proposition  is  demonstrated  by  the 
evidences  that  are  accessible. 

The  history  of  all  dogmatic  and  "re- 
vealed" RELIGIONS  IS,  IN  TRUTH,  BUT  A  HIS- 
TORY OF  MAN'S  ENDEAVORS  TO  DISCOVER  OR  IN- 
VENT SOME  PLAN,  OR  SCHEME,  OR  METHOD 
WHEREBY  HE  MAY  SHIRK  HIS  PERSONAL  RE- 
SPONSIBILITY, OR  SHIFT  IT  TO  OTHER  SHOUL- 
DERS THAN  HIS  OWN,  OR  IN  SOME  MANNER 
260 


SECOND  GREAT  MILE-POST 

ESCAPE  THE  NATURAL  CONSEQUENCES  OF  ITS 
CONSCIOUS  AND  INTENTIONAL  EVASION  OR 
VIOLATION. 

The  Great  School  of  the  Masters  discov- 
ered many  thousands  of  years  ago,  that  Per- 
sonal Responsibility  is  a  fixed  and  immutable 
Principle  of  Nature  and  a  Law  of  Individ- 
ual Life,  and  that  there  are  no  substitutes  nor 
antidotes  for  it.  They  learned,  long  ages  ago, 
that  there  is  absolutely  no  plan  or  method 
possible  whereby  Individual  Intelligence 
may  avoid  it  or  evade  it  or  escape  the  nat- 
ural results  of  its  personal  application  to  each 
and  every  Intelligent  Soul. 

Having  once  determined  the  reality  of  this 
great  Law  of  Individual  Life,  they  wisely 
turned  their  attention  to  its  careful  study  and 
critical  analysis  in  an  effort  to  determine  the 
exact  nature,  scope  and  purpose  of  the  Obli- 
gation which  God,  or  Nature,  has  therein  and 
thereby  fixed  upon  man  as  an  Individual  In- 
telligence. 

Unlike  mankind  in  general,  they  have  not 
sought  for  knowledge  of  the  great  problem 
of  Personal  Responsibility  in  the  hope  of 
finding  or   developing   a   clever   method   of 

261 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

evading  the  Law  of  Life  back  of  it.  They 
have  sought  to  understand  the  meaning  and 
intent,  the  spirit  and  purpose  of  the  Law, 
only  that  they  might  the  more  intelligently 
and  fully  comply  with  its  requirements  in 
spirit  and  in  truth.  They  have  come  to  real- 
ize that  only  by  the  most  cheerful  acquies- 
cence in  and  compliance  with  the  Law  of 
Personal  Responsibility  is  it  possible  for  the 
individual  ever  to  align  himself  with  the 
Constructive  Principle  of  Nature  in  Individ- 
ual Life,  and  proceed  onward  and  upward 
along  the  pathway  of  individual  evolution. 

Once  understanding  the  real  nature  and 
meaning  of  Personal  Responsibility,  it  would 
seem  impossible  that  anyone  in  the  indepen- 
dent possession  of  his  intelligent  attributes 
and  powers  ever  should  knowingly  and  inten- 
tionally conspire  to  overrule,  set  aside,  or 
abrogate  the  law,  when  to  attempt  such  a 
thing  is  as  truly  an  act  of  self-destruction  as 
is  the  act  of  suicide.  Yet,  such  is  the  perver- 
sity of  human  nature  that  these  inconsistent 
and  seemingly  impossible  things  are  being 
done  constantly;  and  this,  too,  by  men  and 
women  who  profess  to  know  the  law  and  to 


SECOND  GREAT  MILE-POST 

understand  the  meaning  of  its  intentional 
violation,  and  the  nature  of  its  penalties. 

Those  who  desire  to  follow  the  subject  to 
its  legitimate  conclusion,  independently  of 
this  work,  will  be  able  to  satisfy  themselves 
that  the  dogmatic  and  "revealed"  religions 
of  the  past  have  grown  out  of  and  developed 
from  three  very  simple  psychological  facts 
of  human  nature: 

Man's  intuitive  and  imperfect  recognition 
of  the  Obligation  which  God,  or  Nature,  has 
fixed  upon  him  as  an  Individual  Intelli- 
gence, to  conform  his  life  to  the  Constructive 
Principle  of  Nature. 

His  unwillingness  to  be  bound  by  that  obli- 
gation, or  to  discharge  his  Personal  Re- 
sponsibility under  it. 

His  determination  to  find,  or  invent  some 
plan,  system,  method  or  scheme  whereby  he 
may  be  able  to  shift  the  burden  of  his  Per- 
sonal Responsibility  back  upon  his  Creator 
(at  any  rate,  upon  other  shoulders  than  his 
own),  or,  failing  in  this  as  a  fully  accom- 
plished fact,  then  to  present  to  the  world  at 
large  so  plausible  an  excuse  or  so  clever  a 
pretense  as  to  convey  to  others  the  impres- 

263 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

sion  that  he  has  actually  done  so,  or  that  he 
honestly  believes  he  has  done  so. 

In  either  of  these  events,  he  know^s  that  he 
can  safely  rely  upon  an  indulgent  public  to 
see  that  he  is  permitted  to  go  on  doing  as  he 
pleases  instead  of  as  his  Personal  Responsi- 
bility would  compel  him  to  do;  because  he 
knows  that,  for  the  most  part,  society  is  made 
up  of  men  and  women  who  are  just  as  anx- 
ious as  he  is  to  find  an  easy  and  harmless  sub- 
stitute for  Personal  Responsibility. 


264 


CHAPTER  XXVI 


The  familiar  doctrine  of  the  "Atonement," 
or  the  "Christian  Scheme  of  Salvation,"  as 
this  has  come  to  be  interpreted  and  taught 
by  many  of  our  modern  students  and  profes- 
sors of  religion  (who  regard  themselves  as 
followers  of  the  Master  Jesus,  and  who  for 
this  reason  call  themselves  "Christians"), 
is  looked  upon  as  a  carefully  planned,  delib- 
erately executed  and  generously  devised 
Scheme  whereby  the  Great  Creator  of  the 
Universe  has  made  it  possible  for  as  many  as 
accept  the  conditions  therein  specified,  to 
escape  the  natural  and  otherwise  inevitable 
consequences  of  their  sins,  and  thus  evade  or 
avoid  their  Personal  Responsibility. 

The  story  as  it  has  come  down  to  us,  is: 

Man  was  originally  created  in  the  image 

of  his  Maker.    He  was  made  a  sinless  and 

perfect  being.   He  was  placed  in  the  Garden 

of  Eden.    He  was  given  dominion  over  the 

265 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

beasts  of  the  field  and  the  fowls  of  the  air. 
But  he  was  tempted,  and  notwithstanding  his 
original  purity  and  perfection,  he  "fell"  be- 
fore the  very  first  temptation  offered  him. 
He  sinned.  He  thus  fell  into  the  ways  of  sin, 
and  from  that  time  to  the  present  he  has  been 
and  still  remains  the  same  sinful  and  sinning 
creature,  in  the  midst  of  this  world  of  sin  and 
sorrow  and  death.  All  this  came  to  pass  not- 
withstanding the  fact  that  he  was  originally 
created  a  sinless  and  perfect  being. 

His  omniscient  Creator  was  compelled  to 
observe  that  by  reason  of  his  fall  into  sin  man 
had  violated  his  Personal  Responsibility.  He 
thereby  forfeited  his  immortality,  his  right 
to  "Eternal  Life."  His  omniscient  Creator 
further  observed  that  unless  something  were 
done  to  mitigate,  modify  or  counteract  this 
deplorable  result  of  the  original  Law  of  Life, 
man  would  be  forever  "lost,"  in  which  event 
his  creation  would  have  been  a  failure.  It 
therefore  became  necessary  to  revise  the  orig- 
inal scheme,  or  at  least  to  devise  some  plan 
whereby  fallen  man  might  be  "saved"  from 
the  natural  consequences  of  his  sin  and  folly. 

Accordingly,   Jesus    Christ,    by   many   re- 

266 


ATONEMENT 

garded  as  "The  only  begotten  Son  of  God," 
took  upon  himself  voluntarily  to  come  to 
earth,  here  to  minister,  to  suffer  and  to  die  an 
ignominious  death,  as  a  voluntary  personal 
"sacrifice"  for  the  sins  of  the  world,  in  order 
that  man  might  be  restored  to  his  lost  estate 
and  "have  eternal  life." 

This  supplemental  plan  of  the  Creator,  as 
it  is  understood  and  believed  by  those  who 
call  themselves  Christians,  constitutes  what, 
to  them,  is  the  "Plan  of  Redemption."  It  is 
the  "Great  Propitiation,"  the  "Vicarious 
Atonement."  From  the  theological  point  of 
view  it  was  "The  sacrifice  of  Christ  as  a  sub- 
stitute for  the  penalties  incurred  by  sinners." 
In  this  is  embodied  what  is  known  today  as 
"The  Christian  Plan  of  Salvation." 

The  profoundly  interesting  and  significant 
thing  in  all  this  is  that  the  Christian  doctrine 
and  dogma  of  Salvation,  as  it  finds  interpre- 
tation and  expression  today,  unqualifiedly 
and  unequivocally  recognizes  and  is  based 
upon  the  fundamental  fact  that  according  to 
the  original  plan  of  creation  man  was 
brought  into  this  mundane  existence  charged 
with  the  burden  of  Personal  Responsibility. 

267 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

He  was  a  creature  of  the  great  Law  of  Life. 
He  was  bound  by  that  Law.  But  he  was  also 
given  the  power  of  Independent  Choice.  He 
could  obey  the  law  or  he  could  transgress  it. 
This  was  a  matter  of  his  Independent  Choice. 
If  he  obeyed  the  Law  he  would  remain  a 
"sinless  and  perfect  being."  If  he  trans- 
gressed it  he  thereby  committed  a  "Sin"  and 
at  once  became  a  "sinful  creature." 

The  responsibility  was  placed  upon  him. 
It  was  a  Personal  Responsibility.  He  elected 
to  "transgress  the  Law."  In  so  doing  he  vio- 
lated his  Personal  Responsibility  under  the 
Law.  It  was  this  "transgression  of  the  Law" 
;(I  John,  iii,  4),  this  violation  of  his  Personal 
Responsibility  under  the  Law,  that  consti- 
tuted his  first  "sin." 

It  will  be  seen  that  it  was  solely  because 
of  his  Personal  Responsibility  that  it  ever  be- 
came possible  for  him  to  commit  the  fir^ 
"sin"  and  thus  "fall"  from  his  original  state 
of  "purity  and  perfection." 

If  the  reader  is  curious  to  know  how  it  is 
possible  for  a  "perfect  being"  to  commit  a 
sin,  or  to  "fall"  in  the  manner  hereinbefore 
indicated,    he   is   asked   kindly  to   remember 

268 


ATONEMENT 

that  the  Great  School  of  the  Masters  has 
never  alleged  nor  even  intimated  that  he 
could.  If  he  would  unravel  so  profound  a 
mystery  or  obtain  an  explanation  of  so  in- 
teresting and  so  strange  a  paradox,  he  is  re- 
spectfully referred  to  those  who  are  respon- 
sible for  the  promulgation  of  such  a  "doc- 
trine," or  the  invention  of  such  an  idea. 

The  Great  School  of  the  Masters  does 
not  know  very  much  about  just  how  man 
originally  came  into  existence.  It  does  not 
claim  to  know  definitely  whether  he  is  the 
product  of  "Special  Creation,"  or  the  result 
of  the  "Law  of  Evolution."  It  therefore  does 
not  know  nor  claim  to  know  just  what  he  was 
like  in  his  inception.  It  does  not  know 
whether  he  was  a  "sinless  and  perfect"  being 
or  whether  he  was  then  what  he  seems  to  be 
now,  an  intelligent  entity  in  a  state  of  evolu- 
tionary unfoldment,  with  unlimited  possibil- 
ities ahead  of  him.  It  does  not  know 
whether  he  "fell  into  sin,"  or  whether  he 
simply  has  not  yet  evolved  out  of  it.  Nor 
is  it  deeply  concerned  about  these  ultimate 
and  abstruse  problems.  It  would  be  grati- 
fied, of  course,  to  know  the  truth  about  them 

269 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

if  the  truth  were  available.  But  until  that 
time  shall  come  it  is  content  to  give  its  time, 
its  thought  and  its  effort  to  the  more  imme- 
diate and  vital  problem  of  enlarging  the 
boundaries  of  human  knowledge  and  thus 
helping  man  to  make  the  best  of  his  present 
opportunities,  and  inspiring  him  to  greater 
effort  in  his  evolutionary  struggle  toward 
Liberty  and  Light  and  toward  the  goal  of  in- 
dividual Happiness. 

Its  purpose  in  calling  attention  to  the  mod- 
ern doctrine  of  "Salvation  through  Christ"  is 
to  emphasize  the  important  fact  that  therein 
the  law  of  Personal  Responsibility  is  recog- 
nized and  acknowledged  as  a  part  of  God's 
original  working  plan.  It  is  also  an  interest- 
ing observation,  that  the  beneficent  religions 
and  moral  philosophies  of  all  times  and  of 
all  peoples  have  recognized  the  same  great 
fundamental  principle  of  life. 


270 


CHAPTER  XXVII 


ATTITUDE  OF  SOUL 


The  next  regular  step  in  the  unfoldment 
of  the  Ethical  Section  brings  us  to  a  subject 
of  the  most  absorbing  interest  and  practical 
utility.  It  has  reference  to  the  Attitude  of 
Soul  toward  all  we  do  and  endeavor  to  ac- 
complish in  the  Living  of  a  Life. 

Through  the  process  of  scientific  experi- 
mentation it  has  been  discovered  that  Inde- 
pendent Spiritual  Development,  from  the 
viewpoint  of  the  student's  own  voluntary  and 
intelligent  part  in  it,  is  very  largely  depen- 
dent upon  two  things: 

His  ATTITUDE  OF  SOUL. 

His  voluntary  PERSONAL  EFFORT  in  definite 
and  specific  lines  that  are  consistent  with  that 
Attitude  of  Soul. 

The  Attitude  of  Soul  necessary  to  Indepen- 
dent Spiritual  Growth,  is  one  which  involves 
a  number  of  diflFerent  elements.  One  of  these 
elements    is    that    kind    of    "Unselfishness" 

271 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

which  impels  an  individual  to  i^ive  as  freely 
as  he  receives.  It  stimulates  in  him  an  honest 
and  earnest  desire  and  purpose  to  render  to 
his  fellow  men  a  just  equivalent  for  all  he  re- 
ceives from  them,  whether  in  the  realm  of 
physical,  spiritual,  psychical  or  ethical  na- 
ture. 

There  is  a  definite  and  specific  ATTITUDE 
OF  SOUL  at  which  every  student  must  arrive 
before  it  is  possible  for  him,  consciously,  in- 
telligently and  voluntarily  to  open  the  chan- 
nels of  spiritual  sense  and  make  the  personal 
demonstration  of  another  life,  or  exercise  the 
powers  of  a  Master.  The  Ethical  Sec- 
tion of  the  Formulary,  taken  as  a  whole, 
is  an  expression  of  that  Attitude  of  Soul. 
It  is  an  expression  of  the  elements  and 
principles  by  the  application  of  which  the 
student  may  attain  to  that  Attitude  of  Soul. 
One  by  one  these  elements  and  principles  are 
laid  before  him  for  his  consideration.  Each 
one  of  these  constitutes  an  essential  factor  in 
the  problem  he  is  endeavoring  to  solve.  It  re- 
quires the  entire  Formulary  for  the  Ethical 
Section,  and  all  the  elements  and  principles 
it  involves,  to  enable  the  student  to  put  him- 

272 


ATTITUDE  OF  SOUL 

self  into  the  right  Attitude  of  Soui  for  that 
which  lies  out  beyond  the  Ethical  Section, 
namely,  the  Technical  Work.  It  is  not 
enough  that  he  should  merely  know  these  ele- 
ments and  principles  in  their  individual  as- 
pect. 

He  must  know  them  so  thoroughly  and  so 
intimately  in  all  their  relations  that  when  he 
has  completed  the  Ethical  Section  of  the 
Formulary  he  shall  be  able  to  co-ordinate 
them  all  in  their  relation  to  himself  and  to 
each  other  and  adjust  himself  to  them  in  their 
aggregate  sense.  It  is  in  this  final  adjustment 
to  the  demands  of  the  Formulary  as  a  whole 
that  he  attains  the  right  ATTITUDE  OF  SOUL 
which  is  at  the  basis  of  all  Constructive  Spir- 
itual Unfoldment. 

It  is  only  when  the  student  has  reached  this 
Attitude  of  Soul  that  he  has  complied  with 
the  demands  of  scientific  Morality.  It  is 
only  when  he  has  attained  to  this  status  that 
he  can  be  accounted  a  "Moral"  man  in  the 
sense  which  this  work  demands. 

Self-Control  is  one  of  the  elements  which 
enters  into  the  Attitude  of  Soul  under 
consideration.     It  is  one  of  the  most  impor- 

273 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

tant  achievements  of  the  student  in  his  strug- 
gle for  Spiritual  Independence  and  Master- 
ship. It  is  at  the  same  time  one  of  the  most 
difficult  tasks  set  by  Nature  for  Individual 
Intelligence  in  its  evolutionary  struggle. 

Its  fundamental  importance,  as  an  Ethical 
Problem,  is  in  the  fact  that  it  is  so  vitally 
related  to  all  the  other  elements  of  the 
Formulary.  In  some  form  or  phase,  every 
achievement  of  a  Soul,  from  the  standpoint 
of  Independent  Spiritual  Development,  is 
dependent  upon  the  individual  Power  of 
Sclf-Control  and  upon  the  exercise  of  that 
power  in  the  living  of  a  life  in  conformity 
with  the  Constructive  Principle  of  Nature. 

This  is  the  one  element  which  differenti- 
ates most  clearly  and  distinctly  between  the 
Subjective  and  the  Independent  Methods  of 
Spiritual  Development.  It  is  the  presence  of 
this  element  in  the  Formulary  that  makes  the 
process  Independent  and  Constructive.  It  is 
the  absence  of  this  element  from  the  hypnotic 
and  mediumistic  formulary  that  makes  the 
process  both  Subjective  and  Destructive. 

This  fact  alone  should  suggest  the  vital  and 
fundamental  nature  of  Self-Control  as  an  ele- 

274 


ATTITUDE  OF  SOUL 

merit  of  the  Ethical  Section  of  the  Formu- 
lary. It  is  one  which  must  not  be  overlooked 
by  the  student  who  is  seeking  for  spiritual 
knowledge  along  Constructive  lines.  Judg- 
ing from  the  manner  in  which  the  subject  has 
been  and  is  treated  by  the  various  cults  and 
schools  of  psychology,  it  would  seem  that 
there  is  no  single  point  or  problem  within  the 
realm  of  psychological  inquiry  concerning 
which  there  is  so  much  confusion  and  contra- 
diction as  that  of  Self-Control  and  the  rela- 
tion it  sustains  to  Spiritual  Unfoldment.  This 
is  due  to  the  effort  of  weak  human  nature  to 
discover  or  invent  some  system  of  ethics  or 
code  of  life  which  will  excuse  an  individual 
from  the  necessity  of  Self-Control  and  enable 
him  to  offer  to  the  world  a  seemingly  accept- 
able reason  why  he  should  be  permitted  to 
indulge  himself  without  restraint. 

There  is  no  such  thing  as  Soul  Growth 
without  Personal  Effort.  It  will  be  clear  to 
the  student  who  has  followed  the  theme 
closely  to  this  point,  that  Effort  alone  is  not 
sufficient.  It  requires  Unselfish  Effort.  This 
means  Effort  which  has  for  its  object  benefit 
to  others  as  well  as  to  Self.    In  other  words, 

275 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

we  come  back  again  to  the  Attitude  of  Soul 
which  is  necessary  to  Independent  Spiritual 
Unfoldment.  And  it  is  found  that  the  altru- 
istic impulse  is  one  of  the  essential  elements 
that  enters  into  that  Attitude  of  Soul. 

Self-respect,  within  proper  limitations,  is 
one  of  the  most  essential  factors  in  the  right 
Attitude  of  Soul  for  which  every  student  of 
the  Great  School  is  in  search.  In  its  true  and 
legitimate  sense  it  is  a  natural  result  of  honest 
endeavor.  It  contains  no  element  of  decep- 
tion, fraud,  dishonesty,  pretense  nor  insincer- 
ity. It  is  entirely  genuine,  and  is  one  of  Na- 
ture's just  rewards  of  merit.  The  man  or  the 
woman  who  is  truly  honest,  sincere,  genuine 
and  good,  has  the  perfect  right  to  entertain  a 
feeling  of  unqualified  Self-respect.  The  indi- 
vidual who,  by  honest  endeavor,  has  acquired 
profound  knowledge  is  justly  entitled  to  re- 
spect himself  for  the  achievement,  so  long  as 
he  uses  his  knowledge  for  the  accomplish- 
ment of  the  highest  good  of  both  himself  and 
his  fellows.  Legitimate  self-respect  is  in  per- 
fect alignment  with  the  Constructive  Princi- 
ple of  Nature  in  Individual  Life.  To  be 
worthy  of  one's  own  Self-respect  is  one  of  the 

276 


ATTITUDE  OF  SOUL 

most  exalted  achievements  of  the  Soul.  It  is 
that  for  which  every  student  must  strive  w^ho 
hopes  for  true  Spiritual  Illumination. 

Until  v^e  are  able  to  commend  ourselves  to 
ourselves  in  good  conscience  we  have  no  right 
to  commend  ourselves  to  others  at  all.  When 
we  have  once  truly  attained  to  a  state  and  con- 
dition of  Soul  growth  which  justly  entitles  us 
to  our  own  commendation  it  will  not  be  neces- 
sary for  us  to  commend  ourselves  to  others. 

If,  upon  a  basis  of  strict  merit,  we  are  able 
to  command  our  own  intelligent  Self-respect, 
our  friends  and  fellows  will  not  be  long  in 
discovering  that  fact,  and  when  they  do  they 
will  give  us  their  respect  without  waiting  for 
us  to  canvass  them  for  it. 

It  is  only  when  Self-respect  crosses  the  line 
of  its  Constructive  limitations  that  it  becomes 
something  else.  The  thing  it  then  becomes  is 
Vanity.  So  long  as  it  is  held  within  its  con- 
structive boundaries  it  is  beautiful  and  en- 
nobling and  uplifting.  The  moment  it  passes 
beyond  those  limitations  into  the  field  of 
Vanity  it  becomes  unlovely,  degrading  and 
destructive. 

In  the  full  performance  of  a  Duty  or  the 

277 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

complete  discharge  of  an  Obligation  there  is 
something  vastly  more  involved  than  the 
mere  mechanical  act  of  doing  something  or 
the  mere  refraining  from  the  doing  of  some 
such  act.  Independent  Spiritual  Unfoldment 
is  dependent: 

Upon  the  Attitude  of  Soul. 

Upon  the  Personal  Effort  of  an  individual 
in  harmonious  action  with  that  Attitude  of 
Soul. 

It  will  appear  that  in  the  accomplishment 
of  Spiritual  Independence,  the  Attitude  of 
Soul  is  the  first  thing  to  be  accomplished, 
and  Personal  Effort  in  harmony  therewith  is 
the  second. 

This  gives  us  the  key  for  which  we  have 
been  searching. 


27t 


CHAPTER  XXVIII 


LIVING  OF  A  LIFE 

Slowly,  laboriously,  and  often-times  reluc- 
tantly, it  is  borne  in  upon  the  intelligent  con- 
sciousness of  every  student,  that  there  is  but 
one  way  whereby  the  problem  of  Personal 
Responsibility  may  ever  be  solved,  and  that 
is  by  The  Living  of  a  Life. 

Let  him  stop  at  this  point  and  dwell  for  at 
least  one  silent  and  intense  moment  on  the 
ominous  significance  of  these  five  simple  but 
magical  words,  ''The  Living  of  a  Life/' 

Let  him  ask  himself  how  many  there  are 
today  who  are  seeking,  or  who  think  they  are 
seeking,  for  the  hidden  facts  and  vital  truths 
of  life,  who  would  stop,  hesitate,  then  turn 
away,  if  they  but  knew  what  every  student  of 
Natural  Science  must  come  to  know,  that  the 
definite  knowledge  and  independent  spiritual 
vision  and  psychical  power  for  which  they 
are  seeking  can  never  be  obtained  nor  ac- 
quired in  any  manner  whatsoever,  except  as 
a  natural  and  scientific  result  of  The  Living  of^ 

279 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

a  Life  in  full  and  willing  compliance  with  the 
Constructive  Principle  of  Nature  in  Individ- 
ual Life. 

Out  of  the  tens  of  thousands,  hundreds  of 
thousands,  and  even  millions,  of  those  who, 
by  common  consent,  are  classed  in  the  ranks 
of  "Honest  Seekers,"  it  is  astonishing  how 
few  there  are  who,  possessing  the  intelli- 
gence, at  the  same  time  have  also  the  moral 
courage  and  the  perseverance  necessary  to 
carry  the  work  of  Independent  Spiritual  De- 
velopment through  to  a  practical  and  com- 
plete demonstration. 

There  have  been  some  in  every  age  who 
have  accomplished  the  task.  There  are  per- 
haps more  today  than  in  any  past  age  who 
possess  all  the  elements  necessary  to  carry 
them  safely  through  the  ordeal  and  enable 
them  to  rise  in  triumph  from  the  crucible  of 
spiritual  fire,  freed  from  the  dross  of  material 
"Things."  There  can  be  little  doubt  that  the 
number  is  rapidly  increasing.  It  is  upon 
these  that  devolve  the  blessed  burden  and  the 
priceless  privilege  of  carrying  to  the  world 
the  message  of  glad  tidings  and  great  joy  that 
shall   yet  inspire  many  more  to  choose   the 

280 


LIVING  OF  A  LIFE 

pathway,  so  rugged  and  rough,  so  steep  and 
so  narrow,  which  leads  to  the  South,  toward 
the  Land  of  Liberty  and  Light. 

When  the  student  comes  fully  to  realize 
that  his  Personal  Responsibility  involves  a 
Duty,  Burden,  or  Obligation  which  Nature, 
or  the  Great  Intelligence  back  of  Nature, 
fixes  upon  him  as  a  definite  and  necessary 
part  of,  and  factor  in  the  scheme  of  Individ- 
ual Evolution;  when  he  comes  to  appreciate 
the  fact  that  it  is  something  which  cannot  be 
shifted  to  other  shoulders,  nor  otherwise 
escaped;  when  he  Is  able  to  understand  with 
clearness  and  certainty  that  it  is  a  provision 
of  Nature  which,  sooner  or  later,  must  be 
met,  and  the  sooner  the  better  for  him;  when 
he  comes  to  know  deep  down  within  his  In- 
most Soul  that  there  is  just  one  way,  and  one 
only,  to  meet  it,  by  "The  Living  of  a  Life"; 
then  it  is  that  he  seeks  to  learn  the  exact  na- 
ture of  the  Life  he  must  live  In  order  that  he 
may  thereby  meet  the  full  requirements  of 
the  Law.  This  Is,  indeed,  the  beginning  of 
Wisdom. 

From  this  point  forward  the  great  problem 
becomes  exceedingly  simple  and  easy  of  solu- 

281 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

tion,  for  then  it  only  remains  to  find  the  right 
Standard  by  which  to  live  his  life  in  such 
manner  as  to  discharge  his  Personal  Respon- 
sibility under  the  Law. 

Fortunately,  the  Great  Intelligence  that 
fixed  upon  us  the  burden  of  Personal  Respon- 
sibility has  so  provided  that  there  is  but  one 
Standard  that  is  both  definite  and  exact,  and 
at  the  same  time  within  the  range  of  our  indi- 
vidual possibilities.  That  is  the  Standard  of 
our  own  best  intelligence  and  highest  ideals 
of  Equity,  Justice  and  Right  at  any  given 
time.  No  other  Standard  could  possibly  ad- 
just itself  to  the  needs  and  demands  of 
Individual  Intelligence  in  such  manner  as  to 
bind  each  according  to  the  degree  of  his  un- 
derstanding and  his  ability  to  respond. 

There  being  but  one  fixed  and  definite 
Standard  of  life  for  each  individual,  and  that 
being  the  highest  ideal  of  Equity,  Justice  and 
Right  (as  determined  by  the  Soul  Attributes 
of  the  individual  himself  at  any  given  time), 
it  follows  that  each  individual  is  bound  by 
the  great  Law  of  Personal  Responsibility,  to 
conform  his  Life  to  that  Standard. 

This  is  the  highest  Standard  of  Morals  it  is 

282 


LIVING  OF  A  LIFE 

possible  for  God,  or  Nature,  to  place  before 
any  individual  intelligence.  This  is  the 
Standard  that  is  at  the  basis  of  all  Construct- 
ive Spirituality,  and  it  constitutes  one  of  the 
fundamental  Keys  to  Independent  Spiritual 
Unfoldment  and  Power. 

There  have  been  many  who  have  com- 
pleted the  Ethical  Formulary  and  established 
their  lives  upon  it,  and  who,  by  reason  of  en- 
vironment or  circumstance,  have  not  been 
able  to  take  any  part  of  the  Technical  Work. 
The  question  naturally  arises  as  to  what 
effect,  if  any,  the  Ethical  Formulary,  and  the 
living  of  a  life  in  conformity  therewith,  has 
upon  such  as  these. 

The  result  is  that  by  conforming  their  lives 
to  the  Ethical  Formulary  they  align  them- 
selves perfectly  with  the  Constructive  Princi- 
ple of  Nature  and  thereby  enable  Nature  to 
carry  forward  her  work  of  individual  evolu- 
tion as  far  as  possible  without  their  technical 
cooperation.  Under  these  conditions  Nature, 
in  her  own  time,  will  carry  forward  the  work 
of  Independent  Spiritual  Unfoldment  until 
she  will  bring  the  individual  to  a  conscious 
realization  of  Spiritual  Life. 

283 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

No  effort  of  an  individual  to  "Live  the 
Life"  is  ever  lost.  It  all  counts.  Every  day 
he  squares  his  life  by  the  Ethical  Formulary 
brings  him  that  much  nearer  the  goal  of  Spir- 
itual Illumination  and  Mastership.  Many 
there  are  who  have  thus  grown  naturally  into 
perfect  Spiritual  Consciousness  without  the 
aid  of  the  Technical  Work.  The  only  impor- 
tant diflfcrcnce  in  the  case  of  such  as  these,  is 
in  the  element  of  time. 

These  experiments,  which  have  been  re- 
peated again  and  again,  in  all  the  past  ages  of 
the  School's  history  covering  many  thousands 
of  years,  and  always  with  the  same  unvarying 
results,  would  seem  to  establish  the  scientific 
status  of  the  Ethical  Formulary  as  completely 
and  as  unquestionably  as  it  is  possible  to  es- 
tablish any  fact  of  science. 


284 


CHAPTER  XXIX 


TRUTH  AND  LIGHT 


A  single  truth,  however  seemingly  insig- 
nificant or  unimportant,  gives  the  intelligent 
possessor  some  slight  vision  of  conditions 
most  nearly  related  to  it.  The  light  of  an- 
other truth  added  to  it  concerning  the  same 
subject  matter  does  not  extinguish,  annul  nor 
destroy  the  first  truth,  nor  in  any  manner 
militate  against  nor  conflict  with  it.  To  the 
observer  its  value  and  importance  are  only 
multiplied. 

He  begins  to  reason.  From  his  reasoning 
he  draws  conclusions.  He  sees  dim  outlines 
of  other  truths  or  seeming  truths.  He  longs 
to  see  them  yet  more  clearly.  He  seeks  to 
know  them  with  greater  certainty.  One  by 
one  they  come  within  the  range  of  his  intel- 
lectual vision.  One  by  one  they  are  added  to 
his  increasing  store  of  knowledge.  Their  aug- 
menting light  illumines  his  surroundings. 
The  darkness  of  superstition  and  ignorance 

28S 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

recedes.     The  value  of  Truth  is  established. 

At  last  he  comes  to  know  himself  in  the 
full  light  of  earth's  physical  conditions.  He 
has  reached  the  limitations  of  "physical  sci- 
ence." In  his  pride  of  intelligence  he  says: 
"At  last  I  see  the  world  in  its  true  light.  I  am 
but  a  physical  entity.  Only  this  and  nothing 
more.  I  am  but  making  my  own  little  round 
and  playing  my  own  little  part,  along  with 
the  bee  and  the  ant,  in  a  world  of  purely 
physical  things.  When  the  round  is  com- 
pleted and  the  play  is  ended  my  life  is  done. 
Nature  is  hostile  to  all  life,  and  I  am  but  one 
of  her  countless  millions  of  victims." 

Then  comes  that  opening  of  the  spiritual 
vision.  With  it  also  comes  a  sublime  illum- 
ination from  the  finer  world  of  spiritual 
truth.  In  an  instant  the  darkness  of  physical 
materialism  is  banished  from  his  life  forever. 
Physical  death  is  not  the  end.  It  is  only  a 
second  birth.  It  is  a  new  gateway  which 
opens  to  individual  intelligence  the  seeming- 
ly infinite  possibilities  of  other  and  higher 
realms  of  being.  This  new  and  wonderful 
truth  of  another  life  sheds  its  radiance  over 
all  the  experiences  of  the  remembered  past. 


TRUTH  AND  LIGHT 

It  gives  to  individual  existence  d.  new  mo- 
tive and  a  new  inspiration.  Here,  in  the 
realm  of  spiritual  truth,  he  comes  to  recog- 
nize and  appreciate  the  vital  fact  that  he  has 
"present  limitations."  And  here  he  is  at  the 
beginning  of  wisdom. 

Take  an  ordinary  candle  into  a  dark  and 
unfamiliar  room.  Then  light  it  and  study 
the  results  upon  your  sense  of  vision.  You 
will  observe  that  no  matter  how  faint  may  be 
the  light  it  sheds,  you  are  nevertheless  able 
to  obtain  some  slight  vision  of  those  objects 
that  are  nearest  you.  True,  they  may,  per- 
haps, be  so  indistinct  that  you  are  quite  un- 
certain as  to  their  exact  form  or  nature. 
However,  you  are  able  to  satisfy  yourself  that 
certain  objects  are  there  to  be  seen  provided 
sufficient  light  can  be  obtained  to  dispel  the 
darkness. 

You  therefore  determine  that  you  must 
have  "More  Light."  You  bring  in  an  oil 
lamp.  You  light  that  also.  Let  us  suppose 
that  it  represents  five  times  the  power  of 
your  candle.  You  then  have  the  combined 
light-producing   power  of  both   candle   and 

287 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

lamp,  representing  an  aggregate  of  six  can- 
dle power. 

Under  the  resultant  power  of  these  two 
lights  you  find  yourself  able  to  distinguish 
clearly  a  number  of  objects  near  to  you  which 
were  quite  beyond  the  limits  of  your  vision 
before.  You  are  also  able  to  discover  others 
in  the  distance  whose  forms  are  still  too  in- 
distinct to  be  determined  with  certainty. 

You  must  have  "More  Light."  A  gas  jet 
is  within  your  reach.  You  light  that  also. 
Suppose  it  adds  twenty  candlepower  to  the 
light  already  in  the  room.  You  now  have  an 
aggregate  of  twenty-six  candlepower  with 
which  to  aid  your  sense  of  vision. 

You  note  that  you  are  now  able  to  see  with 
distinctness  those  objects  which  before  were 
hazy  and  in  the  shadow.  Out  beyond  them, 
in  the  remote  corners  of  the  spacious  room, 
there  are  still  other  objects  you  are  unable  to 
distinguish  with  certainty.  The  room  itself 
is,  in  fact,  much  larger  than  you  had  sup- 
posed and  contains  many  important  objects 
whose  presence  was  entirely  unknown  to  you 
when  you  entered. 

Your  interest  is  now  thoroughly  awakened. 

288 


TRUTH  AND  LIGHT 

But  you  must  have  "More  Light,"  if  you 
would  determine  the  full  extent  of  the  room 
and  the  exact  nature  of  its  contents.  An  elec- 
tric light  is  at  your  service.  You  turn  it  on. 
It  adds  a  thousand  candlepower  of  light  to 
that  already  in  the  room.  You  now  have  an 
aggregate  of  one  thousand  and  twenty-six 
candlepower  of  light  with  which  to  aid  your 
sense  of  sight.  Instantly  all  the  darkness  and 
uncertainty  seem  to  have  disappeared  and 
you  see  with  comparative  distinctness  all  the 
conspicuous  objects  in  the  room.  You  exam- 
ine them  critically  and  satisfy  yourself  as  to 
their  nature,  quality,  color,  value  and  pur- 
pose. 

In  the  midst  of  your  contemplation  of  this 
interesting  vision  the  sun  slowly  rises  and 
adds  its  majestic  and  trascendent  light  to  that 
already  in  the  room.  Slowly  but  surely  there 
comes  to  your  consciousness  the  realization 
of  a  remarkable  change.  A  complete  trans- 
formation has  occurred  in  the  colors  which 
everywhere  before  were  distinctly  apparent. 
The  various  objects  have  taken  on  added  hues 
and  more  delicate  shadings.  Their  beauty 
and  richness  are  many  times  intensified. 

289 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Under  this  flood  of  combined  light  you 
find  yourself  able  to  say,  with  seeming  cer- 
tainty, that  you  now  see  things  as  they  are. 
You  seem  to  realize  that  any  stronger  light 
would  only  dazzle  your  sense  of  sight  and 
obscure  your  vision,  because  your  capacity 
for  light  is  limited  by  the  power  of  resis- 
tance of  the  physical  optic  nerve. 

You  note  the  fact  that  you  seem  to  be  alone 
in  a  large  and  beautiful  room.  Its  furnish- 
ings are  of  rare  quality  and  exquisite  work- 
manship. Its  walls  are  hung  with  the  paint- 
ings of  great  masters  and  its  decorations  are 
works  of  rarest  art  and  the  most  fascinating 
beauty.  You  stand  in  mute  admiration  and 
wonderment.  To  your  charmed  senses  the 
vision  is  complete.  It  would  seem  impossible 
to  add  to  or  take  from  it  without  marring 
its  perfect  symmetry  of  expression. 

Not  so,  for  even  in  the  midst  of  your  won- 
dering there  comes  from  an  unknown  source 
a  sudden  burst  of  added  light.  It  is  a  light  to 
which  your  Soul  seems  a  stranger.  It  is  not 
within  your  memory  of  earthly  things.  It  is 
the  light  of  another  world.  You  understand 
its  meaning.     You  now  realize  for  the  first 

290 


TRUTH  AiND  LIGHT 

time  in  physical  life  that  your  spiritual  eyes 
have  opened.  Again  you  survey  the  splendid 
palace.  A  seemingly  magical  change  has  oc- 
curred. To  your  amazement  you  observe  that 
you  are  no  longer  alone.  All  about  you  are 
men,  women  and  children  of  matchless  grace 
and  unrivaled  loveliness.  The  robes  and  the 
flowers  they  wear  far  surpass  anything  ever 
beheld  by  mortal  eye.  They  reflect  the  deli- 
cate colors  of  a  world  above  and  beyond  all 
that  we  know  as  physical. 

So  completely  is  your  consciousness  ab- 
sorbed in  this  fascinating  vision  of  spiritual 
life,  light  and  loveliness  that  for  the  time  be- 
ing you  forget  this  world  of  grosser  phys- 
ical things.  But  your  intelligence  is  not 
asleep.  All  your  mental  faculties  and  powers 
are  awake  and  active.  You  find  yourself  in- 
stinctively asking  yourself  the  question:  "If 
this  be  true,  may  it  not  be  possible  that  there 
are  yet  more  wonderful,  glorious  and  exalted 
truths  out  in  the  infinite  realms  of  Nature 
which  lie  above  and  beyond  the  range  of  my 
present  limitations?" 

It  would  seem  to  be  both  relevant  and 
material,    to    consider    the    remarkable    and 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Strangely  significant  analogy  between  "Light" 
to  the  physical  sense  and  "Truth"  to  the  soul 
of  an  intelligent  individual. 

The  presence  of  one  light  does  not  extin- 
guish another  light.  It  only  multiplies  its 
intensity  and  effect. 

In  like  manner,  one  truth  does  not  extin- 
guish, nor  in  any  manner  conflict  with,  an- 
other truth.  It  only  adds  to  its  potency  and 
value. 

The  greater  the  candlepower  of  light  the 
more  definite  and  distinct  is  the  sense  of  phys- 
ical vision,  until  the  limit  of  the  power  of 
resistance  of  the  physical  organ  is  reached. 

Equally  true  is  it  that  the  greater  the  num- 
ber of  correlated  truths  at  our  command  the 
more  definitely  and  clearly  we  are  able  to  dis- 
tinguish the  subject  matter  under  considera- 
tion, within  the  limits  of  our  rational  powers. 

Light  dispels  darkness. 

So  also,  truth  dissipates  ignorance  (which 
is  intellectual  darkness). 

Light  is  a  fundamental  necessity  to  the 
proper  growth  of  all  physical  organisms. 

With  added  emphasis,  truth  is  the  vital 
principle  at  the  foundation  of  all  Construct- 

393 


TRUTH  AND  LIGHT 

ive  Spiritual  Unfoldment  and  Soul  Growth. 

The  greater  the  candlepower  of  light  the 
more  perfectly  we  discern  the  true  colors  of 
things  physical. 

The  greater  the  volume  of  truth  at  our 
command  the  more  clearly  are  we  able  to  dis- 
cern the  delicate  shadings  of  principle  which 
color  all  life. 

The  purpose  is  to  establish  beyond  all  ques- 
tion the  true  relation  which  mere  dogmas  and 
beliefs  sustain  to  actual  knowledge,  and  sug- 
gest the  relative  value  and  importance  of 
each  to  the  individual. 

It  appears  to  be  a  well  considered  axiom 
that,  "Those  who  believe  the  most  know  the 
least."  It  would  also  appear  that  they  have 
the  least  desire  to  know.  There  is  a  good  and 
sufficient  reason  for  this.  Opinions  and  be- 
liefs come  to  us  easily.  Actual  knowledge 
comes  as  the  result  of  labored  personal  effort. 
A  mere  opinion  or  belief  may  rest  upon  very 
slight  evidence,  or  none  at  all.  The  acquisi- 
tion of  knowledge,  which  means  a  personal 
demonstration  of  facts,  requires  work.  In- 
deed, the  number  of  such  facts  accumulated 
by  any  given  individual  may  be  said  fairly  to 

293 


THK  GREAT  WORK 

represent  or  measure  the  energy  he  has  spent 
in  overcoming  his  false  beliefs  and  convert- 
ing his  true  ones  into  actual  knowledge. 

The  generous  hospitality  with  which  we 
are  wont  to  entertain  all  manner  of  opinions 
and  beliefs,  quite  unmindful  of  their  real 
merit,  and  the  labored  difficulty  with  which 
we  acquire  definite  personal  knowledge,  arc 
together  sufficient  to  account  for  the  over- 
whelming prevalence  of  dogmatism  and 
"creeds,"  and  the  comparative  dearth  of  ac- 
tual knowledge  in  almost  every  department 
of  human  life  and  interest. 

If  the  relative  value  and  importance  of 
definite  knowledge  and  mere  beliefs,  in  their 
relation  to  individual  life  and  well  being, 
were  an  issue  before  the  world  of  enlightened 
intelligence  today,  it  would  seem  to  be  a  con- 
servative prediction  that  the  verdict  would 
be  overwhelmingly  in  favor  of  knowledge. 
There  can  be  no  question  but  according  to  the 
consensus  of  intelligent  judgments  there  is 
nothing  of  which  the  human  mind  can  con- 
ceive that  is  more  vitally  important  to  the  in- 
dividual than  the  definite  personal  knowledge 
he  possesses,  and  nothing  more  important  for 

294 


TRUTH  AND  LIGHT 

which  he  should  strive  than  the  additions  of 
knowledge  which  lie  within  the  range  of  his 
possible  attainments. 

It  is  equally  true  that  there  is  no  error  more 
subtle  and  difficult  to  dislodge  from  the  hu- 
man mind  and  consciousness  than  that  which 
is  embodied  in  a  comforting  belief.  We  cher- 
ish such  errors  as  these  with  an  affection  and 
a  persistency  worthy  of  a  better  cause.  We 
challenge  and  even  resent  the  grandest  and 
most  beneficent  truths  of  Nature  in  our  ef- 
forts to  evade  the  responsibility  which  a 
knowledge  of  them  would  inevitably  fix  upon 
us.  We  condemn  the  most  generous  and  un- 
selfish of  friends  who  bring  to  us  unwelcome 
truths  and  insist  upon  our  taking  note  of 
them.  We  shut  our  eyes  in  simulated  con- 
tempt and  in  willing  blindness  cling  to  our 
errors,  enjoy  our  ignorance  and  hug  our  de- 
lusions until  the  irresistible  power  of  truth 
wrests  them  from  us. 

At  last  the  great  and  solemn  truth  has 
dawned  upon  us,  that  we  have  present  limi- 
tations. No  more  stupendous  fact  ever  im- 
pressed itself  upon  human  consciousness;  for 

295 


THK  CiREAr  WORK 

this  is  the  birth  of  true  humility  which  is  the 
beginning  of  wisdom. 


296 


CHATTER  XXX 


LIONS  ON   THE  WAY 


These  are  some  of  the  problems  that  are 
laid  before  every  accepted  student  of  the 
Great  School  of  Natural  Science  in  the 
course  of  his  progress.  It  is  not  expected  that 
he  will  be  able  to  render  an  exact  and  perfect 
solution  of  each  and  all  of  them,  in  conform- 
ity with  the  wisdom  of  the  Great  School  of 
the  Masters.  But  he  is  required  to  work  out 
his  own  solution,  from  his  own  viewpoint  of 
life,  and  in  accordance  with  his  own  best  in- 
telligence. 

His  answers  to  these  questions  and  his  ex- 
position of  the  principles  they  embody  consti- 
tute the  index  by  which  it  is  possible  to 
determine  his  evolutionary  status  as  an 
Individual  Intelligence,  mentally,  morally, 
spiritually  and  psychically: 

Thus,  every  step  he  takes  along  the  Path  is 
one  of  development,  unfoldment,  growth, 
attainment,  power,  Self-Control,  Mastery. 


THi:  GREAT  \V()RK 


What 

s  Loyalty? 

What 

is  Sin? 

What 

is  Instinct? 

What 

is  Life? 

What 

s  Charity? 

What 

is  Lust? 

What 

s  Impulse? 

What 

is  Will? 

What 

s  Honesty? 

What 

IS  Tact? 

What 

s  Courage? 

What 

s  Fear? 

What 

s  Jealousy? 

What 

s  Love? 

What 

s  Emotion? 

What 

is  Duty? 

What 

s  Courtesy? 

What 

s  Envy? 

What 

s  Intuition? 

What 

s  Faith? 

What 

s  Kindness? 

What 

s  Mind? 

What  1 

s  Humility? 

What 

s  Error? 

What  i 

s  Judgment? 

What 

s  Hope? 

What 

s  Sympathy? 

What 

s  Right? 

What  i 

s  Gentleness? 

What  1 

s  Truth? 

What  i 

s  Happiness? 

What  1 

s  Belief? 

What  i 

s  Selfishness? 

What  1 

s  Greed? 

What  i 

s  Discretion? 

What  1 

s  Anger? 

What  i 

s  Subjection? 

What  1 

s  Desire? 

What  i 

s  Conscience? 

What  i 

s  Equity? 

What  i 

s  Friendship? 

What  i 

s  Vanity? 

What  i 

s  Personality? 

What  i 

s  Justice? 

What  i 

s  Dogmatism? 

What  i 

s  Reason? 

What  i 

s  Intelligence? 

What  i 

s  Sorrow? 

What  i 

s  Cheerfulness? 

What  i 

s  Wisdom? 

What  1 

s  Individuality? 

298 


LIONS  ON  THE  WAY 

What  is  Consideration? 

What  is  Responsibility? 

What  is  Accountability? 

What  is  Moral  Accountability? 

What  is  Personal  Responsibility? 

What  is  the  primary  Purpose  of  the  Soul? 

It  would  be  an  exceedingly  simple  and 
easy  matter  for  him  to  open  his  dictionary, 
turn  to  these  various  terms  and  there  find 
definitions  for  each  and  all  of  them.  That 
would  not  help  him.  It  would  only  con- 
fuse him.  This  fact  will  be  apparent  to 
those  who  have  followed  the  development  of 
the  work  to  this  point.  For  he  will  have  ob- 
served that  the  definitions  of  this  School  do 
not  conform  to  those  of  any  other  authority. 
This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  work  of  this 
School  proceeds  from  the  basis  of  exact  sci- 
ence. Its  viewpoint  is  that  of  a  science  with 
which  the  world  in  general  is  not  familiar, 
as  yet. 

If  he  will  compare  the  definition  of  "Mor- 
ality," given  in  a  preceding  chapter,  with 
that  of  any  of  the  standard  modern  works  on 
Lexicology,  he  will  observe  that  there  is  a 
fundamental  difl^erence  and  that  it  is  of  vital 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

importance  to  his  understanding  of  the  sub- 
ject. The  Morality  that  means  "The  estab- 
lished harmonic  relation  which  man,  as  an 
Individual  Intelligence,  sustains  to  the  Con- 
structive Principle  of  Nature,''  is  a  vastly 
different  thing  from  the  Morality  that  means 
a  ''Doctrine,"  etc. 

The  one  proceeds  from  a  basis  of  exact  sci- 
ence, while  the  other  is  founded  upon  a 
dogma  of  mere  faith  or  belief. 

The  moral  man,  under  the  first  concept,  is 
he  who  conforms  his  life  to  a  "Principle  of 
Nature,"  while  under  the  second  it  is  he  who 
conforms  his  life  to  certain  "Articles  of 
Faith,  or  Belief"  which  have  been  formu- 
lated by  his  fellow  men,  and  which  may  or 
may  not  be  in  conformity  with  the  "Princi- 
ple of  Nature"  referred  to. 

This  illustration  will  enable  the  student  to 
understand  why  it  is  that  he  is  required  to 
f(jrmulatc  his  own  solution  of  each  and  every 
one  of  the  many  problems  submitted  to  him 
in  the  course  of  his  education  and  work  of 
demonstration.  It  will  explain  why  he  is 
specially  cautioned  not  to  depend  upon  books, 
or  so-called  "Authorities,"  or  upon  the  work 

3CC 


LIONS  ON  THE  WAY 

of  others  to  guide  him.  It  may  also  help  him 
to  understand  why  it  is  that  each  problem  is 
a  specific  "Study  of  Self,"  and  why  it  is  that 
nowhere  else  is  it  possible  for  him  to  find  the 
solution. 

Each  problem  submitted  to  him  is  a  ver- 
itable "Lion  on  the  Way."  He  must  grapple 
with  it  alone,  and  alone  he  must  conquer  it. 
By  this  method  only  is  it  possible  for  him  to 
proceed.  Nature  has  so  laid  out  his  work  for 
him  that  the  Personal  Effort  he  puts  forth  in 
the  subjugation  and  mastery  of  each  "Lion" 
in  its  regular  order,  develops  within  him  the 
intelligence  and  the  skill  and  the  power  nec- 
essary to  meet  and  conquer  the  next  one  he  is 
to  encounter  on  his  way. 


301 


CHAPTER  XXXI 


TECHNICAL  SECTION 


The  technical  work  begins  where  the  eth- 
ical work  leaves  off.  With  the  ethical  as  a 
foundation,  its  purpose  is  to  outline  for  the 
student  a  definite  system  of  individual  pro- 
cedure which  shall  enable  him  so  to  direct  his 
efforts  in  such  definite  and  specific  lines  as 
best  to  supplement,  facilitate  and  intensify 
Nature's  evolutionary  effort  along  those 
specific  lines. 

It  is  quite  possible  that  the  term  "tech- 
nical" may  not  convey  to  one  who  is  not 
already  familiar  with  the  work  the  exact  dis- 
tinction which  it  is  intended  to  suggest,  and 
which  it  very  clearly  conveys  to  one  who  has 
traversed  the  entire  subject  and  learned  by 
actual  experience  the  distinction  in  the  char- 
acter of  the  work  indicated. 

The  Second  and  Third  Sections  of  the 
Great  Work  of  Spiritual  Unfoldment  under 
and    in    accordance    with    the    Independent 

303 


THK  GREAT  WORK 

Method  of  Natural  Science,  have  heen  des- 
ignated as  "TechnicaT'  work.  The  student 
would  naturally  understand  by  this  special 
designation,  that  with  the  beginning  of  the 
Second  Section  the  character  of  the  work 
changes  in  some  respect  from  that  involved 
in  the  Ethical  Section. 

An  individual  who  has  worked  out  the 
Ethical  Section  has  built  for  himself  a  foun- 
dation of  ethical  principle  upon  which  to  live 
his  life  in  such  manner  as  to  bring  himself 
into  perfect  alignment  with  the  Constructive 
Principle  of  Nature  in  Individual  Life.  But 
suppose,  after  he  has  thus  provided  himself 
a  correct  foundation,  he  fails  to  stand  upon 
it,  what  then?  The  result  is  that  he  is  still 
out  of  alignment  with  the  Constructive  Prin- 
ciple of  Nature.  The  mere  building  of  a 
foundation  for  a  house  will  not  support  the 
house  unless  the  house  is  erected  upon  it. 
The  mere  building  of  a  platform  on  which 
to  stand  is  of  no  service  to  an  individual  un- 
less he  makes  use  of  it  and  stands  upon  it. 

So  it  is  with  the  Ethical  Section  of  the 
Great  Work.  It  constitutes  a  foundation  of 
Moral    Principle    for   the   student   to   stand 


TECHNICAL  SECTION 

upon  in  order  that  he  may  bring  his  life  into 
perfect  conformity  with  Nature's  Construct- 
ive Principle.  Only  when  he  gets  upon  this 
foundation  and  establishes  himself  there  is  it 
of  any  value  to  him  in  his  future  efforts 
towards  evolutionary  development. 

Suppose  that  he  has  built  his  foundation 
and  has  established  his  life  squarely  upon  it. 
What  is  the  result? 

He  has  now,  by  this  fact,  done  what  the 
farmer  does  for  the  grain  of  corn  when  he 
plants  it  in  clean  and  wholesome  soil  and  re- 
moves from  its  environment  all  the  weeds 
and  other  obstructions  which  could  in  any 
manner  interfere  with  its  natural  growth  and 
development.  He  has  put  himself  in  a  per- 
fectly natural  position,  and  condition,  to  get 
the  full  benefit  of  Nature's  effort  to  develop 
him.  He  has  removed  from  both  within  and 
without  everything  that  could  possibly  inter- 
fere with  Nature's  Evolutionary  Principle 
and  Process.  By  so  doing  he  has  made  it  pos- 
sible for  Nature  to  do  her  best  for  him.  What 
is  the  result? 

If  he  will  maintain  this  position  and 
condition.  Nature  in  her  own  good  time  will 

305 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

unfold  him  and  grow  him  to  the  full  stature 
of  a  man,  physically,  spiritually  and  psy- 
chically. 

If  the  student  did  nothing  more  than  work 
out  the  Ethical  Section  and  conform  his  life 
strictly  to  the  principles  therein  contained, 
Nature  will,  in  her  own  time,  do  the  rest.  In 
her  own  deliberate  time  and  methodical  way 
she  will  unfold  for  him  each  and  all  of  his 
spiritual  senses  and  his  psychical  faculties, 
capacities  and  powers. 

Let  us  go  back  to  the  farmer  and  his  grain 
of  corn  for  a  moment,  for  another  analogy 
which  will  help  us  to  understand  the  nature 
and  purposes  of  the  "Technical  Work." 

The  farmer  has  removed  all  the  obstruc- 
tions from  the  way  and  thereby  given  Na- 
ture a  chance  to  exercise  her  evolutionary 
process  of  unfoldmcnt  to  its  full  capacity. 
Nature,  in  her  own  time,  will  do  the  rest,  and 
will  produce  the  full  stalk  and  finally  the 
ripened  corn  in  the  ear. 

Suppose  the  farmer  desired  to  shorten  the 
time  which  Nature  would  require  to  produce 
these  results  unaided.  Can  he  do  it?  Cer- 
tainly.    In  what  manner?    By  such  mcchan- 

i06 


TECHNICAL  SECTION 

ical  means  as  will  supplement,  facilitate  and 
intensify  Nature's  unaided  process.  If  he 
will  pass  an  electric  current  through  the  soil 
at  the  root  of  the  stalk  in  such  manner  as  to 
touch  the  vital  processes,  he  will  thus  multi- 
ply their  activity  and  intensity.  By  this  proc- 
ess he  focalizes,  as  it  were,  the  vegetative 
process  into  a  definite  and  specific  line  of 
activity  upon  this  particular  grain  of  corn. 
The  result  is  that  he  thereby  obtains  the  same 
results  in  much  less  time  than  Nature  would 
require  if  left  to  do  the  work  alone. 

In  like  or  analogous  manner  the  student 
may  hasten  the  process  of  his  own  Spiritual 
and  Psychical  Unfoldment.  By  conforming 
his  life  to  the  Ethical  Formulary  he  plants 
his  Soul,  as  it  were,  in  the  clean  and  whole- 
some soil  of  Nature;  and  if  he  will  but  keep 
the  weeds  away  from  it  thereafter,  Nature 
will  slowly  but  surely  unfold  his  spiritual  and 
psychical  powers  for  him. 

Through  ages  of  experimentation  and 
study  the  Great  School  of  the  Masters  has 
wrought  out  and  discovered  a  definite  and 
scientific  method  whereby  the  intelligent  stu- 
dent may  supplement,  facilitate  and  intensify 

307 


THE  GRKAT  WORK 

the  process  by  which  Nature  evolves  and  un- 
folds the  spiritual  and  psychical  faculties, 
capacities  and  powers  of  man.  By  the  appli- 
cation of  this  supplemental  method  the 
student  (who  has  wrought  out  through  the 
Ethical  Formulary  the  correct  Moral  Foun- 
dation, and  established  himself  upon  it)  is 
then  in  position,  for  the  first  time,  to  add  the 
impulse  of  his  own  intelligent  effort  to  the 
evolutionary  impulse  of  Nature.  By  so  doing 
he  may  achieve  definite  and  specific  results 
along  the  lines  of  Constructive  Unfoldment 
in  much  less  time  than  it  would  require  for 
Nature  to  accomplish  the  same  results  with- 
out his  intelligent  cooperation. 

This  is  one  of  the  important  purposes  of 
the  "Technical  Work."  It  is  a  time-saver  to 
those  who  are  in  position  to  avail  themselves 
of  the  advantages  it  offers. 


CHAPTER  XXXII 


VIBRATIONS 


The  physical  universe  is  a  universe  of  mat- 
ter. The  same  is  equally  true  of  the  spiritual 
world.  Both  are  material  in  the  most  exact 
and  literal  meaning  of  that  word.  The  spir- 
itual body  of  an  individual  is  as  truly  a  ma- 
terial organism  as  is  the  physical  body  which 
envelops  it.  Both  are  matter,  the  one  physical 
and  the  other  spiritual.  "Physical  material" 
and  "spiritual  material"  are  the  identical 
terms  employed  by  the  Masters  to  distinguish 
between  the  two  worlds  of  matter. 

The  one  belongs  to  the  world  of  purely 
physical  things,  and  is  designated  by  the  very 
appropriate  term,  "physical  matter."  The 
other  belongs  to  the  world  of  purely  spiritual 
things,  and  is  designated  by  the  equally  fit- 
ting term,  "spiritual  matter."  For  a  similar 
reason  we  designate  that  which  belongs  to  the 
mineral    kingdom    as    "mineral,"    and    that 

309 


THE  GREAT  \V(^RK 

which  belongs  to  the  vegetable  kingdom  as 
"vegetable.'' 

Both  belong  to  the  world  of  physical  ma- 
terial, and  are  but  subdivisions  of  it. 

There  are  certain  distinguishable  differ- 
ences existing  in  physical  and  spiritual  organ- 
isms which  enable  the  spiritual  scientist — or 
the  Master — to  determine  with  equal  accu- 
racy to  which  world  of  matter  any  given  or- 
ganism or  body  belongs. 

This  is  determined  by  the  degree  of  fine- 
ness, or  the  relative  size  of  the  individual 
particles  of  which  a  body  is  composed. 

Take  an  ordinary  gallon  measure  and  fill  it 
to  the  brim  with  marbles  of  the  ordinary  size 
used  by  children  at  play.  It  is  not  difficult 
for  you  to  understand  that,  although  it  will 
hold  no  more  marbles,  the  measure  is  not  full. 
There  are  many  vacant  spaces  between  these 
marbles,  which  may  be  filled  in  without  run- 
ning the  measure  over,  provided  you  select  a 
substance  the  particles  of  which  are  fine 
enough  to  sift  into  the  vacant  spaces.  Sup- 
pose you  try  number  six  shot.  You  will  find 
you  can  put  into  the  measure  several  handfuls 
of  shot  without  running  it  over.     This  is  be- 

SIO 


VIBRATIONS 

cause  the  shot  are  smaller  than  the  vacant 
spaces  between  the  marbles.  You  have  now 
poured  in  all  the  shot  the  measure  will  hold, 
but  you  can  readily  understand  that  the  meas- 
ure is  not  full.  There  yet  remain  smaller 
spaces  between  the  shot  which  are  still  vacant. 
Put  in  ordinary  white,  dry  sand,  and  you  will 
find  that  the  measure,  though  full  as  it  will 
hold  of  marbles  and  shot,  will  still  receive 
several  handfuls  of  the  sand,  because  the  va- 
cant spaces  between  the  shot  are  larger  than 
the  grains  of  sand.  You  have  now  put  in  all 
the  sand  the  measure  will  hold.  You  may 
now  pour  in  over  a  pint  of  water.  Why?  Be- 
cause the  particles  of  which  water  is  com- 
posed are  much  finer  than  the  vacant  spaces 
between  the  particles  of  sand,  and  the  water 
has  only  run  into  these  vacant  spaces. 

Take  a  high-grade,  finely  distilled  alcohol, 
and  you  will  be  able  to  drop  slowly  in  three 
or  four  spoonfuls  of  the  alcohol  without  over- 
running the  measure,  because  there  are  still 
vacant  spaces,  even  between  the  particles  of 
water,  large  enough  to  receive  the  finer  par- 
ticles of  which  alcohol  is  composed.  There  is 
yet  another  fluid  compound  known  to  chem- 

311 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

ists  whose  particles  are  so  much  finer  than 
those  of  alcohol  that  a  teaspoonful  or  two  of 
this  may  be  added  without  seeming  to  in- 
crease the  aggregate  contents  of  the  measure, 
thus  proving  that  even  between  the  particles 
of  alcohol  there  arc  spaces  unfilled.  We  will 
now  turn  into  the  vessel  a  current  of  elec- 
tricity, and  we  find  that  we  still  have  room 
for  an  amount  sufficient  to  charge  the  entire 
contents  of  the  measure.  But  what  is  elec- 
tricity? The  finest  and  most  subtle  element 
known  to  the  physical  universe.  We  are  now 
upon  the  borderland  of  the  spiritual  universe. 
We  have  approached  it  along  the  line  of  "the 
degree  of  fineness,  or  the  relative  size  of  the 
individual  particles  of  which  a  body  is  com- 
posed." The  next  step  takes  us  across  the 
border  line  of  purely  physical  material  into 
the  land  of  spiritual  matter. 

Another  distinguishable  difference  between 
physical  material  and  spiritual  material  is 
found  in  the  rate  of  vibratory  motion  of  the 
atom  in  the  compound. 

Take  a  piece  of  granite,  set  it  before  you, 
look  at  it  carefully  and  see  if  you  can  dis- 
covery any  vibratory   movement   among   the 

sia 


VIBRATIONS 

individual  crystals  of  which  it  is  composed. 
You  are  ready  to  declare  that  so  far  as  you 
can  discover  they  are  absolutely  at  rest.  Sci- 
ence has  discovered  that  the  individual  par- 
ticles of  which  a  stone  is  composed  are  in 
a  constant  state  of  vibratory  motion,  one  upon 
the  other.  But  this  vibratory  motion  of  the 
atom  in  the  compound  is,  in  the  case  of  stone, 
at  such  a  low  rate  that  it  is  not  perceptible  to 
the  physical  sense  of  sight,  and  as  a  result  the 
piece  of  granite  appears  to  be  a  solid,  immov- 
able, impenetrable  mass  of  dead  matter. 

Take  a  piece  of  growing  wood.  Examine 
it  as  carefully  as  possible  with  the  naked  eye. 
You  are  still  unable  to  observe  any  movement 
among  the  particles  of  which  it  is  composed; 
but  if  you  place  it  under  a  powerful  magnify- 
ing glass  you  will  be  able  to  distinguish  a 
very  slight  vibratory  movement  among  the 
individual  cells  of  which  it  is  composed. 
Notwithstanding  the  rate  of  this  vibratory 
motion  is  much  greater  than  that  in  the  case 
of  the  stone,  it  is  still  not  great  enough  to  dis- 
turb the  physical  sense  of  vision.  The  result 
is  that  wood,  like  stone,  appears  to  the  naked 
eye,  a  solid,  dead  substance. 

313 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

To  save  both  time  and  space,  we  will  pass 
over  several  intermediate  substances,  such  as 
animal  flesh,  gelatine,  etc.,  and  examine  a 
drop  of  water.  We  find  that  the  vibratory 
motion  of  the  atom  in  the  compound  is  at  a 
rate  many  times  greater  than  that  in  either 
stone  or  wood.  The  particles  of  which  water 
is  composed  move  with  such  facility  and 
rapidity,  one  upon  the  other,  that  to  a  certain 
extent  they  elude  the  physical  sense  of  sight. 
The  result  is  that  water  is  transparent  to  the 
naked  eye. 

Another  step  and  we  come  to  the  gases. 
Here  we  find  that  the  vibratory  motion  of  the 
atom  in  the  compound  is  at  a  rate  so  much 
higher  than  in  the  water  that  the  physical 
sense  of  vision  is  entirely  eluded.  A  gas  is  in- 
visible only  because  the  atoms  of  which  it  is 
composed  vibrate  so  rapidly  that  the  physical 
sense  of  sight  is  unable  to  follow  them.  When 
a  gun  is  discharged  we  are  unable  to  see  the 
bullet  speeding  on  its  way.  Its  rate  of  move- 
ment is  so  rapid  that  the  physical  sense  of 
sight  cannot  follow  it.  It  has  merely  eluded 
the  eye.  Look  at  an  ordinary  carriage  wheel 
when  it  is  at  rest,  and  you  can  see  every  spoke 

S14 


VIBRATIONS 

with  perfect  distinctness;  but  place  it  on  a 
spindle  and  set  it  revolving  at  a  high  rate,  and 
the  higher  the  rate  the  less  distinctly  you  will 
be  able  to  see  the  spokes,  until  they  finally 
disappear. 

The  highest  grade  of  physical  matter  is 
electricity.  The  vibratory  motion  of  the  atoms 
in  this  compound  is  at  a  rate  higher  than  that 
in  any  other  physical  substance. 

Here  we  stand  again  at  the  border  line 
which  bounds  the  physical  universe  of  matter 
and  separates  it  from  the  world  of  things 
spiritual.  The  only  diflference  is  that  in  this 
case  we  have  approached  from  an  entirely 
different  direction,  along  the  line  of  vibratory 
motion.  The  next  step  takes  us  beyond  the 
physical  into  the  world  of  spiritual  matter. 
There  are  other  distinguishable  characteris- 
tics of  physical  material  and  spiritual  mate- 
rial which  enable  the  advanced  scientist  im- 
mediately to  classify  and  locate  in  its  proper 
world,  any  given  material  organism,  with  as 
much  certainty  and  precision  as  the  physical 
scientist  or  physicist  of  the  great  colleges  of 
the  world  is  enabled  to  classify  and  locate  the 
purely  physical   substances   with   which   his 

315 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

science  has  to  do.  The  physical  scientist,  or 
physicist,  using  only  physical  means,  is  lim- 
ited in  his  investigation  and  demonstration  to 
the  world  of  physical  matter.  He  stops  at  the 
border  line  between  the  two  worlds  of  matter 
and  is  forced  to  say:  "I  can  go  no  further; 
the  instruments  at  my  command  arc  not  fine 
enough,  nor  sufficiently  subtle,  to  test  the 
properties  and  qualities  of  that  which  lies  out 
beyond.  It  eludes  the  methods  of  physical 
science  and  all  the  means  at  my  command." 
At  this  point  the  spiritual  scientist — the 
Master — takes  up  the  thread  of  science  and 
carries  it  forward  past  the  border  line  of  the 
physical  into  the  land  of  the  Spiritual.  In 
his  ability  thus  to  view  the  subject  from  both 
worlds,  his  great  advantage  is  inconceivable 
to  one  whose  sense  of  vision  is  limited  to  the 
world  of  purely  physical  things.  At  this  line 
running  between  the  two  worlds  of  matter,  he 
sees  every  law  of  physical  matter  joined  to  its 
correlative  law  of  spiritual  matter.  The  chain 
of  law  is  unbroken.  It  runs  through  the 
Universe  of  matter,  from  the  Physical  di- 
rectly across  into  the  Spiritual,  without  inter- 
ruption;  and   in   this  splendid   continuity  he 

S16 


VIBRATIONS 

recognizes  the  majesty,  the  power  and  the 
glory  in  the  universality  of  law. 

The  spiritual  body  of  a  man  is  composed  of 
"spiritual  material,"  of  matter  much  finer 
than  the  finest  physical  matter,  and  moving 
at  a  higher  rate  of  vibration  than  the  finest 
particles  of  physical  matter  moving  at  their 
highest  possible  rate.  The  spiritual  body  per- 
meates the  physical  and  constitutes  the  model 
upon  which  physical  material  integrates. 
The  spiritual  body,  like  the  physical,  is  pro- 
vided with  five  sensory  organs.  They  arc 
adapted  to  receive  and  register  vibrations  of 
spiritual  material  only;  of  matter  lying  upon 
the  same  plane  of  vibratory  action  as  the  spir- 
itual body  itself.  By  the  aid  of  these  organs 
an  Intelligent  Soul  becomes  cognizant  of  dif- 
ferent external  spiritual  objects,  elements  and 
conditions.  The  recognition  by  a  Soul  of 
these  objects,  elements  and  conditions  consti- 
tutes what  we  term  spiritual  sensation. 

Each  one  of  the  spiritual  sensory  organs  re- 
ceives and  registers  a  diflFerent  range  of  vibra- 
tion. The  whole  surface  of  the  spiritual  body 
is  itself  so  constructed  as  to  become  a  medium 
of  spiritual  vibration.     The  general  sense  of 

317 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

spiritual  touch  is  experienced  when  any  por- 
tion of  the  spiritual  body  comes  in  contact 
with  spiritual  material  of  the  coarser  texture 
moving  at  lower  rates  of  vibratory  action. 
The  spiritual  eye  is  the  most  highly  special- 
ized organ  of  spiritual  sensation.  When  the 
spiritual  eye  is  brought  in  contact  with  rays 
of  spiritual  light  (which  are  in  fact  only  par- 
ticles of  spiritual  material  moving  at  a  higher 
rate  of  vibration),  an  individual  experiences 
the  sensation  of  spiritual  sight. 

As  with  the  spiritual  eye,  so  with  the  spirit- 
ual ear,  another  specialized  organ  of  sensa- 
tion. When  the  spiritual  organs  of  hearing 
are  touched  with  spiritual  atmosphere  mov- 
ing at  certain  rates  of  vibration,  an  individual 
hears  spiritual  sounds.  As  with  the  spiritual 
ear,  so  with  the  other  specialized  organs  of 
smell  and  taste. 

Every  spiritual  organ  of  sensation  is  an  or- 
gan of  touch.  By  use  of  these  special  organs, 
each  registering  a  different  range  of  vibratory 
activity  upon  the  spiritual  plane,  an  Intelli- 
gent Soul  is  brought  into  conscious  relation 
with  a  very  wide  range  of  the  vibrations  of 
spiritual    material.     These    spiritual    organs 

31S 


VIBRATIONS 

register  the  vibrations  of  spiritual  material 
only.  They  are  also  limited  in  their  capacity 
upon  the  spiritual  plane  in  a  manner  analo- 
gous to  the  limitations  of  the  physical  senses. 

The  spiritual  plane  is  just  as  tangible  and 
visible  to  a  spiritual  man  as  our  physical 
plane  is  tangible  and  visible  to  the  physically 
embodied  man.  The  handclasp  of  two  spirit- 
ual beings  is  just  as  real  as,  and  far  more  mag- 
netic than,  that  of  two  physically  embodied 
individuals. 

By  personal  experiment  under  an  exact  sci- 
entific formula  a  man  in  the  physical  body 
proves  the  existence  of  a  spiritual  world  in- 
habited by  ex-human  beings.  This  experi- 
ment involves  the  demonstration  of  the  fact 
that  there  is  no  death. 

This  is  the  most  important  single  discovery 
ever  made  by  science.  To  prove  that  death 
does  not  end  all  has  been  the  most  valuable 
single  achievement  of  Man  in  the  physical 
body. 

By  a  scientific  process  a  man  may  obtain 
knowledge  of  higher  vibrations  than  those  re- 
ceived and  registered  by  the  physical  sensory 
organs. 

S19 


THK  GREAT  WORK 

The  scientific  formula  merely  accelerates 
the  natural  processes  of  evolution  and  is  a  nat- 
ural process. 

The  personal  experiment,  governed  bv 
exact  rules  and  l\  close  conformity  to 
natural  law,  constitutes  the  scientific 
demonstration  of  the  fact  of  life  after 
physical  death. 


S20 


CHAPTER  XXXIII 


TECHNICAL  WORK 


Natural  Science  knows  that  physical  mat- 
ter and  spiritual  matter  are  not  the  same. 
There  is  a  vast  difference  between  them  in 
the  degree  of  their  refinement  and  vibratory 
activity.  It  knows  that  a  Soul  in  the  physical 
body  cannot  see,  hear,  taste,  smell,  feel,  or 
otherwise  sense  the  things  of  the  spiritual 
planes  through  the  channels  of  physical 
sense-perception  alone.  It  knows  that  he  can 
sense  the  things  of  the  spiritual  planes  (some 
of  them,  at  least)  through  the  channels  of 
spiritual  sense-perception.  It  knows  that 
there  is  a  limitation  to  the  physical  sense  of 
vision.  It  knows  that  there  is  what  might 
well  be  termed  a  ''world"  of  material  things 
between  the  point  where  the  physical  vision 
ceases  and  the  spiritual  vision  begins. 

Physical  science  informs  us  that  the  lowest 
number  of  vibrations  per  second  which  the 
physical  eye   is  able  to   sense   as  "color"   is 

321 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

something  like  398,000,000,000,000.  This 
produces  the  physical  color  of  red.  The  ex- 
treme limit  of  the  physical  sense-perception 
of  color  is  that  of  the  ultra  violet,  which  re- 
quires 764,000,000,000,000  vibrations  per 
second. 

The  difference  between  these  two  numbers, 
which  is  366,000,000,000,000,  gives  us  the 
distance  (measured  in  vibratory  rating)  be- 
tween the  extremes  of  physical  vision.  It 
also  measures  the  scope,  or  the  width,  of  the 
field  within  which  the  physical  sense  of  sight 
is  able  to  operate. 

Let  us  suppose  that  it  requires  100  times  as 
many  vibrations  per  second  to  produce  the 
lowest  spiritual  color  (red)  as  it  does  to  pro- 
duce the  highest  physical  color  (violet). 

In  that  event  it  would  require  76,400,000,- 
000,000,000  vibrations  per  second  to  produce 
the  lowest  spiritual  color  within  the  range  of 
spiritual  vision  (which  is  spiritual  red). 

The  difference  between  this  number  and 
that  required  to  produce  the  highest  physical 
color,  violet,  is  75,636,000,000,000,000.  This, 
then,  would  represent  the  distance  (in  vibra- 

322 


TECHNICAL  WORK 

tory  activity)  between  the  physical  universe 
and  the  spiritual. 

Here  is  a  whole  world  which  we  are  un- 
able to  perceive  at  all,  under  what  we  call 
normal  conditions.  We  cannot  reach  up  to  it 
with  the  physical  vision  and  we  cannot  reach 
down  to  it  with  the  spiritual. 

It  would  almost  seem  as  if  Nature  had 
served  us  an  ungracious  trick  by  thus  con- 
cealing from  us  so  vast  a  universe  of  possibil- 
ities. This  gives  us  some  faint  conception  of 
the  distance  (measured  in  the  number  of  vi- 
brations) between  the  physical  universe 
(with  which  we  all  are  acquainted  and  con- 
cerning which  we  feel  that  we  have  consider- 
able definite  knowledge)  and  the  spiritual 
universe,  concerning  which  most  of  us  are 
almost  entirely  ignorant,  and  with  which  few 
men  in  the  physical  body  are  definitely  ac- 
quainted. It  gives  us  some  idea  of  the  dis- 
tance, in  vibratory  condition,  between  our 
physical  body  and  our  spiritual  body. 

There  is  a  strong  basis  of  truth  in  the  idea 
which  has  prevailed  throughout  all  times  and 
all  peoples  of  which  we  have  definite  knowl- 
edge, that  there  is  a  great  "Gulf"  fixed  be- 

323 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

twcen  this  physical  life  and  the  life  in  the 
spiritual,  after  it  has  passed  beyond  the  "val- 
ley of  the  shadow  of  death."  The  Great 
School  of  the  Masters  calls  it  a  "Field,"  in- 
stead of  a  Gulf. 

In  the  transition  called  Death,  the  largest 
majority  of  mankind  pass  into  the  "valley  of 
the  shadow,"  into  darkness.  This  is  because 
the  transition  involves: 

The  closing  of  the  physical  eyes  in  death, 
and  the  consequent  loss  of  physical  sight. 

The  elapsing  of  time  between  the  closing 
of  the  physical  vision  and  the  opening  of  the 
spiritual. 

The  consciousness  of  a  Soul  that  it  is  un- 
dergoing a  "transition." 

These  three  facts  in  the  experience  of  a 
Soul  are  what  impress  it  with  the  sensation 
that  it  is  crossing  a  great  "Gulf." 

It  often  occurs  that  the  dying,  in  the  last 
moments  of  physical  consciousness,  say  to 
those  about  them  that  it  is  growing  dark  and 
that  they  can  no  longer  see.  There  have  been 
many  instances  where  subsequently  the  spirit- 
ual vision  has  opened  and  they  see  the  bright 
forms  of  "angels"  about  them. 


TECHNICAL  WORK 

How  does  a  student  prove  for  himself  that 
there  is,  in  truth,  a  Gulf  which  Natural  Sci- 
ence calls  the  "Magnetic  Field"?  He  does  it 
in  the  following  manner: 

He  must  have  an  Instructor  who  is  able  to 
command  the  time  to  lay  out  his  work  for 
him. 

A  studio  must  be  prepared  and  properly 
equipped  for  the  study  of  "Spiritual  Optics." 

Everything  being  in  readiness  for  the 
work,  a  definite  and  sequential  line  of  per- 
sonal work  is  laid  out  for  the  student. 

Much  of  this  work  is  of  a  nature  which 
might  very  properly  be  termed  mechanical. 
It  is  in  the  nature  of  definite  and  specific  ex- 
ercises which  call  for  all  his  thought,  atten- 
tion and  effort. 

These  exercises  are  of  such  a  nature  as  to 
require  the  student  to  put  forth  his  personal 
effort  to  the  accomplishment  of  a  definite 
task. 

These  exercises  are  sequentially  arranged 
in  such  manner  as  to  impel  the  student  in  all 
his  efforts  in  a  direct  line  toward  the  "refine- 
ment of  his  vision."  Every  effort  he  puts 
forth    in    accordance    with    this    "Technical 

325 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Formulary"  produces  an  impulse  which  is 
centered  upon  the  "sense  of  sight/'  and  has 
for  its  purpose  the  extension  of  the  limita- 
tions of  his  vision. 

The  process  is  one  of  extending  the  limita- 
tions of  Consciousness  along  the  definite 
channel  of  vision.  Step  by  step  his  work  is 
accomplished,  until  he  has  traversed  the  en- 
tire distance,  or  field,  which  lies  between  the 
plane  of  purely  physical  nature  and  the  low- 
est plane  of  purely  spiritual  nature. 

It  is  all  a  work  of  the  most  intense  effort 
on  the  part  of  both  student  and  instructor. 
On  the  part  of  the  student  it  is  both  a  study 
and  a  labor.  It  is  an  education  and  an 
accomplishment.  It  is  an  intense  personal 
schooling  and  a  definite  personal  attainment. 
It  is  a  supremely  conscious  personal  effort 
and  an  equally  conscious  personal  realiza- 
tion. 

Notwithstanding  all  his  work  is  done  in 
the  broad  light  of  day  (bright  sun-light,  if 
possible),  the  technical  exercises  laid  out  for 
him  are  of  such  a  nature  that,  if  he  follows 
them  accurately,  he  is  able,  in  due  course  of 
time,  to  pass  voluntarily  into  a  state  and  con- 

326 


TECHNICAL  WORK 

dition  of  absolute  physical  darkness.  But  he 
is  not  able  to  accomplish  this  at  once.  It  re- 
quires time  and  the  most  patient  and  per- 
sistent practice.  It  comes  only  as  the  result 
of  intelligent,  courageous,  and  persistent  per- 
sonal effort  on  his  part.  The  results  come 
gradually. 

At  first  a  gentle  shade  is  observable,  as  if  a 
thin  cloud  has  passed  over  the  brilliantly 
shining  sun.  It  may  require  days  of  persist- 
ent effort  to  carry  the  process  beyond  this 
point.  After  a  w^hile  the  shade  begins  to 
take  on  a  deeper  tinge.  Each  step  is  repeated 
again  and  again,  until  the  student  is  able  to 
produce  the  conditions  at  Will,  and  with  per- 
fect facility. 

Day  after  day,  week  after  week,  he  keeps 
at  his  task,  until  at  last  he  is  able  to  produce 
at  Will  the  condition  of  absolute  physical 
darkness,  even  in  the  midst  of  the  most  bril- 
liant sunlight,  with  his  physical  eyes  wide 
open  and  his  Consciousness  wide  awake. 

What  does  this  mean?  That  he  is  gradu- 
ally learning  how  to  lift  his  attention  above 
the  plane  of  strictly  physical  material.  By 
the   exercise   of    a   cultivated   or   developed 

327 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Will  he  is  able  voluntarily  to  close  the  chan- 
nels of  physical  sense  (at  least  to  the  impres- 
sions of  the  grosser  forms  of  physical  mate- 
rial) and  open  at  the  same  time  other  chan- 
nels through  which  a  finer  field  of  Nature 
may  impress  itself  upon  his  Conscious- 
ness. He  is  gradually,  by  his  own  per- 
sonal effort,  extending  the  limitations  of  his 
Consciousness  along  the  line  of  vision.  He  is 
slowly  but  surely  entering  consciously  upon  a 
plane  of  materiality  which  is  above  and  be- 
yond that  which  he  has  previously  known. 

How  do  we  know?    Because: 

The  student  in  the  course  of  his  experimen- 
tation along  the  line  of  the  sense  of  vision, 
finds  that,  in  course  of  time  and  as  the  result 
of  his  own  personal  effort,  he  is  able  to 
awaken  his  consciousness  on  the  plane  of  his 
Magnetic  Element.  To  do  this  he  must  make 
a  conscious  transit  from  the  physical  con- 
sciousness. His  attention  must  be  fixed  upon 
the  spiritual  condition,  to  the  exclusion  of  the 
physical.  He  finally  succeeds  in  "letting  go" 
of  the  physical  channels  of  sense,  at  least  the 
grosser  form  of  the  physical,  and  lifting  his 
attention  to  the  Magnetic  Element  of  his  be- 

328 


TECHNICAL  WORK 

ing.  In  making  this  transit,  and  in  the  "let- 
ting go"  process,  he  passes  into  darkness. 

Gradually,  as  he  learns  to  manipulate  and 
control  the  Magnetic  Element  of  his  being, 
he  is  able  to  use  it  in  conjunction  with  the 
physical  sensory  organism  in  such  manner  as 
to  receive  impressions  through  it  which  quite 
transcend  the  level  of  physical  nature  as  we 
sense  it  when  in  (what  the  physical  scientist 
would  insist  is)  our  "normal"  condition,  or 
sense. 

It  is  a  fact  which  all  science  recognizes, 
that  we  are  able  to  sense  the  physical  world 
only  because  our  physical  channels  of  sense 
are  composed  of  physical  material  which  co- 
ordinates with  the  outside  physical  world.  It 
is  also  agreed  that  we  could  not  sense  any- 
thing of  a  physical  nature  outside  of  ourselves 
if  there  were  not  within  us  something  of  a 
physical  nature  which  is  capable  of  co-ordi- 
nating with  the  things  that  are  outside  of  us, 
and  responding  to  their  vibratory  action. 

When  the  student  is  able  to  enter  into  the 
most  perfect  physical  darkness  (under  the 
conditions  suggested),  in  course  of  time  he  is 
perfectly  conscious  that  he  is  beginning  to 

329 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

emerge,  as  it  were,  from  the  other  side  of  the 
darkness. 

He  first  begins  to  see  faint  tinges  of  color. 
Strange  as  it  may  appear,  the  first  color  he  is 
able  to  distinguish  is  that  of  deep  red.  It 
thus  corresponds  to  the  lowest  color  visible  to 
the  physical  sense  of  sight.  But  it  is  not 
physical.  He  knows  that  it  is  not.  While  it 
is  red,  it  is  a  red  such  as  no  man  ever  beheld 
with  the  physical  eye.  Its  intensity  and  its 
perfect  quality  are  such  as  to  proclaim  it  a 
color  which  belongs  to  a  finer  plane  of  ma- 
teriality than  any  with  which  the  physical  eye 
is  acquainted. 

In  the  same  measured  way  this  lowest  color 
of  this  new  plane  of  matter  is  slowly  but 
surely  developed,  as  the  direct  result  of  the 
continued  personal  effort  of  the  student  to 
penetrate  to  yet  higher  and  finer  realms. 
When  this  wonderful  new  red  has  been  fully 
developed,  there  begins  to  appear  the  first 
faint  shade  of  orange.  This,  in  turn,  is  slowly 
but  surely  developed  in  the  same  methodical 
way,  and  in  direct  response  to  the  effort  of 
the  individual.  There  is  the  same  wonderful 
intensity    and    quality   which    proclaim    that 


TECHNICAL  WORK 

this  is  a  color  belonging  to  a  world  of  mate- 
riality above  and  beyond  that  which  we  know 
as  physical. 

In  the  same  wonderful  manner  the  remain- 
ing colors  of  the  spectrum  are  developed. 
Beginning  with  the  red,  his  expanding  con- 
sciousness leads  him  through  the  fields  of 
orange,  yellow,  green,  blue,  indigo,  and  vio- 
let. The  development  of  these  wonderful 
new  colors  is  in  exact  accord  with  the  facts  of 
physical  science.  They  are  developed  to  the 
Consciousness  of  the  Individual  in  the  exact 
order  of  their  vibratory  ratings.  They  begin 
with  the  lowest  vibratory  rating,  which  is 
red,  and  proceed  in  a  regular  ascending  scale 
until  the  sense  is  able  to  perceive  the  violet 
and  then  the  ultra  violet.  With  the  develop- 
ment of  each  new  color  there  comes  to  the 
consciousness  the  realization  that  this  is  a 
color  which  belongs  to  a  world  of  materiality 
above  and  beyond  all  that  we  know  as  purely 
physical. 

In  the  unfolding  process  of  the  sense-per- 
ception this  same  order  of  the  spectrum  is 
always  maintained.  When  the  student  is  able 
to  penetrate  through  the  red  into  the  orange, 

331 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

he  is  also  able  to  recede  again  and  withdraw 
his  consciousness  voluntarily  back  into  the 
darkness  and  thence  still  farther  backward  to 
the  plane  of  his  ordinary  physical  vision. 
When  he  turns  again  to  pierce  the  darkness 
he  passes  through  the  darkness  into  the  red, 
through  the  red  into  the  orange,  and  so  on. 
The  same  thing  is  true  when  he  is  able  to  pen- 
etrate even  through  to  the  ultra  violet.  Each 
time  he  crosses  the  "great  divide"  he  passes 
first  into  the  darkness,  thence  into  the  red, 
into  the  orange,  into  the  yellow,  into  the 
green,  into  the  blue,  into  the  indigo,  into  the 
violet,  etc. 

When  he  proceeds  to  withdraw  his  vision 
after  once  having  penetrated  to  the  plane  of 
this  new  violet,  he  recedes  in  the  exact  re- 
verse order  of  colors.  On  the  way  back  to 
the  plane  of  the  ordinary  physical  vision,  he 
proceeds  from  the  violet  through  the  indigo, 
blue,  green,  yellow,  orange  and  red,  in  their 
regular  order,  back  into  the  darkness,  and 
thence  to  the  plane  of  the  purely  physical. 

After  long-continued  effort,  and  many  rep- 
etitions, the  student  is  able  to  pass  quickly 
through  this  entire  color  field  to  its  extreme 

332 


TECHNICAL  WORK 

limit  of  ultra  violet  and  back  again  to  the 
plane  of  the  physical.  In  the  course  of 
months,  as  he  gains  added  facility  in  the  con- 
trol of  his  sense  of  vision,  he  becomes  able  to 
pass  from  the  ordinary  physical  plane 
through  to  this  new  ultra  violet  so  rapidly  as 
seemingly  to  pass  over  all  the  intervening 
colors.  This  is  because  the  transition  is  made 
so  rapidly  that  there  is  not  sufficient  time  for 
him  to  observe  the  intervening  colors  in  such 
manner  as  to  enable  them  to  impress  them- 
selves upon  his  consciousness  w^ith  the  sense 
of  their  separateness. 

When  his  experimentations  have  reduced 
the  process  to  a  point  where  he  has  obtained 
absolute  mastery  of  his  powers  of  vision 
within  those  limitations,  it  is  borne  in  upon 
his  Consciousness  with  the  power  of  absolute 
experience  and  personal  knowledge,  that  in 
making  the  transition  from  the  ordinary 
physical  plane  through  to  the  ultra  violet 
color  of  this  new  realm,  he  has  traversed  a 
great,  broad  "field"  of  Nature  hitherto 
wholly  unknown  to  him. 

In  the  course  of  his  development  the  stu- 
dent runs  the  whole  range  of  the  spectrum  of 

333 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

colors  in  this  Magnetic  Field.  It  may  well 
be  wondered  if  ''color"  is  the  only  thing  he  is 
able  to  see  and  sense  in  this  new  and  expan- 
sive Field  of  Nature.  A  little  reflection  will 
suggest  the  fact  that  he  not  only  sees  colors, 
but  "things."  He  is,  for  the  time,  in  con- 
scious relationship  to  a  world  of  material 
Nature  which  is  as  full  of  "things"  as  is  this 
world  of  physical  nature  with  which  all  men 
are  familiar. 

Here  it  is  that  he  sees  the  magnetic  forms 
of  the  under  world  of  animal  life  and  nature 
that  have  passed  out  of  this  physical  life  and 
have  not  yet  been  able  to  divest  themselves  of 
their  "Magnetic  Bodies."  Here  also  it  is  that 
he  sees  many  of  the  earth-bound  men,  women 
and  children  who  have  not  yet  been  able  to 
cast  off  their  Magnetic  Bodies.  Here  it  is 
that  he  sees  the  struggles  of  the  vicious  and 
the  ignorant  who  have  passed  out  of  this  life 
and  are  still  endeavoring  to  live  upon  the 
plane  of  earth. 

With  these  facts  in  mind  the  student  can 
understand  how  it  is  and  why  it  is  that  when 
he  has  succeeded  in  lifting  his  Consciousness 
to  his  Magnetic  Element  he  is  able  to  see  the 

S34 


TECHNICAL  WORK 

Magnetic  Element  of  Nature  and  the  ma- 
terial things  and  colors  of  Nature  within  the 
''Magnetic  Field." 

The  Magnetic  Field  lies  between  the  phys- 
ical and  the  spiritual  planes  of  matter.  The 
student  cannot  perceive  it  with  the  purely 
physical  sense  of  vision  for  the  reason  that  it 
is  too  fine  to  impress  itself  upon  that  sense,  as 
we  generally  exercise  it  and  understand  it. 
Neither  can  he  sense  it  with  the  spiritual 
vision,  for  the  reason  that  he  has  not  yet  de- 
veloped the  power  to  use  his  spiritual  sensory 
organism.    As  yet  he  is  spiritually  blind. 

The  technical  work  thus  far  outlined  has 
not  yet  enabled  the  student  to  penetrate  be- 
yond the  realm  of  the  Magnetic  Field.  Fol- 
lowing closely  the  analogies  of  physical 
nature,  it  is  not  difficult  for  him  to  under- 
stand that  when  he  is  able  to  reach  the  ultra 
violet  realm  at  Will  and  with  perfect  faci- 
lity, he  Is  somewhere  near  the  limit  of  the 
Magnetic  Field.  This  is  what  his  knowledge 
of  physical  nature  would  tell  him,  for  he  can 
readily  understand  that  this  finer  Field  of 
Nature  is,  in  point  of  refinement  and  vibra- 

335 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

tory  activity,  a  perfect  harmonic  of  physical 
nature. 

What  is  yet  beyond  the  new  ultra  violet? 
There  is  but  one  way  for  him  to  know  for 
himself.  He  must  penetrate  into  the,  as  yet, 
unknown  realm  which  lies  beyond  it.  It  re- 
quires further  unfoldment  of  his  powers.  He 
must  push  out  the  limitation  of  his  conscious- 
ness along  the  line  of  vision  still  further.  He 
must  see  for  himself.  So,  under  definite  in- 
structions he  proceeds  with  his  work  of 
evolution. 

In  the  course  of  time,  and  as  the  result  of 
his  patient  and  persistent  effort,  a  new  color 
begins  to  develop.  It  is  that  of  a  silvery 
whiteness.  It  has  something  of  the  shimmer 
and  sheen  of  the  bright  moonlight  upon  the 
surface  of  a  perfectly  quiescent  body  of  clear 
water.  Its  intensity  is  a  thousandfold  greater. 
It  is  beyond  anything  ever  before  experi- 
enced. It  seems  to  tax  the  power  of  resist- 
ance of  the  sense  of  sight  to  its  utmost  limita- 
tions. It  would  seem  to  the  student  that  one 
more  shade  of  intensity  would  result  in  com- 
plete blindness.  There  is  nothing  in  phys- 
ical nature  to  which  this  new  color  may  be 

336 


TECHNICAL  WORK 

compared  in  such  manner  as  to  convey  any 
adequate  conception  of  its  beauty  and  its 
brilliancy.  No  man  can  possibly  conceive  of 
it  until  he  has  seen  it,  and  having  once  seen 
it  he  realizes  the  utter  futility  of  ever  at- 
tempting to  describe  or  portray  it  to  another. 
This  would  seem  to  be  the  very  extreme  limit 
of  the  possibility  of  a  Soul  along  the  line  of 
the  extension  of  vision.  Not  so.  There  is  yet 
a  w^hole  world  out  beyond  this  point  that  may 
be  brought  within  the  range  of  vision. 

In  the  same  methodical  manner  as  before 
there  comes  into  view  yet  another  color.  This 
also  is  new  to  him.  It  is  neither  bright,  nor 
is  it  like  anything  in  physical  nature.  Its 
strongest  quality  seems  to  be  its  power  of 
absorption.  There  are  no  words  coined 
with  which  to  describe  it  with  accuracy.  It 
produces  an  effect  which  suggests  to  the  con- 
sciousness what  might  almost  be  described  as 
a  shade  of  "muddy  brown"  mingled  with  a 
peculiar  shade  of  "smoky  red."  Scientific 
experiment  has  demonstrated  that  this  is  the 
color  produced  by  the  resolution  of  all  the 
colors  of  the  spectrum  into  one  perfect  blend- 

337 


THL  GREAT  WORK 

ing.  For  this  reason  it  is  known  to  Natural 
Science  as  the  "Resolving  Color." 

This  is  the  extreme  limit  of  the  Magnetic 
Field  of  vision.  When  the  student  has  pene- 
trated into  this  resolving  color,  he  stands  at 
the  very  gateway  of  the  spiritual  world. 
From  the  farther  side  of  this  color  he 
emerges  into  the  perfect  light  of  the  first  spir- 
itual plane.  Here  again  he  is  in  a  new  world. 
This  also  is  a  world  of  material  conditions 
beyond  the  power  of  human  language  to 
depict. 

There  is  one  thing  which  never  fails  to  im- 
press itself  upon  the  consciousness  of  the 
student  at  his  first  entry  into  this  world  of 
spiritual  nature.  It  is  the  absolute  crystal 
clearness  of  the  "atmosphere."  So  wonderful 
is  this  that  distance  seems  to  have  been  wiped 
out  of  existence.  The  Soul  seems  to  be  able 
to  penetrate  to  Infinity,  as  it  were,  and  with 
not  the  least  effort  nor  with  the  least  under- 
standing or  appreciation  of  distance. 

Those  who  have  traveled  much  in  the  re- 
gion of  the  Rocky  Mountains  will  recall  the 
effect  of  the  clear  atmosphere  upon  their 
ability  to  estimate  distances.   They  are  at  first 

S3t 


TECHNICAL  WORK 

amazed  to  find  that  objects  which  appear  to 
be  but  two,  three  or  four  miles  away  are  in 
truth  twenty,  forty,  or  even  a  hundred  miles 
distant.  Those  who  have  experienced  this 
character  of  deception  will  have  but  the 
faintest  possible  suggestion  of  the  impression 
made  upon  the  consciousness  of  the  student 
upon  his  first  conscious  entry  into  a  pure  spir- 
itual atmosphere. 

Up  to  this  point  we  have  been  considering 
the  technical  work  in  its  specific  application 
to  the  unfoldment  and  development  of  the 
sense  of  spiritual  vision  alone.  The  other 
four  senses  have  not  entered  into  the  prob- 
lem. The  question  naturally  arises  as  to  what, 
if  any,  difference  in  method  is  necessary  for 
the  unfoldment  and  development  of  these 
other  senses. 

Let  us  suppose  the  student  has  devoted  his 
effort  and  his  attention  alone  to  the  develop- 
ment of  the  one  sense,  the  sense  of  spiritual 
sight.  The  exercises  laid  out  for  him  for  the 
accomplishment  of  this  one  specific  result  are 
of  such  a  nature  as  to  have  their  refining  and 
developing  effect  upon  all  his  spiritual  senses 
at  the  same  time.     It  is  true  that  his  effort, 

339 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

having  been  devoted  along  the  one  definite 
line,  will  develop  that  one  specific  sense 
somewhat  in  advance  of  the  others.  If  he 
had  devoted  himself  to  the  sense  of  hear- 
ing to  the  exclusion  of  all  the  other  senses,  in 
that  event  the  sense  of  spiritual  hearing 
would  have  been  the  first  to  have  responded 
to  his  effort.  In  either  event,  when  any  one 
of  the  senses  is  fully  developed  independ- 
ently, it  is  a  simple  and  easy  matter  to  unfold 
the  others. 

The  formulary  of  technical  exercises  varies 
to  meet  the  demands  of  each  distinct  sense. 
This  is  a  mere  matter  of  detail. 

From  all  that  has  been  said  it  will  be  clear 
to  the  student  that  the  process,  from  begin- 
ning to  end,  is  one  which  has  for  its  purpose 
the  extension  of  the  limitations  of  Conscious- 
ness. It  will  also  be  clear  to  him  that  this  is 
accomplished  only  by  the  application  of  his 
Will  along  definite  lines  of  eflfort.  It  comes 
as  the  result  of  the  play  of  the  Will  upon  the 
limitations  of  Consciousness  in  an  intelligent 
efifort  to  extend  those  limitations. 

The  method  of  procedure  according  to  the 
formulary  of  The  Great  School  of  Natural 

S40 


TECHNICAL  WORK 

Science  is  the  exact  antithesis  of  that  em- 
ployed by  those  who  follow  the  formulary  of 
the  usual  "developing  circle"  for  the  purpose 
of  reaching  a  state  of  self-surrender  and  sub- 
jection to  outside  intelligences.  The  Formu- 
lary of  The  Great  School  of  Natural  Science 
has  for  its  object  the  establishment  of  the  most 
absolute  Self-Control  possible,  while  the  de- 
veloping circle  has  for  its  object  the  establish- 
ment of  the  most  absolute  lack  of  Self-Control 
possible:  perfect  self-surrender,  or  rather  per- 
fect surrender  of  Self  to  the  control  of  others. 

It  is  of  the  utmost  importance  to  utter  a 
warning  which  shall  impress  itself  upon  all 
those  who  may  be  impelled  to  experiment 
along  the  lines  of  the  technical  work  here  but 
briefly  indicated.  There  has  been  no  attempt 
to  place  before  the  reader  any  part  of  the 
definite  technical  formulary.  The  general 
nature  of  this  formulary  and  of  the  work  to 
be  done  under  and  in  accordance  with  it  is  all 
that  has  been  attempted.  For  a  number  of 
good  and  sufficient  reasons  it  is  not  possible  to 
present  to  the  world  the  exact  "Technical 
Formulary." 

The  Technical  Formulary  is  secret  work. 

341 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Every  individual  who  receives  it  is  obli- 
gated to  give  it  only  to  those  who  have  been 
tried  and  tested,  and  found  to  be  duly  and 
truly  prepared,  worthy  and  well  qualified  to 
receive  it. 

It  can  be  given  only  in  the  same  manner  in 
which  it  was  received,  which  is  "from  mouth 
to  ear." 

The  information  contained  in  the  Formu- 
lary is  of  such  a  nature  that  it  might  be  made 
the  basis  of  incalculable  injury  to  the  inno- 
cent if  placed  in  the  hands  of  the  unscrupu- 
lous or  the  ambitious. 

The  very  fact  that  the  formulary  is  not 
given  should  be  accepted  by  the  reader  as  a 
warning  not  to  attempt  a  line  of  technical 
work  based  upon  anything  herein  contained. 
If  there  may  be  those  who  shall  ignore  the 
warning  thus  given,  let  it  be  understood  that 
the  author  must  not  be  held  responsible  for 
whatsoever  unhappy  or  harmful  results  may 
be  thereby  entailed. 


ut 


CHAPTER  XXXIV 


FORFEITURE 


The  Student  who  by  his  Personal  Effort  has 
unfolded  his  Spiritual  Consciousness  until  he 
is  able,  at  Will,  to  penetrate  with  his  sense 
of  vision  the  Brilliant  Barriers  of  the  Mag- 
netic Field,  and  stand,  with  vision  clear,  upon 
the  threshold  of  the  First  Spiritual  plane,  has 
solved  but  a  few  of  the  primary  and  prelim- 
inary problems  of  life. 

He  has  demonstrated,  by  the  exercise  of  his 
sense  of  vision  and  his  power  of  observation 
that: 

There  is  a  world  of  Spiritual  Matter,  Life 
and  Intelligence. 

It  is  a  world  inhabited  by  spiritual  men, 
women  and  children  who  have  lived  upon  the 
plane  of  physical  nature,  and  who,  at  phys- 
ical death,  have  emigrated  to  that  country 
and  condition. 

Lying  between  these  two  worlds,  or  coun- 
tries, there  is  a  great  Magnetic  Field  of  ma- 

343 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

terial  condition  whose  coarsest  stratum  co- 
ordinates with  the  finest  stratum  of  physical 
nature  upon  the  basis  of  a  natural  harmonic; 
and  whose  finest  stratum  in  analogous  manner 
co-ordinates  with  the  coarsest  stratum  of  the 
first  spiritual  condition. 

It  is  possible  for  one,  while  yet  in  the  phys- 
ical body,  by  Personal  Effort  in  conformity 
with  a  definite  Formulary,  so  to  extend  the 
limitations  of  his  consciousness  that  he  is  able 
voluntarily  to  sense  the  First  Plane  of  the 
Spiritual  World  and  all  the  intervening  con- 
ditions of  the  Magnetic  Field  that  lies  be- 
tween that  world  and  the  physical. 

He  is  able  to  make  this  visual  transit  at  any 
time,  voluntarily  and  without  the  aid  or  co- 
operation of  any  other  individual  human  in- 
telligence, incarnate  or  excarnate. 

He  is  able  to  converse  with  the  inhabitants 
of  the  Spiritual  World  as  freely  and  as  nat- 
urally as  he  docs  with  those  of  the  physical. 

These  are  some  of  the  observations  a  stu- 
dent is  able  to  make  through  the  development 
of  his  Spiritual  Consciousness  while  yet  in  the 
physical  body.  All  this  comes  to  him  as  the 
result  of  his  "Second   Degree"  work,  under 

S44 


FORFEITURE 

the  First  Section  of  the  Technical  Work.  He 
has  not  yet  reached  the  "Third  Degree" 
work,  the  Master's  Degree,  which  covers  the 
Second  Section  of  the  Technical  Work.  He 
is  not  yet  able  to  liberate  himself,  at  Will, 
from  the  physical  body,  nor  "travel  in  foreign 
countries."  Thus  far  his  field  of  observation 
and  experience  is  limited  to  such  sections  of 
the  Spiritual  Universe  as  he  is  able  to  cover 
from  his  point  of  observation  on  the  plane  of 
physical  nature. 

Even  from  this  limited  point  of  vision,  he 
is  able  to  solve  such  of  the  profound  problems 
of  life  as  remove  from  the  Individual  Con- 
sciousness all  the  most  perplexing  doubts 
which  haunt  a  Soul  which  has  not  yet  entered 
upon  the  "Path  that  leads  to  the  South." 

Should  he  be  able  to  go  forward  and  com- 
plete the  Second  Section  of  the  Technical 
Formulary,  he  is  able  then  to  leave  his  phys- 
ical body  and  travel  at  Will  in  the  realms  of 
Spiritual  Life  and  Nature.  Thus  liberated, 
he  is  able  to  demonstrate  many  of  the  tran- 
scendent problems  of  Spiritual  Life  which,  if 
they  could  but  be  brought  to  the  conscious- 
ness of  all  embodied  humanity,  would  surely 

345 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

inspire  mankind  to  nobler  pursuits,  higher 
purposes,  loftier  ambitions,  more  exalted 
aspirations,  and  cleaner,  sweeter  and  purer 
lives  while  yet  upon  this  plane  of  earth. 

Let  us  suppose  that  you  have  come  to  the 
School  in  the  attitude  of  the  Student.  Let  us 
suppose  that  you  have  approached  the  Great 
Work  in  strict  conformity  with  all  its  re- 
quirements; that  you  have  given  "the  right 
knock,"  and  have  been  duly  and  regularly 
admitted.  Let  us  assume  that  you  have  finally 
completed  the  "Ethical  Section"  of  the  work 
covered  by  the  formulary  referred  to;  that 
you  are  living  your  life  from  day  to  day  and 
from  hour  to  hour  in  strict  conformity  with 
the  spirit  and  purpose  of  the  Great  Work, 
and  that  you  have  finally  carried  the  "tech- 
nical work"  far  enough  to  have  developed 
within  yourself  the  absolute  power  of  volun- 
tary, free  and  independent  spiritual  vision. 
Let  us  suppose,  after  all  this  constructive 
work  and  development  have  been  accom- 
plished, that  there  comes  to  you  the  tempta- 
tion to  turn  your  knowledge  and  your  powers 
to  selfish  and  immoral  purposes,  or  to  abuse 
and   misuse   them   to   the   intended    injury  of 

S46 


I 


FORFEITURE 

your  fellow  men,  and  that  you  yield  to  the 
temptation,  knowingly  and  intentionally,  and 
thus  deliberately  violate  the  Constructive 
Principle  upon  which  your  spiritual  devel- 
opment has  been  accomplished;  what  effect 
will  this  conscious  and  intentional  violation 
of  moral  principle  have  upon  your  spiritual 
development,  and  what  will  be  its  effects 
upon  your  already  developed  spiritual 
powers? 

You  THEREBY  LOSE  YOUR  SPIRITUAL  DE- 
VELOPMENT AND  FORFEIT  YOUR  SPIRITUAL 
POWERS. 

Do  not  allow  yourself  to  pass  beyond  this 
point  until  the  full  meaning  and  truth  of  the 
foregoing  statement  and  of  the  principle  of 
Nature  upon  which  it  rests  have  burned 
themselves  into  the  very  texture  of  your  being 
and  registered  themselves  upon  your  wakeful 
consciousness  beyond  recall. 

You  THEREBY  LOSE  YOUR  SPIRITUAL  DE- 
VELOPMENT AND  FORFEIT  YOUR  SPIRITUAL 
POWERS. 

This  has  been  demonstrated  over  and  over, 
again  and  again,  and  always  with  the  same 
result.     There     have     been     no     exceptions 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

throughout  all  the  past.  There  can  be  none, 
ft  is  Nature's  Law  of  Individual  Life.  It  is 
as  scientifically  true  as  it  is  that  an  electric 
engine  loses  its  motive  power  when  the  elec- 
trical current  which  runs  it  is  broken,  or  de- 
stroyed, or  disconnected.  It  is  as  scientific- 
ally true  as  is  the  fact  that  an  eagle  soaring  in 
the  heavens  will  fall  to  the  earth  //  it  ceases 
to  exercise  the  power  by  which  it  reached 
that  exalted  height.  It  is  as  scientifically 
true  as  it  is  that  man  will  lose  his  physical 
health  and  acquired  physical  powers  //  he 
violates  the  Constructive  Law  of  his  life 
whereby  his  physical  health  and  his  physical 
powers  were  acquired. 

And  yet,  doubtless  there  are  those  who  will 
be  impelled  to  ask  why  this  is  so.  Why  is  it 
that  one  who  has  really  and  truly  developed 
within  himself  the  power  of  Constructive 
Spiritual  Vision  will,  or  even  can,  lose  that 
power  if  he  should  knowingly  and  intention- 
ally abuse  or  misuse  it,  or  make  of  it  the 
means  of  deceiving,  defrauding,  or  taking 
advantage  of  his  fellows,  or  in  any  manner 
converting  his  power  into  a  leverage  for  sel- 
fish gratification  at  the  expense  of  others,  or 


FORFEITURE 

if  he  should  make  of  it  an  instrument  for  the 
gratification  of  selfish  personal  ambitions  or 
of  greed  for  material  things? 

Morality  is  the  foundation  which  Nature 
has  established  upon  which  alone  all  Con- 
structive Spirituality  rests.  All  Independent 
Spiritual  and  Psychical  Powers  depend,  pri- 
marily, solely  and  entirely  upon  the  individ- 
ual Practice  of  Moral  Principles.  Whatever 
destroys  the  natural  foundation  upon  which 
Constructive  Spirituality  rests,  thereby  and 
at  the  same  time  destroys  the  Constructive 
Spirituality  which  has  been  built  upon  that 
foundation.  Whatever  reverses  or  destroys 
the  Practice  of  Moral  Principles  thereby  and 
at  the  same  time  destroys  the  only  possible 
source  from  which  Spiritual  Powers  are  or 
may  be  developed. 

Every  student  who  has  taken  the  work  in 
conformity  with  the  Ethical  Formulary;  who 
has  been  successful  in  the  independent  de- 
velopment of  his  spiritual  faculties,  capac- 
ities and  powers;  who  has  completed  the 
demonstration;  and  who  thereafter  know- 
ingly and  intentionally  and  of  his  own  free 
and  independent  Choice  has  turned  from  the 

349 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Moral  Principles  of  the  Formulary  and  en- 
tered upon  a  life  of  immorality,  dishonesty, 
trickery  or  fraud,  has  inevitably  "lost  his 
spiritual  development  and  forfeited  his  spir- 
itual powers." 

The  man  or  the  woman  who  destroys  the 
moral  foundation  upon  which  he  or  she  has 
built  up  a  state  or  condition  of  Constructive 
Spirituality,  thereby  at  the  same  time,  and 
by  the  same  act,  destroys  the  superstructure 
thus  erected. 

An  individual  who  has  developed  spirit- 
ual powers  through  the  Practice  of  Moral 
Principles,  by  the  same  law  loses  and  forfeits 
those  powers  the  moment  he  destroys  the 
basis  on  which  they  rest,  that  is,  when  he  be- 
gins to  practice  principles  which  are  not 
Moral. 

An  individual  who  knowingly  and  inten- 
tionally violates  the  Law  upon  which  his 
power  depends,  thereby  forfeits  his  Poirer. 
He  forfeits  his  power  because  he  destroys  the 
foundation  upon  which  it  rests. 


S50 


CHAPTER  XXXV 


MEAT  AND  MORALS 


Mastership  is  not  a  problem  in  dietetics. 
Morality  is  not  a  matter  of  menu.  Construc- 
tive Spirituality  is  not  a  question  of  food. 

It  would  seem  that  these  propositions 
should  not  be  necessary  for  the  enlighten- 
ment of  men  and  women  whose  sense  of  the 
practical  and  the  rational  is  so  well  devel- 
oped as  it  is  in  the  average  native-born  Amer- 
ican. Under  ordinary  conditions  our  Occi- 
dental intelligence  is  abundantly  capable  of 
dealing  sanely  and  judiciously  with  problems 
of  such  a  nature. 

There  are  special  and  adequate  reasons 
why  the  subject  of  diet,  in  its  relation  to 
psychic  development,  has  become  a  subject  of 
great  confusion  in  the  minds  of  many  of  our 
western  students  of  psychology.  A  partial 
conception  of  the  extent  to  which  this  con- 
fusion exists  may  be  obtained  from  a  study  of 
the  various  and   conflicting  systems  of  diet 

3S1 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

advocated  by  those  who  class  themselves  in 
the  progressive  school  of  "New  Thought." 

The  subject  of  dietetics  is  one  to  which 
The  Great  School  of  the  Masters  has  given 
the  same  careful  consideration  it  has  given 
to  every  other  branch  of  science  within  the 
range  of  its  scientific  inquiries. 

The  Great  School  of  the  Masters,  as  a  re- 
sult of  its  ages  of  research  and  experimenta- 
tion, finds  that  the  subject  of  diet  is  one  of 
great  adaptability.  It  is  one  to  which  the  stu- 
dent of  this  School  needs  give  but  a  fraction 
of  the  attention  given  it  by  those  who  elevate 
it  to  the  status  of  a  religion. 

It  has  been  found  by  actual  test,  that  if  an 
individual  will  ''Live  the  Life";  if  he  will 
conform  his  life  to  the  demands  of  the 
Ethical  Formulary,  and  then  practice  ''Tem- 
perance in  all  things,''  the  subject  of  diet  will 
adapt  itself  to  the  specific  needs  and  demands 
of  that  life. 

Without  knowing  why,  he  will  find  him- 
self losing  appetite  for  certain  kinds  of  food, 
and  at  the  same  time  he  will  discover  in  him- 
self a  growing  ''taste"  for  certain  other  foods 
for  which  he  had  no  previous  craving.   This 

352 


MEAT  AND  MORALS 

adjusting  process  will  continue  until  Nature 
has  found  for  him  a  character  of  diet  exactly 
adapted  to  the  "New  Life." 

The  subject,  being  one  which  depends  so 
largely  upon  the  individuality  of  the  student, 
is  one  which  each  individual  student  must  re- 
ceive from  his  own  particular  instructor. 
Any  attempt  to  lay  down  a  diet  which  will 
adapt  itself  perfectly  to  all  men,  is  a  prob- 
lem which  no  intelligent  individual  would 
attempt  to  solve.  This  has  reference  to  a  diet 
for  the  specific  purpose  of  facilitating  Inde- 
pendent Spiritual  Unfoldment. 

Even  if  the  student  should  not  be  in  posi- 
tion to  make  any  change  whatsoever  in  his 
diet,  if  he  will  but  "Live  the  Life"  he  will 
find  in  time  that  he  will  have  earned  Nature's 
reward  therefor :  the  awakening  of  his 
"Spiritual  Consciousness,"  concerning  which 
every  man  or  woman  who  has  come  to  this 
as  a  Personal  Experience  will  know  what  is 
meant.  This  Spiritual  Consciousness  is  the 
first  distinct  personal  evidence  of  the  unfold- 
ment of  a  Soul  and  of  the  ascendancy  of  a 
Moral  Man. 

It  has  been  demonstrated  that  one  who  has 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

wrought  out  the  complete  Formulary  can  re- 
turn to  a  mixed  (meat)  diet  without  forfeit- 
ing his  spiritual  sight,  hearing,  touch,  taste 
and  smell,  or  his  power  to  "travel  in  foreign 
countries"  at  Will. 

This  demonstration  has  resulted  in  one  of 
the  important  modern  "findings"  of  the  An- 
cient School  of  the  Masters. 

It  has  been  demonstrated  that  once  the  stu- 
dent has  attained  to  mastery  of  the  faculties, 
capacities  and  powers  of  the  Soul,  and  has 
come  into  perfect  voluntary  control  of  his 
spiritual  sensory  organism,  the  problem  of 
diet  is  one  which,  for  the  most  part,  solves 
itself.  It  would  appear  that  when  a  Soul 
has  once  come  into  complete  mastery  of 
its  material  organisms,  the  physical  and  the 
spiritual  bodies,  it  possesses  a  chemicalizing 
power  which  is  capable  of  reducing  foods, 
without  special  selection,  to  the  necessary 
degree  of  refinement  to  meet  the  demands  of 
the  more  refined  condition  of  its  material 
organism.  Strange  as  this  may  appear,  it  is, 
after  all,  but  a  natural  concomitant  of  Mas- 
tership. It  follows  as  a  natural  consequence, 
that  when  a  Soul  has  become  a  perfect  Master 

354 


MEAT  AND  MORALS 

of  its  material  instruments,  it  should  know 
how  to  care  for  them  as  well  as  how  to  use 
them. 

There  are  those  who  carry  the  subject  of 
diet  to  the  point  of  religious  fanaticism. 
These  hold  that  the  eating  of  meat  in  any 
form  is  a  crime  against  Nature,  in  that  it  in- 
volves the  taking  of  individual  life. 

If  it  is  true  that  individual  life  is  a  sacred 
thing,  then  Nature  has  made  us  all  great 
crim  /lals.  For,  in  every  drink  of  the  purest 
water  with  which  we  quench  our  thirst  there 
are  a  million  individual  lives.  And  each  one 
of  these  we  sacrifice  to  our  own. 

Many  of  the  fruits  we  eat  with  great  relish 
are  literally  alive  with  living  animal  organ- 
isms. Every  morsel  of  such  food  we  eat  in- 
volves the  destruction  of  many  lives.  And 
yet,  some  of  us  pride  ourselves  on  the  assump- 
tion that  we  eat  no  "animal  foods,"  as  if  it 
were  a  matter  of  great  moral  significance. 

What  sufficient  argument  could  we  present 
to  the  Esquimaux  and  other  tribes  of  men 
who  are  compelled  by  climatic  and  other  con- 
ditions to  depend  upon  animal  foods  or  die? 

What  shall  we  say  of  the  fact  that  Nature 

355 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

seems  to  have  created  one  species  of  animal 
as  food  for  another  in  all  the  departments  of 
animal  life? 

It  would  appear  from  a  survey  of  the 
question  as  a  whole,  that  Nature  in  her 
"economy  of  matter"  intended  that  the  king- 
doms of  earth  should  draw  their  physical 
sustenance  from  each  other;  but  established  a 
natural  repulsion  in  consanguinity,  or  family 
relationship.  Whether  or  not  Nature  has 
made  a  mistake,  or  whether  man  has  made  a 
mistake  in  following  the  natural  cravings  of 
his  climatic  constitution,  are  still  among  the 
"open  questions." 

There  are  those  who  attempt  to  solve  this 
question  by  drawing  the  line  at  the  "warm 
blooded"  animals,  or  those  having  "red 
blood."  Is  not  this  an  arbitrary  ruling  with- 
out foundation  in  Morality?  Is  not  a  fish  as 
truly  a  living  individuality  as  a  fowl?  Is  not 
a  fowl  as  truly  a  living  individuality  as 
an  ox? 

A  certain  Oriental  sect  has  endeavored  to 
solve  the  problem  by  excluding  from  their 
diet  all  life  of  every  kind  and  character 
above  the  vegetable  kingdom.    With  them  it 

156 


MEAT  AND  MORALS 

is  not  altogether  a  matter  of  diet.  It  is  a  re- 
ligion, at  the  foundation  of  which  is  the 
dogma  of  the  "sacredness  of  all  life."  With 
them  a  fly  or  a  mosquito,  or  a  spider,  or  a 
microbe  is  as  sacred  as  human  life. 

It  is  not  difficult  to  imagine  the  unsanitary 
results  of  such  a  dogma.  It  is  said  of  these 
people  that  they  will  not  even  rid  themselves 
of  the  vermin  that  infest  the  human  body. 
They  live  in  the  midst  of  conditions  which 
would  be  impossible  to  those  of  this  civiliza- 
tion and  people. 

There  are  those  who  hold  that  a  strictly 
vegetable  diet  has  its  advantage  in  that  it 
gives  to  a  Soul  a  distinctly  moral  uplift, 
and  that  the  vegetarian  is  therefore  a  better 
man  morally  than  he  would  be  if  he  lived 
upon  animal  food. 

To  what  extent  this  theory  may  be  tenable 
should  be  suggested  by  the  comparative 
moral  status  of  the  Chinese,  as  a  people. 
During  many  centuries  they  have  lived  al- 
most exclusively  upon  a  diet  of  which  rice  is 
the  staple.  They  have  therefore  had  the  op- 
portunity to  demonstrate  what  the  moral  up- 
lift of  such  a  diet  would  do  through  a  long 

357 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

line  of  heredity.  The  reports  of  those  who 
are  familiar  with  the  Chinese  in  their  native 
state  and  condition  would  scarcely  sustain 
that  theory.  It  is  said  of  them  that  there 
is  no  race  on  earth  wherein  both  Morality 
and  Spirituality  are  at  a  lower  level. 

Herein  are  we  reminded  of  the  wisdom 
of  the  Master  Jesus,  who  is  reported  to 
have  said  to  the  Scribes  and  Pharisees:  "Not 
that  which  goeth  into  the  mouth  defileth  man, 
but  that  which  cometh  out  of  the  mouth,  this 
defileth  man." 

This  is  but  another  way  of  saying  that 
"Morality  is  not  a  matter  of  Meat"  nor  of 
food  in  any  form;  and  that  only  "those  things 
which  proceed  out  of  the  mouth,"  and  "come 
forth  from  the  heart,"  are  reliable  indices  of 
the  real  Moral  Status  of  a  Soul. 


3S8 


CHAPTER  XXXVI 


MARK  OF  THE  MASTER 


Throughout  all  the  past  ages  of  which  we 
have  authentic  information  the  central  theme 
about  which  the  interest  of  mankind  has  cen- 
tered has  been  and  still  is  the  great  problem 
of  another  life. 

During  all  those  ages  there  have  been  men 
who  have  wrought  out  the  solution  through 
a  definite  personal  experience  and  thereby 
reduced  the  great  problem  to  the  basis  of  ac- 
tual demonstration. 

Those  who  have  accomplished  this  tri- 
umphant result  have  at  all  times  been  excep- 
tions to  the  general  rule  among  men,  and  for 
this  reason  their  numbers  have  at  all  times 
been  comparatively  insignificant.  Nature  has 
so  provided  that  there  has  never  been  a  time, 
within  the  period  of  authentic  history,  when 
the  world  has  been  without  those  who  could 
speak  of  that  life  with  definite  authority,  the 

359 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

result  of  personal  experience  and  personal 
demonstration. 

With  few  exceptions,  these  personal  wit- 
nesses of  the  Truth  and  the  Light  have  suf- 
fered martyrdom  in  some  form,  or  been  com- 
pelled by  the  law  of  self-preservation  to 
withhold  their  knowledge  from  the  world. 

From  those  who  have  sought  to  share  their 
knowledge  with  their  brothers,  the  world  of 
skepticism  has  ever  demanded  a  "Sign."  It 
has  insisted  that  the  sign  shall  be  of  a  phe- 
nomenal nature.  Nothing  short  of  a  "Mira- 
cle" has  been  suflicient  to  satisfy.  In  their 
blindness  to  spiritual  conditions  and  spiritual 
things  they  have  been  unable  to  recognize  the 
"Mark  of  the  Master,"  even  when  it  has  been 
held  up  before  their  eyes  in  the  bright  sun- 
light of  Truth.  They  have  gone  away  dis- 
satisfied. In  their  ignorance  they  have  denied 
the  Truth  because  of  their  inability  to  recog- 
nize it  when  in  its  presence. 

The  Great  School  of  the  Masters  has  rec- 
ognized these  facts  throughout  the  ages.  It 
has  demonstrated,  to  its  own  satisfaction,  that 
"phen(jmena"  will  never  satisfy  a  skeptical  or 
an  intelligent  world.   They  may  stimulate  in- 


MARK  OF  THE  MASTER 

terest  and  inquiry  for  a  time,  but  they  will 
never  permanently  satisfy  the  demands  of  a 
Soul  for  a  personal  realization  of  Spiritual 
Truth. 

Nothing  but  the  internal  consciousness  of  a 
definite  personal  experience  will  ever  be  ac- 
cepted by  an  Intelligent  Soul  as  proof  posi- 
tive of  a  Spiritual  World  or  of  Individual 
Life  after  physical  death. 

Next  in  importance  after  this  Conscious 
Experience  is  what  the  Great  School  of  the 
Masters  defines  as  "Rational  Faith."  Natural 
Science  holds  that  Faith  is  "The  Intuitive 
Conviction  of  that  which  both  Reason  and 
Conscience  approve." 

For  the  great  majority  of  honest  seekers 
after  spiritual  knowledge — who  have  no  op- 
portunity for  the  personal  instruction  and 
consequent  demonstration  —  there  still  re- 
mains the  helpful  evidence  of  an  intelligent, 
orderly  and  consistent  "Testimony"  of  those 
who  have  "taken  the  Work,  traveled  in  for- 
eign countries,"  and  who  are  eager  to  impart 
as  much  of  their  treasure  of  knowledge  as 
possible. 

When  such  "testimony"  is  offered  by  the 


THE  GREAT  \V()RK 

"traveler"  whose  sanity,  intelligence  and  sin- 
cerity are  evident,  and  by  one  whose  teach- 
ings and  whose  life  are  consistent  for  good,  it 
becomes  the  substantial  basis  for  a  "Rational 
Faith''  in  the  Testimony  itself. 

Indeed,  the  central  hope  and  purpose  of  all 
general  public  work,  including  this  modern 
method  of  publication,  are  that  such  imper- 
sonal teaching  may  become  an  acceptable 
Testimony  as  to  those  inspiring  truths  —  the 
Continuity  of  Life  and  the  Constructive 
Principle  of  Nature  in  Individual  Life. 

So  long  as  commercialism  taints  the  con- 
sideration of  Spiritual  Things,  so  long  as 
Psychical  Research  looks  to  Subjective  Phe- 
nomena for  its  scientific  data,  so  long  as  "Ma- 
terial Manifestations"  are  sold  in  mcdium- 
istic  shops  as  a  matter  of  "business,"  that  long 
will  the  skeptical  investigator  withhold  his 
confidence,  and  just  that  long  will  Indepen- 
dent Demonstration  be  delayed  and  the  hon- 
est seeker  left  without  foundation  for  Ration- 
al Faith. 

Even  though  much  of  the  Subjective  Phe- 
nomena of  Mediumship  may  be  genuine,  it 

S63 


MARK  OF  THE  MASTER 

counts  for  little  in  the  minds  of  the  intelli- 
gently critical.  Why? 

Because  the  Moral  Significance  of  Life  af- 
ter Death  is  that  which  moves  the  noble  and 
the  high-minded  in  all  their  investigations, 
and  because  the  too  evident  gulf  between 
Phenomenal  Spiritualism  and  Morality  has 
been  and  must  continue  to  be  both  confusion 
and  disappointment  to  the  honest  and  intel- 
ligent seeker. 

For  these  and  other  adequate  reasons  The 
Great  School  of  Natural  Science  does  not  in 
the  least  depend  upon  objective  "phenom- 
ena" for  the  demonstration  of  its  knowledge. 
It  does  not  invoke  "phenomena"  for  the  pur- 
pose of  catching  the  interest  of  the  multi- 
tudes. 

Its  appeal  is  to  Rational  Intelligence  alone. 
To  those  who  demand  a  "Sign,"  it  says,  "No 
sign  shall  be  given  but  the  sign  of  a  Personal 
Experience."  No  sign  can  be  given  that  will 
satisfy  the  demands  of  Intelligence  but  the 
sign  of  a  Conscious  Personal  Experience. 
Experience  is  the  essential  basis  of  all  knowl- 
edge,  and   nothing  will  permanently  satisfy 

363 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

the  craving  of  a  Soul  that  is  hungry  for  Spir- 
itual Truth  but  definite  personal  knowledge. 

How,  then,  does  The  Great  School  of  the 
Masters  hope  to  establish  itself  in  the  confi- 
dence and  the  knowledge  of  the  masses  of 
mankind?  And  what  is  the  real  "Mark  of  the 
Master"?  By  what  distinguishing  badge  or 
insignia  may  the  world  know  him  fr(jni  the 
rest  of  mankind,  and  especially  from  the 
Sorcerer,  the  Black  Magician  or  the  Char- 
latan? 

If  he  will  not  "read  the  stars,"  nor  the 
"cards,"  nor  "palms"  for  the  curious;  if  he 
will  not  transmit  "messages"  from  the  de- 
parted, nor  "find  things"  that  are  lost;  if  he 
will  n(Jt  "utter  prophecies,"  nor  give  "psycho- 
metric readings";  if  he  will  not  "locate 
mines,"  nor  disclose  the  "past,  the  present  and 
the  future";  if  he  will  not  materialize  and  de- 
materialize  roses  out  of  season,  and  "spirits" 
in  the  air;  if  he  will  not  produce  "phenom- 
ena" whenever  asked,  nor  entertain  the  friv- 
olous, nor  satisfy  the  curious;  if  he  will  do 
none  of  these  things,  how  can  he  hope  to  be- 
come popular  among  the  masses  or  command 
their  attention?    And  if  he  will  do  nothing 

364 


MARK  OF  THE  MASTER 

"miraculous,"  how  shall  the  world  be  able  to 
distinguish  him  from  other  men? 

The  answers  are  simple  whether  satisfac- 
tory or  not. 

The  Masters  of  Natural  Science  are  not 
seeking  to  become  "popular"  in  any  personal 
sense. 

They  are  not  seeking  to  attract  nor  com- 
mand the  attention  of  the  masses  of  mankind 
who  are  seeking  only  for  amusement  and  en- 
tertainment. 

They  do  not  crave  the  notice  of  those  who 
are  seeking  satisfaction  through  the  per- 
formance of  "miracles"  and  the  production 
of  "phenomena." 

It  is  not  in  accord  with  the  spirit  and  pur- 
pose of  their  work  to  advertise  themselves  by 
any  badge  or  insignia  of  worldly  honors 
which  shall  distinguish  them  from  their 
brothers  among  men. 

There  are  indeed  indices  by  which  the 
Master  may  be  recognized  whenever  his  spe- 
cific mission  and  his  definite  work  are  of  such 
a  nature  as  to  make  it  impossible  for  him  to 
avoid  the  notice  of  others.  Some  of  these 
may  be  of  value  to  those  who  are  in  search  of 

365 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

the  "Path  which  leads  to  the  South,"  and 
who  are  ready  and  willing  to  travel  that  path 
when  they  have  found  it.  For  such  as  these 
the  following  data  are  intended: 

The  Masters  of  the  Great  School  never  un- 
der any  conditions  or  circumstances  whatso- 
ever, accept  a  material  reward  or  set  a  mate- 
rial price  upon  the  personal  instructions  they 
impart  to  their  tried,  tested  and  accepted  stu- 
dents. 

They  never  charge  nor  receive  a  material 
consideration  of  any  kind  whatsoever  for 
healing  the  sick,  comforting  the  sorrowing, 
lifting  up  the  fallen,  or  for  any  other  per- 
sonal ministration. 

They  do  not  devote  themselves  to  the  ac- 
cumulation of  material  wealth  nor  material 
things  beyond  such  as  may  be  necessary  for 
their  health  and  reasonable  comfort  and  for 
carrying  forward  the  definite  lines  of  the 
Great  Work  for  which  they  are  personally 
responsible. 

They  do  not  seek  the  applause  of  the 
world. 

They  do  not  strive  for  "Leadership,"  nor 
for  personal  aggrandizement. 


MARK  OF  THE  MASTER 

They  do  not  seek  to  dominate  or  control 
their  fellow  men  in  any  manner  whatsoever. 
They  seek  only  to  influence  them  through  the 
power  of  Reason  and  the  example  of  a  con- 
sistent Life. 

They  are  never  dogmatic  concerning  mat- 
ters of  which  they  are  ignorant. 

They  are  tolerant  of  the  religious  and 
philosophic  opinions  and  beliefs  of  all  men. 

They  are  never  arbitrary  in  speech  or  man- 
ner toward  those  with  whom  they  are  asso- 
ciated or  come  into  personal  contact. 

They  are  neither  intellectually  vain,  nor 
selfishly  ambitious. 

They  are  courteous,  considerate,  sympa- 
thetic and  kind  in  their  treatment  of  all  men. 

They  are  neither  boastful  nor  arrogant, 
covetous  nor  envious. 

They  never  allow  themselves  to  be  drawn 
into  personal  or  public  debates,  discussions, 
or  disputes. 

They  cultivate  the  "Wakeful  Conscious- 
ness" and  order  their  lives  by  principle 
rather  than  by  impulse. 

Self-Control  is  their  most  conspicuous 
characteristic.    They  accept  poverty  and  ad- 

367 


THK  GREAT  WORK 

versity  with  serenity  and  cheerfulness,  and 
pursue  their  purposes  with  an  abiding  sense 
of  their  Personal  Responsibility. 

They  are  generous  and  merciful  in  their 
treatment  of  their  fellow  man,  considerate 
and  compassionate  toward  all  animal  depen- 
dents, and  regardful  of  the  natural  rights  of 
all  life  in  all  the  kingdoms  of  Nature. 

They  have  the  courage  to  live  in  obscurity 
without  offices,  honors  or  emoluments,  that 
they  may  the  more  consistently  carry  out  the 
Great  Work  of  Emancipation,  and  that  they 
may  the  better  discharge  the  great  burden  of 
Personal  Responsibility  to  Humanity,  which 
their  broader  experience  and  their  definite 
knowledge  impose  upon  them. 

The  true  Master  seeks  only  the  place 
wherein  his  intelligence  and  his  abilities 
shall  accomplish  the  largest  measure  of  the 
most  valuable  service  to  the  cause  of  Truth 
and  Humanity. 

How  does  the  writer  know  that  what  he 
has  said  of  these  men  is  true? 

Because  for  almost  half  a  century  he  has 
been  in  daily  personal  contact  and  association 
with  the  Masters  of  the  Great  School. 

368 


CHAPTER  XXXVII 


THE  TRANSITION  CALLED  "DEATH" 


Perhaps  there  is  no  subject  within  the  ex- 
act sphere  of  Natural  Science  concerning 
which  its  definite  knowledge  would  be  of 
greater  practical  value  or  more  inspiring  in- 
terest than  that  of  the  Transition  we  call 
"Death." 

The  writer  has  witnessed  the  phenomenon 
of  the  separation  of  the  spiritual  body  from 
the  physical  in  the  process  of  physical  death. 
He  has  witnessed  this  wonderful  transition 
with  the  clear  vision  of  Independent  Spirit- 
ual Sight.     He  knows  whereof  he  speaks. 

He  is  aware  that  these  are  statements  which 
will  tax  the  credulity  of  many  honest  and 
earnest  seekers  after  Truth. 

By  death  is  meant  the  extinction  of  Indi- 
vidual Self-Consciousness,  personal  identity 
and  intelligent  activity  of  a  Man  when  his 
physical  body  ceases  its  functions  and  ac- 
tivities. 

369 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

The  certainty  of  physical  death  conditions 
all  life  to  restlessness.  It  shadows  all  human 
endeavor  with  a  sense  of  impermanency.  It 
deflects  a  Soul  from  purposeful  living  by 
bringing  into  life  the  continual  prospect  of 
reaching  the  end.  Anticipation  of  death  in- 
creases the  apparent  value  of  time.  It  cre- 
ates haste.  It  engenders  a  feverish  hurry  and 
struggle  for  immediate  satisfaction  and  hap- 
piness. 

It  is  safe  to  say  that  all  men  desire  to  live 
after  physical  death.  Most  of  them  hope  for 
such  a  life.  Many  have  faith.  There  are 
more  whose  hope  and  whose  faith  alternate 
with  misgiving  and  doubt.  For  Hope  is  not 
Faith,  nor  is  Faith  Knowledge,  yet  both  are 
inspirations  to  life.  Hope  is  anticipation  of 
desired  result.  Faith  is  the  steady  expectation 
of  a  Soul. 

Hope  for  and  expectation  of  life  beyond 
physical  death  appear  to  be  almost  insepar- 
able from  human  Intelligence.  In  this  de- 
sire and  expectation  the  savage,  the  seer,  and 
the  child  find  a  common  ground. 

It  is  as  natural  to  desire  life  after  physical 
death,  to  hope  for  it,  to  seek  knowledge  of  it, 

370 


THE  TRANSITION  CALLED  "DEATH" 

as  it  is  to  desire  food,  light  and  air.  It  is  an 
unfortunate  man  who  does  not  hope  for  life 
to  come.  It  is  a  diseased  or  abnormal  one 
who  does  not  desire  it.  A  man  without  hope 
or  desire  merely  exists.  He  can  scarcely  be 
said  to  live. 

Those  who  give  heed  to  their  intuitions  are 
never  without  hope.  Those  who  have  hope 
may  acquire  faith.  Those  who  have  both 
hope  and  faith  may  acquire  actual  knowledge, 
provided  they  have  the  INTELLIGENCE,  the 
COURAGE  and  the  PERSEVERANCE  to  prove  the 
law. 

Between  faith  without  science  and  science 
without  faith  Truth  runs  a  dangerous  gaunt- 
let in  this  world. 

The  great  body  of  human  Intelligence 
proceeds  along  two  lines  of  investigation. 
One  system  is  speculative  and  spiritualistic. 
The  other  is  scientific  and  physical.  One 
represents  Intuition  unsupported  by  Reason. 
The  other  represents  Reason  unaided  by  In- 
tuition. One  stands  for  only  a  spiritual  per- 
ception of  Ethical  principles.  The  other  rep- 
resents only  rational  conceptions  of  physical 
facts. 

S71 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

Mankind,  as  a  whole,  in  its  expectation  of 
a  continuity  of  life,  is  sustained  by  faith  and 
not  by  any  actual  scientific  knowledge  of  the 
Spiritual  World. 

The  creeds  of  Christendom  begin  "I  he- 
lieve."  Not  one  begins  "I  know,"  when  re- 
ferring to  spiritual  things.  By  the  adoption 
of  such  a  creed  theology  becomes  speculative 
philosophy.  This  is  true  of  any  religion  that 
docs  not  offer  a  rational  means  for  demon- 
strating its  dogmas. 

The  weakness  of  theology  is  its  ignorance 
of  physical  facts.  The  weakness  of  scientific 
skepticism  is  its  contempt  for  spiritual  facts. 
Both  systems,  being  human,  are  narrow. 
Each  is  honest,  and  therefore  susceptible  to 
evolutionary  processes. 

Intuitions  of  a  spiritual  life  are  not  proofs 
even  to  the  rational  mind  of  any  Individual. 
They  are  sources  of  consolation,  of  hope  and 
of  inspiration. 

If  the  Individual  could  really  know  that 
life  after  death  is  a  fact,  our  whole  dismal 
paraphernalia  of  death  would  disappear.  If 
men  entertained  even  an  unwavering  faith, 
their  lament  for  the  dead  would  be  modified. 

172 


THE  TRANSITION  CALLED  "DEATH" 

The  truth  is  that  the  professing  Christian 
mourner  exhibits  but  little  greater  fortitude 
and  faith  when  death  claims  a  friend  than 
does  the  average  unbeliever.  Our  Christian 
brothers  mourn  their  dead  with  an  abandon 
that  demonstrates  the  instability  of  their  faith. 

If  one  really  believes  in  a  spiritual  life 
there  is  neither  reason  nor  excuse  for  this  in- 
temperate grief.  If  a  man  could  know  what 
he  but  mournfully  hopes  rather  than  believes, 
the  house  of  the  dead  would  never  be  a 
house  of  despair. 

It  would  be  a  house  of  unselfish  rejoicing 
whenever  death  released  one  from  old  age, 
disease  or  sorrow.  When  a  man  knows  what 
physical  death  is  he  will  never  retard  a 
passing  Soul  with  selfish  grief. 

Did  women  possess  the  faith  they  claim, 
they  would  not  swathe  themselves  in  unsani- 
tary crape  nor  visit  cemeteries  to  commune 
with  the  dead  who  are  not  there. 

To  the  man  who  knows,  the  dead  body  is 
but  the  discarded  mantle  of  his  friend,  one 
that  had  served  the  uses  of  a  Soul  for  the 
time.    As  such,  the  body  is  entitled  to  due 

373 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

reverence  and  is  consigned  to  the  earth  or  the 
fire  without  exaggerated  grief. 

"If  a  man  die  shall  he  live  again?" 

Throughout  the  ages  man  has  put  this 
question  to  Nature. 

History,  tradition  and  experience  go  to 
show  that  this  question  rises  with  the  dawn  of 
Individual  Self-Consciousness. 

The  world's  history  is  made  up  of  the  is- 
sues of  life  and  death.  All  of  the  world's 
activities  are  shaped  by  this  expectation  of 
death.  The  uncertainty  as  to  what  lies  be- 
yond the  grave  more  or  less  affects  every  life. 
No  Individual  nor  community  nor  nation  es- 
capes the  shadow.  It  colors  individual  acts. 
It  enters  into  national  policies.  This  cer- 
tainty of  death  is  the  drop  of  gall  in  the  cup 
of  pleasure.  It  is  love's  terror.  Childhood 
fears  it.  Old  age  dreads  it.  Even  disease, 
poverty  and  crime  shrink  from  release  by 
death. 

It  was  declared  ages  ago  by  Buddha,  Zo- 
roaster, Confucius,  Christna,  and  later  by  our 
own  acknowledged  Master  Jesus:  "THERE 
IS  NO  DE.ATH." 

No    character    nor    amount    of    argument 

S74 


THE  TRANSITION  CALLED  "DEATH" 

will  ever  convince  mankind  that  these  Great 
Souls  w^ere  either  ignorant  or  dishonest,  when 
they  individually  declared  "There  is  no 
death."  If  there  were  no  other  evidence  of 
life  after  physical  death  than  the  unqualified 
testimony  of  the  Great  Spiritual  Masters  of 
all  times,  that  of  itself  should  be  sufficient  to 
establish  in  the  minds  of  humanity  the  fact 
that  the  Transition  we  call  "physical  Death", 
though  a  physical  reality,  is  but  the  opening 
of  Nature's  door  through  which  an  Essential 
Being,  a  "Soul",  passes  on  into  a  finer  life, 
in  a  world  of  spiritual  things. 

Desire  for  life  inspires  every  living  thing. 
It  is  man  alone  who  hopes  for  Immortality. 

Individual  Immortality  means  nothing 
more  and  nothing  less  than  a  condition  or 
state  of  being  wherein  an  Individual  possesses 
the  knowledge  and  the  power  to  come  into 
full  co-operation  with  Nature's  Constructive 
Principle. 

From  the  standpoint  of  this  work,  we  are 
not  concerned  with  the  question  as  to  whether 
this  may  or  may  not  mean  "Life  eternal"  or 
"Unending  existence,"  any  more  than  the 
astronomer  who  first   accurately  determined 

375 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

the  precession  of  the  equinoxes  was,  at  the 
time,  concerned  with  the  question  as  to  how 
many  sucfi  cycles  of  time  it  would  require  to 
constitute  an  "eternity." 

The  coming  into  possession  of  such  knowl- 
edge and  such  power  may  mean  "Life  eter- 
nal.'' It  may  mean  an  "Unending  existence." 
If  so,  then  Natural  Science  and  theology 
quite  agree.  If  not,  then  Natural  Science  oc- 
cupies the  stronger  ground  by  withholding  its 
judgment  upon  a  question  of  the  ultimate, 
which,  of  necessity,  lies  far  beyond  the  limi- 
tations of  its  power  of  judgment. 

To  make  this  distinction  entirely  clear,  our 
astronomers  are  today  able  to  calculate  the 
distances,  relative  locations,  lines  of  motion 
and  velocity  of  the  planets  with  such  mathe- 
matical exactness  as  to  determine  within  a 
very  few  seconds  the  time  of  an  eclipse  of  the 
sun,  or  of  the  transit  of  Venus.  All  of  their 
calculations  are  based  upon  a  very  broad 
hypothesis,  that  the  planets  will  continue  to 
move  in  the  future  just  as  they  have  done  in 
the  past. 

But  no  astronomer  would  be  rash  enough 
to  guarantee  that  the  sun  will  even  be  in  ex- 

376 


THE  TRANSITION  CALLED  "DEATH" 

istence  at  the  time  fixed  for  the  next  eclipse, 
or  that  Venus  will  not  have  exploded  long 
before  the  time  set  for  its  next  transit  of  the 
sun.  These  are  questions  he  at  once  recog- 
nizes as  beyond  the  limits  of  his  jurisdiction. 

The  most  he  can  truthfully  say  is  that,  in- 
asmuch as  history  informs  us  that  these 
planets  have  been  in  existence  many  hundreds 
of  years,  during  which  time  their  move- 
ments have  been  observed  and  calculated 
with  comparative  certainty,  we  have  the 
scientific  right  to  assume,  for  the  purposes  of 
these  calculations,  that  they  will  go  on  in  the 
same  way  for  some  time  to  come.  But  we 
have  no  scientific  license  to  declare  that  they 
are  absolutely  unchangeable,  or  that  in  their 
individual  capacity  they  are  necessarily 
"eternal." 

And  so,  when  Natural  Science  comes  to 
know  that  man  upon  the  spiritual  planes  of 
life  is  invested  with  the  power  to  come  into 
full  co-operation  with  what  we  have  desig- 
nated as  Nature's  Constructive  Principle,  it 
can  only  declare  that  fact  and  nothing  more. 
But  it  can  without  impropriety  suggest  that 
man  thus  appears  to  possess  the  power  of  in- 

S7? 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

definite  individual  persistence.  It  can  also 
point  out  that  to  all  appearances  this  would 
seem  to  indicate  ''Eternal  life"  or  "Unend- 
ing existence."  But  it  dares  not  dogmatize 
concerning  ultimates. 

From  the  standpoint  of  Natural  Science 
there  may  or  may  not  be  Immortality.  No 
one,  so  far  as  men  of  science  know,  has,  up  to 
this  time,  lived  out  an  "eternity"  or  an  "un- 
ending existence,"  and  therefore,  so  far  as 
we  know,  the  question  of  eternity  is  yet  one  of 
the  unsolved  problems. 


S7S 


CHAPTER  XXXVIII 


PASSING  OF  A  MASTER 


The  most  profound  problem  of  human  life 
and  the  most  pathetic  cry  of  the  human  Soul 
throughout  the  ages  have  been  the  problem 
and  the  cry:  "If  a  man  die  shall  he  live 
again?"  To  the  great  majority  of  mankind  in 
all  times  and  among  all  peoples  physical 
death  has  been  a  fearful  leap  into  the  dark- 
ness. The  River  of  Death  has  been  the  deep 
and  troubled  waters  of  uncertainty  and  dread 
with  the  farther  shore  enshrouded  in  deepest 
gloom.  The  travelers  of  earth  who  have  jour- 
neyed down  to  its  shadowy  bank  that  skirts 
the  plane  of  physical  life,  with  rare  excep- 
tions have  vainly  peered  out  into  the  dark- 
ness across  its  black  surface  to  catch  one  as- 
suring glint  of  light  from  the  farther  shore. 
Their  sense  of  vision  has  been  lost  in  the 
blackness  of  darkness,  and  they  have  re- 
sponded to  the  signal  of  the  dread  Ferryman 
with  no  ray  of  hope  to  guide  them. 

379 


THE  GRKAT  WORK 

Now  and  then,  there  has  been  one  whose 
vision  has  been  clear,  and  to  whom  the  other 
shore  of  life  has  been  distinctly  visible. 
These  few  have  been  able  to  penetrate  the 
darkness  of  physical  obscurity  and  behold 
with  perfect  vision  the  Spiritual  World  shin- 
ing clear  and  strong  beyond  the  dark  and 
troubled  waters. 

What  a  difference  this  clearer  vision  has 
made  in  the  attitude  of  Soul  of  those  who 
have  come  down  to  the  River  of  Death  at  the 
end  of  this  life's  journey!  To  such  as  these 
the  voyage  across  the  dark  waters  that  stretch 
between  the  two  worlds,  or  the  two  conti- 
nents of  life,  is  but  a  voyage  from  the  dark 
Continent  of  Death  to  the  Land  of  Spiritual 
Life  and  Light.  It  is  a  voyage  toward  the 
Harbor  of  Truth  and  the  Haven  of  Peace. 
It  is  a  voyage  from  the  banks  of  Time  to  the 
shores  of  Eternity.  To  those  who,  from  this 
side  of  life,  have  been  able  to  look  across  to 
the  other  shore  and  see  the  lights  of  the  City 
of  Life,  the  journey  is  begun  with  a  song  of 
joy  in  the  heart  and  of  thanksgiving  upon 
the  lips.  A  definite  knowledge  of  that  which 
lies  beyond  removes  all  doubts  and  all  fears. 

380 


PASSING  OF  A  MASTER 

Those  who  possess  such  knowledge  know  that 
the  closing  of  this  life  is  but  the  opening  of 
the  doors  of  the  spiritual  life.  To  such  as 
these  "Death  is  swallowed  up  in  Victory." 

Those  who  have  had  the  definite  knowl- 
edge of  another  life  have  been  able  to  share 
their  joy  with  many  whom  they  have  been 
able  to  inspire  with  an  abiding  Hope  of  Im- 
mortality. The  definite  testimony  of  the  Mas- 
ters has  inspired  many  to  walk  by  Faith  the 
hard  path  of  this  life,  and  with  serenity  and 
confidence  journey  out  into  the  mysterious 
realms  of  the,  to  them,  Unknown. 

Next  to  the  Sunlight  of  Knowledge  the 
Star  of  Faith  shines  most  brightly  in  the  lives 
of  men  and  illumines  most  brilliantly  the 
pathway  of  earth.  An  abounding  Faith  in 
the  testimonies  of  men  has  enabled  many  a 
trusting  Soul  to  say  with  the  Psalmist:  "Yea, 
though  I  walk  through  the  valley  of  the 
Shadow  of  Death,  I  will  fear  no  evil."  For 
even  with  the  eye  of  Faith  alone  they  are  able 
to  discern  the  stupendous  fact  of  Nature,  that 
what  we  call  "Death"  is,  after  all,  but  the 
"Shadow  of  Death"  —  an  illusion  of  the 
senses. 

nx 


THK  CiREAT  WORK 

What  does  it  all  mean?  What  is  the  good 
of  Independent  Spiritual  Unfoldment?  ^^'hat 
advantage  is  there  to  the  individual  in  being 
a  Master?  Why  not  wait  patiently  and  let 
Nature  have  her  own  time  and  way,  and  thus 
save  ourselves  the  Personal  Effort  of  solving 
the  problem  of  another  life?  Will  not  the 
incident  we  call  physical  death  solve  the 
problem  for  each  and  all  of  us,  if  we  will  but 
entrust  the  matter  to  Nature?  Is  not  physical 
death  the  great  leveler?  And  does  it  not 
bring  us  all,  the  great  and  the  small,  the  wise 
and  the  ignorant,  the  good  and  the  bad,  to 
the  same  level?  Does  not  the  ignorant  man 
know  as  much  about  Spiritual  Life  and  Spir- 
itual Things  after  he  has  traversed  "the  Val- 
ley of  the  Shadow"  and  entered  into  that  life, 
as  does  the  wisest  of  the  Masters?  Does  In- 
dependent Spiritual  Unfoldment  or  Master- 
ship on  the  plane  of  earth  mean  anything  to 
an  individual  after  he  has  crossed  "the  Great 
Divide"? 

What  does  the  transition  across  the  Valley 
of  the  Shadow  of  Death  mean  to  a  Man  who 
has  already  proven  the  continuity  of  life,  and 

382 


PASSING  OF  A  MASTER 

has  traveled  at  Will  in  the  realms  of  the 
beyond? 

When  the  Master  comes  to  the  final  tran- 
sition called  "Death,"  he  himself  has  no 
doubts  as  to  the  issue.  He  knows  that  this  is 
but  another  step  in  the  Evolution  of  an  In- 
dividual. He  knows  that  death  does  not  end 
his  career.  He  knows  that  his  personal  iden- 
tity will  not  be  lost,  nor  even  clouded  for  an 
hour.  He  knows  that  in  death  there  is  no 
sting. 

When  he  approaches  the  final  hour  for 
parting  with  the  physical  it  is  to  him  but  the 
hour  of  his  liberation  and  his  reward. 

From  his  earthly  environment  he  passes 
with  all  his  faculties  and  powers  intact.  He 
is  conscious  of  what  is  taking  place  about  him 
and  within  him.  He  knows  his  destination, 
for  he  has  been  over  the  pathway  and  back 
again  many  times. 

When  he  has  made  the  Transition  he  knows 
that  in  passing  from  this  life  into  the  spiritual 
he  is  but  entering  into  other  and  larger  fields 
of  evolutionary  opportunities  and  possi- 
bilities. 

383 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

He  is  Master  of  the  "Messenger  of 
Death." 

For  him  there  are  no  ''Terrors  at  the 
Threshold"  to  be  encountered.  He  has  passed 
them  all  long  ago.  He  knows  that  his  work 
and  his  place  are  awaiting,  and  that  he  will 
be  able  to  take  up  the  one  and  to  fill  the 
other.  Every  step  of  the  way  from  the  plane 
of  earth,  through  all  the  phases  and  mysteries 
of  the  Magnetic  Field,  into  and  through  the 
First,  Second,  Third  and  Fourth  Spiritual 
Planes,  beyond  these  still  upward  and  on- 
ward to  the  highest  point  of  his  individual 
attainment,  is  already  familiar  through  his 
previous  experiences. 

In  the  year  1897  there  passed  through  the 
Gates  of  Physical  Death  into  the  splendors 
of  the  Higher  Life  one  of  the  greatest  of 
these  earthly  Masters. 

He  was  not  known  in  this  country,  though 
he  had  been  in  our  midst,  studied  our  people 
and  laid  the  foundation  of  this  modern  pres- 
entation of  the  Ancient  Science. 

He  was  an  Oriental,  who  was  born  a 
Prince  of  India  and  who  was  indeed  of  royal 
spirit  as  well  as  of  name  and  estate.    When 


PASSING  OF  A  MASTER 

his  great  Desire  for  knowledge  and  Truth 
brought  him  to  the  door  of  The  Great  School 
of  the  Masters,  he  distributed  his  princely 
revenues  and  divided  his  estates  among  the 
poor  of  his  own  country.  This  he  did  that 
he  might  the  better  meet  his  opportunity  and 
from  the  common  level  of  poverty  receive  his 
instruction,  make  the  demonstration  and 
serve  mankind. 

Great  Intelligence,  Great  Heart,  Great 
Soul,  whose  wisdom  and  whose  service  have 
carried  him  far  beyond  the  shining  walls  of 
the  lower  Spiritual  Planes  and  given  him 
place  and  authority  among  the  Powers  of 
Light  in  distant  Realms! 

By  his  knowledge  of  the  laws  of  Nature 
he  had  lengthened  the  span  of  his  physical 
life  far  beyond  the  "allotted  time  of  man." 
This  he  did,  not  that  he  desired  life  in  the 
body,  but  that  he  elected  to  remain  until  he 
had  finished  certain  tasks  set  for  himself  by 
himself  which  he  regarded  as  part  of  his 
Personal  Responsibility  to  mankind. 

When  he  realized  that  his  labors  had  been 
accomplished  and  that  he  had  "finished  his 
work,"  he  ceased  to  employ  unusual  means 

385 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

of  prolonging  his  life.  Then  having  re- 
turned again  to  the  seclusion  of  the  Central 
Temple,  here  among  his  Brothers  in  the 
Great  Work  he  made  the  transition,  leaving 
to  them  the  simple  ceremony  of  scattering 
his  ashes  to  the  winds. 

This  man  whose  marvelous  learning  and 
marvelous  powers  and  whose  charm  of 
personality  would  have  won  for  him  the  ad- 
miration of  the  world,  was  content  to  live  his 
long  and  arduous  life  in  complete  obscurity 
that  he  might  better  do  his  work  and  better 
serve  his  fellow  men. 

It  was  from  this  Great  Soul  that  the  writer 
received  his  first  instruction  in  The  Great 
School  of  the  Masters.  To  his  great  wisdom 
and  patience  and  goodness  the  writer  is  in- 
debted for  the  definite  personal  direction 
which  has  enabled  him  to  verify,  through  a 
Personal  Experience,  the  Truths  which  are 
herein  set  forth. 

When  such  as  these  lay  down  the  burden 
of  physical  life,  when  the  transition  is  made 
in  full  knowledge  of  the  life  beyond,  when 
it  is  made  in  the  clear  consciousness  of  duties 
well  performed,  then  it  is  that  the  liberated 

386 


PASSING  OF  A  MASTER 

Soul — divested  of  its  heavier  mantle  of  ma- 
terialit}^ — rises  into  such  conditions  of  Indi- 
vidual Freedom,  Power  and  Happiness  and 
into  such  regions  of  transcendent  light  and 
loveliness  as  "it  hath  not  entered  into  the 
heart  of  man"  to  realize  or  understand. 

When  such  as  these  pass  through  the 
''Shadow"  of  death  they  find  themselves,  not 
only  in  the  place  and  in  the  condition  of  per- 
sonal compensations,  but  they  find  them- 
selves in  such  fellowship  with  the  Great  and 
Good  gone  before  as  dims  the  memory  of 
their  earthly  loneliness.  They  face  such 
new  and  marvelous  opportunities  for  further 
self-development  and  further  service  to  man- 
kind that  all  past  labors,  deprivations,  disci- 
plines and  martyrdoms  appear  as  a  most  triv- 
ial price  of  such  rewards. 

These  are  they  who,  with  undaunted  cour- 
age and  noble  inspiration,  continue  in  their 
individual  work  and  their  altruistic  labors 
for  humanity,  that  they  may  the  more  fully 
realize  Life  and  Liberty  and  Service. 

These  are  they  whose  wisdom  is  so  pro- 
found and  whose  purity  so  child-like  that 
they  not  only  seek  counsel  of  each  other,  but 

387 


THE  GREAT  WORK 

reverently  acknowledge  the  yet  greater  Pow- 
ers and  still  seek  the  aid  and  the  blessing  of 
Him  whom  we  know  as  the  Supreme  Ruler 
of  this  planet,  and  of  whom  we  devoutly 
speak  as  "The  Father." 

At  each  Annual  Convocation  of  The  Great 
School  of  the  Masters,  met  for  consideration 
of  its  Work  for  Mankind,  that  marvelous 
Assembly,  one  in  Spirit  and  one  in  Purpose, 
reverently  repeat  with  bowed  heads,  a  simple 
Prayer,  thereby  invoking  the  continued  ap- 
proval of  Him  whose  Glorious  Presence  il- 
lumines all  Spheres  below,  and  by  whose 
Light  all  men  of  earth  are  free  to  travel  up- 
ward toward  the  summit  of  all  Planetary 
Wisdom,  and  Power,  and  Glory  and  Hap- 
piness. 


stt 


The  following  page  contains 
the  publications  of 
The  Great  School  of  Natural 


a  list  o<     i 
1  Sdenoe     | 


HARMONIC  LITERATURE 


Vol.      I.     Harmonics   of    Evolution,  Florence  Huntley $3.00 

The  Struggle  for  Happiness,  and  Indi- 
vidual    Completion     Through    Polarity 
or  Affinity. 


Vol.     n.     The    Great   Psychological    Crime. 
The    Destructive    Principle   of   Nature 
in   Individual   Life. 


$3.00 


Vol.  HI.     The   Great  Work /  J3.00 

The   Constructive   Principle  of  Nature  I  J-   ^• 

in   Indizndual   Life.  I  „.   ,         , 

jRichardson 

Vol.   IV.     The   Great  Known f        TK.  ^'"^^ 

What  Science  Knows  of  the  Spiritual 
World. 


Vol.     V.     The   Great   Message 

The   Lineal  Key   of   the    Great  School 
of  the  Masters. 

Vol.      I.     Self-Unfoldment ) 


$3.00 


$2.00 


Vol.     11.     Self-Unfoldment | J-  E.  Richardson,  TK    ^^^^ 


Who   Answers   Prayer?    po,   ra,   tk $1.00 

The  Great  W^ork  In  America    (Magazine) 1  year  $3.25 


PIONBBK  PBESS 
HoUjrwood,  OallX. 


The  Great  Psychological 
Crime 

By  J.  E.  RICHARDSON,  TK. 

Vol.  II 

HARMONIC  SERIES 

The  book  is  a  masterpiece  of  consistent  statement 
and  logical  development. 

The  subject  of  Insanity  is  daily  assuming  greater 
importance.  At  least  58  per  cent  of  the  so-called 
Insane  can  be  absolutely  cured.  This  book  tells  how 
and  why  this  is  true.  It  makes  clear  many  of  the 
greatest  puzzles  of  medical  science. 

This  is  the  book  which  shows  how  and  why  those 
who  seek,  by  means  of  experiments  with  Hypnotism, 
Spiritualism  and  Mediumship,  to  prove  that  there  is 
another  life  after  death,  fail  to  accomplish  it  scien- 
tifically, fail  to  get  the  satisfaction  they  seek,  and 
often  end  in  insane  asylums. 

The  author's  analysis  of  Hypnotism  and  Medium- 
ship  is  masterly  and  complete.  For  fifteen  chapters 
by  the  most  relentless  logic  and  unanswerable  facts, 
which  no  one  has  challenged,  he  proves  that  Sub- 
jective Spiritual  "Mediumship"  and  Hypnotism  are 
vitally  destructive  to  the  physical  body  and  the 
Human  Soul. 

No  orthodox  Christian,  Spiritualist,  Agnostic, 
Professional  Alienist,  Professor  of  Psychology,  nor 
Judge  on  the  bench  should  pass  this  book  unread. 

Every  practicing  physician  owes  it  to  himself  and 
the  community  in  which  he  lives,  to  study  and  weigh 
the  statements  in  this  book;  for  he  can  no  longer 
stultify  his  conscience  by  opposing  the  demonstrable 
facts  of  science;  because  it  may  not  come  through 
the  "regular"  channels,  or  the  particular  school  he 
may  happen  to  represent. 

If  you  will  Read,  you  will 
know  and   understand. 

$3i)0 


"The  Boston  Herald"  says  editorially  that  these  are 

"Books  That  Change  the  Course  of 
Human  Lives" 


HARMONIC  LITERATURE 


Vol.      I.     Harmonics    of    Evolution,    Florence    Huntley $3.dO 

The  Struggle  for  Happinrss,  and  Indi- 
vidual Completion  Through  Polarity  or 
Affinity. 

Vol.    n.     The  Great  Psycliolojiical  Crime $3,dO 

The  Destructive  Principle  of  Nature  in  \ 
Individual  Life.  I 

Vol.  HI.     The  Great  Work /  ^3^ 

The  Constructive  Principle  of  Nature  in!  •'■ 

Individual  Life.  Richardson, 

Vol.  IV.     The  Great  Known _ yj^  $3.60 

ff'hat   Science   Knows    of  the  Spiritual 
World.  \ 

Vol.     V.     The  Great  Message 1  ^3.60 

The    Lineal   Key    of  the    Great   School] 
of  the  Masters.  ' 

Vol.      I.     Self-Unfoldment \  $2.d5 

/     J.  E.  Richardson,  TK. 
Vol.    H.     Self-Unfoldmcnt J  $2.00 


Who  Answers  Prayer?    po,  ra,  tk $lJ>t) 

The   Great   Work    in    America    (Magazine) 1  year  $3.0P 


PIONEER  PRESS 

2£>,<{66  bpaniiih  Kanch  KuaJ,  Lub  Gatos,  CaiiXorniA